Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Diagnostic Procedures in
OPHTHALMOLOGY
SECOND EDITION
Diagnostic Procedures in
Former Professor and Head Department of Ophthalmology Institute of Medical Sciences Banaras Hindu University Varanasi, Uttar Pradesh, India
HV Nema
Assistant Professor Department of Ophthalmology Sri Aurobindo Institute of Medical Sciences Indore, Madhya Pradesh, India
Nitin Nema
MS Dip NB
Published by Jitendar P Vij Jaypee Brothers Medical Publishers (P) Ltd Corporate Office 4838/24 Ansari Road, Daryaganj, New Delhi - 110 002, India, +91-11-43574357 (30 lines) Registered Office B-3 EMCA House, 23/23B Ansari Road, Daryaganj, New Delhi 110 002, India Phones: +91-11-23272143, +91-11-23272703, +91-11-23282021, +91-11-23245672, Rel: +91-11-32558559 Fax: +91-11-23276490, +91-11-23245683 e-mail: jaypee@jaypeebrothers.com, Website: www.jaypeebrothers.com Branches 2/B, Akruti Society, Jodhpur Gam Road Satellite Ahmedabad 380 015 Phones: +91-79-26926233, Rel: +91-79-32988717 Fax: +91-79-26927094 e-mail: ahmedabad@jaypeebrothers.com 202 Batavia Chambers, 8 Kumara Krupa Road, Kumara Park East Bengaluru 560 001 Phones: +91-80-22285971, +91-80-22382956, +91-80-22372664 Rel: +91-80-32714073, Fax: +91-80-22281761 e-mail: bangalore@jaypeebrothers.com 282 IIIrd Floor, Khaleel Shirazi Estate, Fountain Plaza, Pantheon Road Chennai 600 008 Phones: +91-44-28193265, +91-44-28194897, Rel: +91-44-32972089 Fax: +91-44-28193231 e-mail: chennai@jaypeebrothers.com 4-2-1067/1-3, 1st Floor, Balaji Building, Ramkote Cross Road Hyderabad 500 095 Phones: +91-40-66610020, +91-40-24758498, Rel:+91-40-32940929 Fax:+91-40-24758499 e-mail: hyderabad@jaypeebrothers.com No. 41/3098, B & B1, Kuruvi Building, St. Vincent Road Kochi 682 018, Kerala Phones: +91-484-4036109, +91-484-2395739, +91-484-2395740 e-mail: kochi@jaypeebrothers.com 1-A Indian Mirror Street, Wellington Square Kolkata 700 013 Phones: +91-33-22651926, +91-33-22276404, +91-33-22276415 Rel: +91-33-32901926, Fax: +91-33-22656075, e-mail: kolkata@jaypeebrothers.com Lekhraj Market III, B-2, Sector-4, Faizabad Road, Indira Nagar Lucknow 226 016 Phones: +91-522-3040553, +91-522-3040554 e-mail: lucknow@jaypeebrothers.com 106 Amit Industrial Estate, 61 Dr SS Rao Road, Near MGM Hospital, Parel Mumbai 400012 Phones: +91-22-24124863, +91-22-24104532, Rel: +91-22-32926896 Fax: +91-22-24160828 e-mail: mumbai@jaypeebrothers.com KAMALPUSHPA 38, Reshimbag, Opp. Mohota Science College, Umred Road Nagpur 440 009 (MS) Phone: Rel: +91-712-3245220, Fax: +91-712-2704275 e-mail: nagpur@jaypeebrothers.com USA Office 1745, Pheasant Run Drive, Maryland Heights (Missouri), MO 63043, USA, Ph: 001-636-6279734 e-mail: jaypee@jaypeebrothers.com, anjulav@jaypeebrothers.com Diagnostic Procedures in Ophthalmology 2009, HV Nema, Nitin Nema All rights reserved. No part of this publication should be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means: electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of the editors and the publisher. This book has been published in good faith that the material provided by contributors is original. Every effort is made to ensure accuracy of material, but the publisher, printer and editors will not be held responsible for any inadvertent error(s). In case of any dispute, all legal matters to be settled under Delhi jurisdiction only. First Edition: 2002 Second Edition: 2009 ISBN 978-81-8448-595-0 Typeset at JPBMP typesetting unit Printed at Replika Press
Contributors
Jorge L Ali
MD, PhD
Surbhit Chaudhary
MS
Sonal Ambatkar
DNB
Taraprasad Das
MS
Francisco Arnalich
MD
Munish Dhawan
MD
Sreedharan Athmanathan
MD, DNB
Lingam Gopal
MS, FRCS
Mandeep S Bajaj
MD
Chairman Medical Research Foundation Sankara Nethralaya, Chennai Tamil Nadu, India
AK Grover
MD, FRCS
Tinku Bali
MS
Consultant Department of Ophthalmology Sir Ganga Ram Hospital, New Delhi, India
Chairman Department of Ophthalmology Sir Ganga Ram Hospital New Delhi, India
Roshmi Gupta
MD
Rituraj Baruah
MS
Sanjiv Gupta
MD
Jyotirmay Biswas
MS, FAMS
Head, Ocular, Pathology and Uveitis Sankara Nethralaya, Chennai Tamil Nadu, India
Stephen C Hilton
OD
Ambar Chakravarty
MS, FRCP
Santosh G Honavar
MD, FACS
Honorary Professor and Head Department of Neurology Vivekananda Institute of Medical Sciences Kolkata, West Bengal, India
Director Department of Ophthalmic Plastic Surgery and Ocular Oncology, LV Prasad Eye Institute Hyderabad, Andhra Pradesh, India
viii
A Narayanaswamy
Subhadra Jalali
MS
Head Smt Kanuri Santhamma Retina-Vitreous Centre LV Prasad Eye Institute Hyderabad, Andhra Pradesh, India
Rajiv Nath
MS
Sadao Kanagami
FOPS
Tomohiro Otani
MD
Sangmitra Kanungo
MD, FRCS
Nikhil Pal
MD
Shahnawaz Kazi
MS
Senior Resident Dr RP Centre for Ophthalmic Sciences AIIMS, New Delhi, India
Rajul Parikh
MS
R Kim
DO
Head Retina-Vitreous Service Aravind Eye Hospital and Postgraduate Institute of Ophthalmology Madurai, Tamil Nadu, India
David Piero
OD
Parmod Kumar
OD
K Kalyani Prasad
MS
S Manoj
MS
Consultant Retina-Vitreous Service Aravind Eye Hospital and Postgraduate Institute of Ophthalmology, Madurai, Tamil Nadu, India
Leela V Raju
MD
S Meenakshi
MS
VK Raju
Amit Nagpal
MS
LS Mohan Ram
D Opt, BS
Contributors
R Ramakrishnan
MS
ix
Professor and CMO Aravind Eye Hospital Tirunelveli, Tamil Nadu, India
MD
MD
Senior Resident Dr RP Centre for Ophthalmic Sciences, AIIMS New Delhi, India
Pukhraj Rishi
MD
Devindra Sood
MD
Monica Saha
MBBS
MS Sridhar
MD
Chandra Sekhar
MD
S Sudharshan
MS
Kallakuri Sumasri
B Optm
Senior Research Associate Dr RP Centre for Ophthalmic Sciences AIIMS, New Delhi, India
Pradeep Sharma
T Surendran
MS, M Phil
Vice Chairman and Director Pediatric Ophthalmology Sankara Nethralaya Chennai, Tamil Nadu, India
Savitri Sharma
MD
Head Jhaveri Microbiological Centre LV Prasad Eye Institute Hyderabad, Andhra Pradesh, India
Vasumathy Vedantham
Consultant, Retina-Vitreous Service Aravind Eye Hospital and Postgraduate Institute of Ophthalmology Madurai, Tamil Nadu, India
L Vijaya
MS
xii
xiii
Acknowledgements
The publication of the second edition of Diagnostic Procedures in Ophthalmology is possible with the help and cooperation of many colleagues and friends. We wish to express our gratitude to all the contributing authors for their time and painstaking efforts not only for writing the comprehensive and well illustrative chapters but also updating and revising them to conform the format of the book. We are indebted to Prof JL Ali, Dr Vasumathy Vadantham and Dr Tarun Sharma for contributing chapters on a short notice because the initial contributors failed to submit their chapters. Our grateful thanks go to Dr Mahipal Sachdev for persuading Dr Manotosh Ray to write a chapter on Confocal Microscopy. Mrs Pratibha Nema deserves our deep appreciation; without her patience, tolerance and understanding, this book would not have become reality. Finally, Shri Jitendar P Vij (Chairman and Managing Director), Mr Tarun Duneja (DirectorPublishing) and supporting staff of M/s Jaypee Brothers Medical Publishers (P) Ltd, New Delhi especially deserve our sincere thanks for their cooperation and keen interest in the publication of this book. HV Nema Nitin Nema
Contents
1. Visual Acuity ..................................................................................................................... 1
Stephen C Hilton, Leela V Raju, VK Raju
6. Tonometry .......................................................................................................................... 95
R Ramakrishnan, Sonal Ambatkar
xviii
Visual Acuity
Visual Acuity
Vision is the most important of all senses. Approximately 80% of the information from the outside world is incorporated through the visual pathway. Loss of vision has a profound effect on the quality of life. The process of vision includes: 1. Central resolution (visual acuity) 2. Minimal light sensitivity 3. Contrast sensitivity 4. Detection of motion 5. Color perception 6. Color contrast 7. Peripheral vision (spatial, temporal and motion detection). In the normal clinical settings, we measure only one of these functions central resolution at high contrast (visual acuity).1
human optic system to identify two points as different stimuli is defined as the threshold of resolution. Visual acuity is the reciprocal of the threshold of resolution.2 Clinically, discriminating letters in a chart determine this, but this task also requires recognition of the form and shape of the letters, which are processes that also involve higher centers of visual perception. Discrimination at a retinal level may, therefore, be determined by less complex stimuli, such as contrast sensitivity gratings. Theoretically, the maximum resolving power of the human retina could be derived from an estimate of the angle of approximately 20 seconds of arc because this represents the smallest unit distance between two individually stimulated cones. Thus the resolving power of the eye could be much greater than what is measured by visual acuity charts.3 Cones have the highest discriminatory capacity, but rods can also achieve some resolution. The greater the distance from the fovea the level of visual acuity falls off rapidly. At a 5 distance from the foveal center, visual acuity is only one quarter of foveal acuity.4 Luminance of test object, optical aberrations of the eye and the degree of adaptation of the observer also influence the visual acuity.5
Fig. 1.1: Snellen letters subtend one minute of arc in each section, the entire letter subtends five minutes of arc
Fig. 1.2: Each component of Snellen letters subtend one minute of visual angle the entire letter subtends five minutes of visual angle at stated distance
Visual Acuity
should be observed accurately. The Snellen notation is simply an equivalent reduction for near, maintaining the same visual angle. Most of the Snellen-based distance acuity charts are also commercially available as pocket charts to check the near acuity at a preferred distance for every patient or at a defined distance for clinical trial purposes including ETDRS (Fig. 1.4) and Snellen letter E. The Jaeger notation is a historic enigma and Jaeger never committed himself to the distance at which the print should be used. The numbers on the Jaeger chart simply refer to the numbers on the boxes in the print shop from which Jaeger
selected his type sizes in 1854. They have no biologic or optical foundation. Clinically, Jaegers charts (Fig. 1.5) are widely used. Central visual acuity is designated by two numbers. The numerator indicates the distance between the test object and the patient; the denominator indicates the distance at which the test object subtends an angle of five minutes. In the United States these numbers are given in inches or feet, whereas in the Europe the designation is in meters. The test chart commonly used in the United States has its largest test object one that subtends an angle of five minutes at a distance of 200 feet (6 m). Then there are test objects of 100, 80, 70, 60, 50, 40, 30, 20 and 15 feet. If the individual is unable to recognize the largest test object, then he or she should be brought closer to it, and the distance at which he or she recognizes it should be recorded. Thus, if the individual recognizes the test object that subtends a five minute angle at 200 feet when he or she is at 12 feet, the visual acuity is recorded as 12/200. This is not a fraction but indicates two physical
Visual Acuity
Fig. 1.5B Fig. 1.5B: Near vision chart: Music type and numericals
Fig. 1.6: Broken C, letter E and pictures of familiar objects for testing visual acuity in illiterates and children
measurements, the test distance and the size of the test object. The most familiar test objects are letters or numbers. Such tests have the disadvantage of requiring some literacy on the part of the patient. Additionally, there is a variation in their ability to be recognized. L is considered the easiest letter in the alphabet to read and B is considered the most difficult. To obviate this difficulty, broken rings (Fig. 1.6) have been devised in which the break in the ring subtends one minute angle, and the ring subtends a five minute angle. Similarly, the letter E may be arranged so that it faces in different directions (Fig. 1.6). These test objects are easier to see than letters, eliminate some of the difficulties inherent in reading, and
Visual Acuity
Uncorrected refractive error is a common cause of poor acuity. Physical factors include illumination and contrast. Increased illumination increases visual acuity from threshold to a point at which no further improvement can be elicited. In the clinical situation this is 5-20 foot candles. When contrast is reduced more illumination is required to resolve an object. Beyond a certain point, illumination can create glare. Therefore, visual acuity is recorded under photopic condition and one wants to evaluate best visual acuity at the fovea. Physiological conditions include pupil size, accommodation, light-dark adaptation and age.2
Pupil Size
The pupil size has great influence on visual acuity. Visual acuity decreases if pupils are smaller than 2 mm due to diffraction. Pupil diameters larger than 3.5 mm increase aberration. Variation in pupil size changes acuity by altering illumination, increasing depth of focus, and modifying the diameter of the blur circle on the retina.
Accommodation
An accommodation creates miosis, which could account for small hyperopic prescriptions being rejected for distance viewing in younger individuals. It is worth while to discuss the role of a pinhole in obtaining the best visual acuity in the clinical setting. The optimum pinhole is 2.5 mm in diameter. A pinhole in an occluder (Fig. 1.7) may be introduced in a trial frame with the opposite eye occluded. Single pinhole device is not adequate. The patient must be able to find a hole, therefore, multiple pinholes are preferred. If the patient is older or infirm, or has tremors, he is asked to read only a single letter from each line as we proceed down the chart to record the vision.
Many patients have been referred for neuro-ophthalmologic consultation because of painless loss of vision in one eye only. The best visual acuity may be 20/60 in the affected eye but when properly tested with the pinhole, the acuity may improve to 20/20. This indicates that the macula and optic nerve are functioning normally. When the patients vision is improved with pinhole one knows the problem is a refractive one and simply need the change in glasses. If the patients vision is less when looking through the pinhole; it indicates that the patient has either an organic lesion at macula, or a central scotoma, or functional amblyopia. A patient with 20/400 vision that improves with pinhole to 20/70 indicates that the improvement is refractive, but some pathology may also be present.
In this group of preschool children, visual acuity testing is easier to perform with the use of the following charts: 1. Allen and Osterberg charts (Fig. 1.11) 2. Illiterate E chart 3. Landolt broken ring.
Visual Acuity
Contrast is defined as the ratio of the difference in the luminance of these two adjacent areas to the lower or higher of these luminance values. The amount of contrast a person needs to see a target is called contrast threshold. The contrast sensitivity is assessed by using the contrast sensitivity chart. It has 5-8 different sizes of letters in six or more shades of gray. Some contrast sensitivity charts contain a series of alternating black and white bars; 100 line pairs per mm is equivalent to space of one minute between two black lines. The alternating bar pattern is described as spatial frequency. The contrast sensitivity is measured in units of cycles per degrees (CPD). A cycle is a black bar and white spaces. To convert Snellen units to units of cycles per degree, divide 180 by Snellen denominator. Contrast sensitivity measurements differ from acuity measurements; acuity is a measure of the spatial resolving ability of the visual system under conditions of very high contrast, whereas contrast sensitivity is a measure of the threshold contrast for seeing a target.8
Contrast Sensitivity
A general definition of spatial contrast is that it is a physical dimension referring to the lightdark transition at a border or an edge of an image that delineates the existence of a pattern or object.
10
TABLE 1.1: RANGES AND ASPECTS OF VISION LOSS Visual ability aspects/functional vision (how the person functions-daily living skills) Visual acuity Visual aids None 110 105 100 95 90 85 80 75 Vision enhancements aids 50 45 40 35 30 25 20 15 Vision substitution aids 10 5 0 70 65 60 55 Note that normal adult vision is better than 20/20 20/12.5 20/16 20/20 20/25 20/32 20/40 20/50 20/63 20/80 20/100 20/125 20/160 20/200 20/250 20/320 20/400 20/500 1.6in 20/630 1.2in 20/800 1in 20/1000 20/1250 1cm 20/1600 1cm 20/2000 1cm No visual reading must rely on talking books or other Marginal with aids Uses magnifiers for spot reading, but may prefer talking books for leisure 4in 3in 2.5in 2in Slower than normal with reading aids High-power magnifiers (restricted field) 10in 8in 6in 5in Near-normal with appropriate reading aids Low-power magnifiers and large-print books 25in 20in 16in 12.5in Normal reading speed Reduced reading distance No reserve for small 63in 50in 40in 32in Normal reading speed Normal reading distance Reserve capacity for small print Newsprint (1 M) Statistical estimate of reading ability VAS Comments Social and economic aspects (how the person functions in society)
Ranges (ICD-9-CM)
Normal vision
Many functional criteria (whether for a drivers license or for cataract surgery) fall within the range In the United States, children in this range qualify for special educational assistance In the United States, persons in this range are considered legally blind and qualify for tax-break disability benefits. In the EU, many benefits start at this level. The WHO includes this range in its blindness category. In this range, residual vision tends to become unreliable, though it nonvisual sources may still be used as an adjunct to vision substitution skills.
Near-blindness
Total Blindness
NLP
(From Colenbrander A. Preservation of vision or prevention of blindness [editorial]? Am J Ophthalmol 2002;133:2. p.264.)
Visual Acuity
11
Summary
Both distance and near visual acuities are recorded for each eye with and without spectacles. Distance visual acuity is recorded at a distance of 20 feet or in a room of at least 10 feet using mirrors and projected charts. Near visual acuity can be recorded using reduced Snellen or equivalent cards at 40 cm. Acuity performance, like any other human performance, is subject to impairment depending on ocular and general health, emotional stress, boredom, and a variety of drugs acting both peripherally and centrally. The examiner must provide encouragement and must have patience. For clinical studies the ETDRS charts are recommended because near vision is often more important in the daily life of older or infirm patients. Reading charts or other near vision testing charts should be used as part of the routine assessment of the visual acuity. Visual acuity measurement is often taken for granted. Many pitfalls make this most important assessment subject to variability.10Ambient illumination, aging bulbs, dirty charts or slides, small pupils, and poorly standardized charts are just
some of the factors that can lead to erroneous results. A little care in ensuring the proper environment for testing can significantly improve accuracy.
References
1. Newell FW. Ophthalmology Principles and Concepts. St Louis, Mosby, 1969. 2. Moses RA (Ed). Adlers Physiology of the Eye. St Louis, Mosby, 1970. 3. Scheie H. Textbook of Ophthalmology. Philadelphia, WB Saunders, 1977. 4. Duane TD. Clinical Ophthalmology. New York, Harper and Row, 1981. 5. Michaels DD. Visual Optics and Refraction. St Louis, Mosby, 1985. 6. Vander J. Ophthalmology Secrets. Hanley and Belfus. 7. Borish I. Clinical Refraction. Professional Publisher, 1970. 8. Owsley C. Contrast Sensitivity. Ophthalmic Clinics of North America 2003;16:173. 9. Colebrander A. Preservation of Vision or Prevention of Blindness? Am J Ophthalmol 2003; 133:263. 10. Kniestedt, Stamper RL. Visual Acuity and its Measurements. Ophthalmic Clinics of North America 2003; 16:155.
12
Color vision examination is an essential part of screening before a person is taken up for a job. A person who is color vision defective may go through life quite unconscious of his color deficiency and without making any incriminating mistakes, differentiating objects by their size, shape and luminosity, using all the time a complete color vocabulary based on his experience which teaches him that color terms are applied with great consistency to certain objects and to certain achromatic shades, until circumstances are arranged to eliminate these accessory aids and then he realizes that his sensations differ in some way from the normal. Various tests have been developed to enable screening of anomalous subjects with color deficiency from a much larger group of normal subjects.
Color Vision
Color is a sensation and not a physical attribute of an object. Color is what we see and is result of stimulation of retina by radiant energy in a small band of wavelengths of the electromagnetic spectrum usually considered to span about one octave, from 380 nm to 760 nm. There are three
13
Bezold-Burcke Effect
von Bezold (1873) and Burcke (1878) discovered independently the phenomenon named after them, that variation of the luminance levels modifies hues.
Wavelength Discrimination
The normal observer is able to detect a difference between two spectral lights that differ by as little as 1 nm in wavelength in the regions of 490 nm and 585 nm. In the region of violet and red a difference of greater than 4 nm is necessary.
Complementary Wavelengths
Complementary wavelengths are those which, when mixed in appropriate proportions, give white.
Illumination
Illumination affects color vision of low illuminances, the errors increase due to poorer discrimination for most of the hue range while
14
Color Triangle
Color triangle can be drawn to describe the trichromacy of color mixtures and is useful for deciding which bands of wavelength are indistinguishable from each other. Three reference wavelengths are chosen, i.e. 450 nm, 520 nm and 650 nm and are placed at vertices of X, Y and Z of a triangle, the position of other wavelengths is determined. A color triangle does not describe the color of a band of wavelengths unless other circumstances are defined.
15
Cones
In the retina three types of cones responsible for the red, green and blue sensations have been isolated. Three types of cone pigments in the human retina absorb photons with wavelengths between 400 nm and 700 nm. Color vision is mediated by these three cone photoreceptors referred to as long, middle, and short wavelengthsensitive (LWS, MWS, SWS) cones. The long wavelength-sensitive (LWS) cones (sometimes called red or red-catching) contain a pigment called erythrolabe, which is best stimulated by a wavelength near 566 nm. Medium wavelengthsensitive (MWS) cones (green or green-
16
17
Disease Glaucoma Hypertensive retinopathy Diabetic retinopathy AMD Lesions of visual pathway Alcohol-nicotine
TABLE 2.2: VARIOUS TYPES OF COLOR DEFICIENCY Red deficient Anomalous trichromats Dichromats Monochromats Protanomaly Protanopia Rod monochromat Green deficient Deuteranomaly Deuteranopia Blue deficient Tritanomaly Tritanopia Blue monochromat
another wavelength but do not accept the color matches made by normal people, Lord Rayleigh in 1881 discovered trichromacy. Anomalous trichromats have three classes of cones but one is abnormal. Protanomalous people lack the red receptors and instead they have two pigments both peaking in the range of the normal green. Similarly the deuteranomalous people lack green receptors. Dichromats require only two wavelengths to match another wavelength and will accept the color matches made by normal people. The dichromats have two classes of cone receptors with normal spectral sensitivity, the third class being absent. Measurements of their pigments can be made by reflection densitomer and cone processes isolated by colored backgrounds confirm the findings. Protanopes have normal green and blue cones, red cones being absent. Deuteranopes have normal red and blue cones and tritanopes normal red and green cones.
18
Drugs
Many drugs are known to cause deficiency of color vision. They can cause more than one type of color deficiency (Table 2.3).
19
Systemic Disorders
Besides diabetes, a few systemic disorders are known to be associated with defective color vision. Following diseases may cause color deficiency: a. Cardiovascular disease: Patients with heart diseases have been found to have blueyellow deficiency. b. Turners syndrome: Red-green color deficiency is usually encountered in the syndrome.
C Figs 2.2A to C: A Ishihara pseudo-isochromatic plates, B Transformation plate seen as 3 by patients with anomalous red-green color defect, C Vanishing or disappearing digit type
20
tests permit a diagnosis of type and severity. Because the inventory of PIC tests is extensive, only the more commonly used tests are described here. The most widely used test, Ishihara pseudoisochromatic plates, is a screening test used to determine the presence of X-linked congenital (red/green) color deficiency. Most screening tests are designed to give a quick, accurate assessment of red/green deficiencies. The Ishihara test is not designed to detect tritan disorders or acquired color defects unless the optic neuropathy is severe.
Arrangement Tests
The arrangement tests require the observer to place colored samples in sequential order on the basis of hue, saturation, or lightness or to sort samples on the basis of similarity. One of the earliest tests of this nature that is still available but is rarely used today is the Holmgren Wool test. In this matching test, 46 numerically coded comparison schemes of yarn are selected to match three test colors: yellow-green, pink, and dark red. The comparison schemes differ from the test schemes in being lighter or darker. The test is
21
Lantern Tests
Lantern tests are used only for occupational purpose. Different types of lantern tests are in use in different countries. The FALANT is used in the United States by marine and aviation authorities; the Holmes Wright Type A is used in the United Kingdom by aviation authorities; and the Holmes Wright Type B is used in Australia, the United Kingdom and other Commonwealth countries by marine authorities. The Edridge-Green Lantern is included in the United States Coast Guard requirements, but it is surpassed by the FALANT. Electroretinography (ERG) and microspectrophotometry may be used in special circumstances.
Test Conditions
Lantern testing is performed after dark adaptation but all other tests require artificial daylight conditions. Light adaptation is critical for anomaloscopy and especially for FM-100 hue testing, but a color neutral glare-free background and correct illumination are more important. Reliable results can be obtained with an artificial daylight source (such as a Macbeth Sol source) or fluorescent lighting with a color temperature between 5850 and 6850 degrees Kelvin and good color rendering index (Ra over 90). If appropriate artificial light is not available then skylight is a good source. The illumination should be
22
23
Procedure of Testing
The plates are designed to be appreciated correctly in a room which is lit adequately by daylight. Introduction of direct sunlight or the use of electric light may produce some discrepancy in the results because of an alteration in the color values of the charts. It is suggested that when it is convenient only to use electric light, it should be adjusted as far as possible to resemble the effect of natural daylight. The plates are held 75 cm from the subject and tilted at right angles to the line of vision. A missed/ misread plate must be reread (may be in a random order). The findings should be recorded on the Ishihara color vision test and interpretation marking chart (Table 2.4). A correct response to the Ishihara introductory plate is expected and demonstrates suitable visual acuity to perform the test and rules out malingering. Plates 1-25 have numerals and each answer should be given without more than 3 seconds of delay. Plates 26-38 are tracings for use in illiterates, and windings lines between the two Xs are traced with a dry soft brush. Each tracing should take less than 10 seconds.
24
TABLE 2.4: INTERPRETATION AND MARKING OF THE ISHIHARA COLOR VISION TEST Number of plate Normal person Person with red-green deficiency Person with total color blindness and weakness 12 x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x Strong 2 4 3 9 Deutan Mild 2(6) 4(2) 3(5) 9(6)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
12 8 6 29 57 5 3 15 74 2 6 97 45 5 7 16 73 x x x x Protan Strong
22 23 24 25
26 42 35 96
6 2 5 6
The mark x shows that the plate cannot be read. Blank space denotes that the reading is indefinite. The numerals in parenthesis show that they can be read but they are comparatively unclear
25
Dvorine
The Dvorine is another widely used screening test for protan and deutan defects. The test booklet contains both PIC plates and a Nomenclature test, which is a unique and valuable feature of this test. The plates are presented in two sections: 15 plates with Arabic numerals and 8 plates with wandering trails, with 1 demonstration plate in each section. Any symbol missed is an error. Three or more errors in the first section constitute a failure. The Dvorine Nomenclature test is used to assess color naming ability. There are eight discs (2.54 cm in diameter) of saturated color and eight discs of unsaturated or pastel colors, which include red, brown, orange, yellow, green, blue, purple, and gray. A rotatable wheel allows the presentation of one disc at a time. Color-naming aptitude adds another dimension to a color vision assessment, and the results are appreciated by patients and employers curious to know the impact of a color defect on the ability to name colors.
26
Fig. 2.4B: Farnsworth-Munsell 100-hue test results from four subjects: A Normal; B Protan defects; C Deutan defects; D Tritan defects
persons make characteristic errors in arranging the chips. The results are recorded on a circular graph. The greater the error arranging the chips, the farther the score is plotted from the center of the circle (Fig. 2.4B). Automated score for FM 100-hue test is also available. The currently available standard version consists of 85 knobs with pigment-colored paper
on top arranged in 4 horizontal panels. Each panel has 2 knobs fixed at its 2 ends. The subject is required to arrange the knobs in each panel in such a manner that the colors of the knobs appear to be changing gradually from one end of the panel to another. Generally recommended time for arranging each panel is 2 minutes. The time spent on
27
28
Anomaloscopes
Anomaloscopes are instruments that assess the ability to make metametric matches. The results are used for definitive diagnosis and quantitative assessment of color vision status. Anomaloscopes
29
Pickford-Nicolson Anomaloscope
The Pickford-Nicolson anomaloscope can be used for three different matches or colorimetric equations: The Rayleigh equation [R + G = Y], The Engelking equation [B + G = CY] and The Pickford - Lakowski equation [B + Y = W]. The matching field is presented on a screen for free viewing at a variety of distances, and there are no intervening optics between the patient and the matching field. The size of the field is changed by selecting different apertures: the largest is 2.54 cm (1 inch) in diameter and the smallest, 0.48 cm (3/16 inch). Different colors are obtained by inserting broadband filters. The Pickford-Lakowski equation is used to assess the consequence of senescent changes in the spectral transmission of the ocular media (yellowing of the lens), it also has value in examining acquired color defects. The Engelking equation is used for diagnosis of the blue - yellow or tritan color defects. Individual variability in density of the macular pigment and lens pigmentation affects both the Engelking and PickfordLakowski equations and, accordingly, confounds the interpretation of an individual result.
Lantern Tests
In marine, rail, and airline transportation, and in the armed forces, colored signals and
Fig. 2.8: Holmes-Wright Lantern
30
Microspectrophotometry
In spectrophotometry, an individual cone of a dissected retina is aligned under a small spot of light and its absorption is measured at various wavelengths. The most direct evidence of Youngs trichromatic theory (3 classes of cones) comes from spectrophotometry. The results of microspectrophotometry confirm three groupings with peak sensitivities at 437-458 nm, 520-542 nm and 562-583 nm.
The recommendations of the test state that a candidate should be rejected if he calls 1. Red as Green 2. Green as Red 3. White light as Green or Red or vice versa 4. Red-Green or White light as Black. Any candidate who makes any other errors should be tested with other test.
31
Summary
Ophthalmic personnel are frequently asked to perform color vision testing. Knowing whether a congenital or acquired defect is suspected can help determine which color vision test should be administered. All color vision tests have specific requirements for lighting, viewing distance, viewing time, and scoring. It is important to be familiar with the various testing and scoring guidelines in order to provide the requesting doctor with accurate and useful information.
Bibliography
1. Alprey M, Mocller J. Red and green cone visual pigments of deuternornalous trichromacy. J Physiol 1977;266:647. 2. Brown PK, Wald G. Visual pigments in single rods and cones of the human retina. Science 1964;144:45. 3. Dada VK. Practical problems of colour vision defectives. Indian Practitioner 1977; 30: 251-55. 4. Dalton J. Extraordinary Facts relating to the Vision of Colours. Mem Manchester Lit & Phil Soc 1798, 5(1): 28. Edin J Sci 1798, 9: 97 cited by Duke-Elder ref 6. 5. De valois RL, Abramov I, Jacobs GH. Analysis of response patterns of LGN cells. J Ophthalmol Soc Amer 1966;56:966. 6. Duke-Elder S. Diagnostic Methods: The colour sense. In System of Ophthalmology. Henry Kimpton, London 1962; Vol VII: 380-84.
32
Slit-lamp Examination
33
Slit-lamp Examination
examination is that one can examine the eye structure in three dimensions (3D). There are three basic requirements for appreciation of depth with a slit-lamp. The first depends upon the clinician possessing a third grade of binocular vision called steriopsis. The second involves the direction of the incoming light source, and is dependent upon the fact that the light beam can be moved so it comes in from one side or the other. The third involves the shape of the slit and is dependent upon the fact that the light source can be moved separately from the oculars.
The slit-lamp is one of the important examining tools of ophthalmologists. Clinical ophthalmologists all over the world routinely use a slit-lamp to examine their patients. A raw slit-lamp was introduced in the early 1900s, but presently, it is a sophisticated instrument (Fig. 3.1). One of the most important advantages of slit-lamp
History
One of the first individuals to apply microscopy to the living eye was Purkinje, who studied the iris with an adjustable microscope by illuminating the field of view. The uniocular slit-lamp was born years later when Louis de Wecker combined an eyepiece objective and adjustable condensing lens within a tube. It was improved by Siegfried Czapski, who added binocularity to the microscope. However, none of the units had sufficient and adjustable illumination. Allvar Gullstrand, an ophthalmologist and 1911 Nobel laureate developed a true slit-lamp to
34
illuminate the eye (Fig. 3.2). Then Henker and Vogt improved upon Gullstrands device in 1910s by creating an adjustable slit-lamp and combining Czapskis microscope with Gullstrands slit-lamp illumination. The modern slit-lamp is a tool capable of stereoscopically examining optical sections of the anterior segment of the eye in great detail. Vogt used the slit-lamp biomicroscope to study a vast array of eye diseases and documented his findings in a publication, Lehrbuch und Atlas der Spaltlampenmikroskopie des Leibenden Auges in 1930s. Besides examination of the anterior segment of the eye, the slit-lamp, in conjunction with certain contact lenses, is often used to examine the anterior chamber angle and posterior segment of the eye.
Observation System
The second main component of slit-lamps is the observation system. Modern slit-lamp microscopes can magnify images between X5 and X25, with some microscopes allowing magnification to X40 and even X100. Magnification is generally achieved by three methods: Flip-type Galilean rotating barrel, and Continuous zoom system. However, magnification of the slit-lamp is less important than its resolution. The resolution of a slit-lamp is dependent on the wavelength of light used, the refractive index between the
Optics of Slit-lamp
The slit-lamp is a compound microscope with an objective lens and an eyepiece. The two main components of the modern slit-lamp are the illumination system and observation system (Fig. 3.3).
Slit-lamp Examination
35
Figs 3.3A to F: A The binocular eyepieces provide stereoscopic vision and can be adjusted to accommodate the examiners interpupillary distance. The focusing ring can be twisted to suit the examiners refractive error. B The illumination arm can be swung 180 degrees side to side on its pivoting bases allowing the examiner to direct the light beam anywhere between the nasal and temporal aspect of the eye. The dimension of the light beam can be varied in height and width with the levers. C The patient positioning frame consists of two upright metal rods to which are attached a forehead strap and a chin rest. D The joystick allows for focusing by shifting forward, backward, laterally or diagonally. The joystick can also be rotated to lower or elevate the light beam. The locking screw located at the base secures the slit-lamp from movement when it is not in use. E Knurled knob is slit-beam height adjuster, Flip lever controls filters, from left to right: bright, dim, red-free. F ON/OFF power switch provides high or low options in light intensity
eye and objective, the working distance, and the diameter of the objective lens. In practice, the first three of these factors are not easily modifiable, but the objective lens diameter can be modified to increase resolution. However, a very large diameter lens can introduce optical aberrations. The observation system is also influenced by the proximity of the patients eye to the examiners eyes. This necessitates a convergence system for binocular viewing, and most modern slit-lamp biomicroscopes are designed with 10 to 15 degrees of convergence to minimize eye strain to the examiner.
Clinical Procedure
Before using the slit-lamp, it is important to ensure that the instrument is correctly set up. The following points should be checked: The eyepieces should be focused for the observer for his/her own refractive error. Often a little more minus correction is required than the observers actual refractive error due to proximal accommodation and convergence. The pupillary distance (pd) is adjusted for the observer (perhaps the pd should be
36
Examination Techniques
The various techniques of slit-lamp examination are: 1. Diffuse illumination 2. Direct focal illumination a. Narrow beam (optic section) b. Broad beam (parallelepiped) c. Conical beam 3. Indirect illumination 4. Retroillumination a. Direct b. Indirect 5. Specular reflection 6. Sclerotic scatter 7. Oscillatory illumination 8. Tangential illumination.
The slit-lamp examination is conducted in a semi dark room. Patient is seated in front of slit-lamp on an adjustable stool and his head is steadied by placing chin on chin-rest and his forehead rests on the bar of head-rest. As with any technique, a general routine should be followed, in most cases when examining the eye and adnexa, a large field of view is used initially and then focus in on detail when required with higher magnification. The examination should be commenced using the X10 eyepieces and the lower powered objective. Use the lowest voltage setting on the transformer. Select the longest slit-length by means of the appropriate lever. Adjust the chin-rest so that the patients eyes are approximately level with the black marker on the side of the head rest. Adjust the height of the slit-lamp until the slit-beam is centered vertically on the patients eye. Focus the slit-beam on the eye by moving the joystick either towards or away from the patient. Coarse positioning can be effected without using the microscope but critical focusing should be carried out whilst viewing through the microscope. The angulation between the observation arm and the illumination arm is adjusted. In addition,
Diffuse Illumination
Diffuse illumination (Fig. 3.4) is a good method for observing the eye and adnexa in general.
Slit-lamp Examination
The beam width is kept at maximum and magnification is kept low and light is thrown at an obtuse angle. It gives an overview of lids, conjunctiva, cornea and lens. Detail examination is not possible with diffuse illumination. Its main purpose is to illuminate as much of the eye at once for general observation. A broad beam of light is directed at the cornea from an angle of approximately 45 degrees. Position the microscope directly in front of the patients eye and focus on the anterior surface of the cornea. Low to medium magnification (X7-X16) should be used which allows the observer to view as many of the structures as possible. When viewing the eye with achromatic light one should note on gross inspection, any corneal scar, tear debris, irregularities of Descemets membrane or pigmentary changes in the epithelium. These findings are investigated more thoroughly with other types of illumination.The diffuse illumination mode is also used with cobalt blue filter after fluorescein staining. Fluorescein staining is also used to evaluate positioning of contact lenses, tear breakup time (TBUT), and staining of the cornea for corneal ulcer. Diffuse, wide-beam, illumination together with the red free (green) filter is helpful when viewing the bulbar conjunctiva, and episcleral blood vessels. With the aid of the red free filter small hemorrhages, aneurysms and engorged vessels stand out well.
37
Fig. 3.5A: Direct illumination: the light source is positioned off to one side, and a bright slit-beam is shone directly onto the object to be studied. The light is scattered in all directions by the object, and some of this scattered light finds its way back to the oculars, where it can be observed by the examiner
Direct/focal illumination can be used with different types of beams: a. Narrow beam (optic section) b. Conical beam c. Broad beam (parallelepiped).
Narrow Beam
Narrow beam optical section is used primarily to determining the depth or elevation of a defect of the cornea, conjunctiva or locating the depth of an opacity within the lens of the eye (Fig. 3.5B). With the optic section, it is possible to detect corneal thickness, site of foreign body, scars and opacities, the depth of anterior chamber and location of cataracts. The biomicroscope should be directly in front of the patients eye, the illumination source at about 45 degrees and the illumination mirror in click position. The slit-width is almost closed (0.5-1.0 mm wide by 7-9 mm high). Set the magnification on low to medium (X7-X10) and focused on the patients closed lid. The
38
thickness of the eyelid (about 1 mm) means focusing on the cornea is accomplished with only slight movement of the joystick. With eyes open, give the patient a point of fixation such as the fixation light, or the top of the examiners opposite ear. Once the cornea is in sharp focus, scan the cornea from temporal limbus to nasal limbus. To maintain a clear, distortion-free view, the illumination source is always moved to the opposite side when crossing the mid-line of the cornea. With a clearly focused optic section slightly temporal to the center of the cornea, magnification is increased to X16, then to X20, and brightness is also increased. Try to note the following: 1. The front surface bright zone is the surface of the tears, 2. The next dark line is the epithelium, 3. The next brighter thin line is Bowmans membrane, 4. The gray wider granular area is the stromal zone, and 5. The last bright inner zone is the endothelium To attain an optic section of the crystalline lens, the angular separation of the illumination source is reduced until the light beam just grazes the edge of the pupil and the vertical height is reduced to approximate the pupil size. This alignment can easily be accomplished from
Fig. 3.6B: Split limbal technique for assessing anterior chamber angle depth
Slit-lamp Examination
TABLE 3.1: CLASSIFICATION OF ANTERIOR CHAMBER ANGLE BASED ON VAN HERICK ANGLE OF THE ANTERIOR CHAMBER ESTIMATION METHOD Angle grade 4 Risk of angle closure Wide open angle incapable of closure. Iris to cornea angular separation equals to 35-45 Moderately open angle incapable of closure. Iris to corneal angular separation equals to 20-35 Moderately narrow angle closure possible. Iris to corneal angular separation equals to 20 Extremely narrow angle, closure chance high. Iris to corneal angular separation equals to 10 Basically closed angle. Iris to corneal angular separation is 0 Cornea to angle ratio Anterior chamber depth (shadow) is equal to or greater than corneal thickness Anterior chamber depth (shadow) is between 1/4 and 1/2 of the corneal thickness Anterior chamber depth (shadow) is equal to 1/4 of the corneal thickness Anterior chamber depth (shadow) is equal to less than 1/4 of the corneal thickness Anterior chamber depth (shadow) is nil or only a very narrow slit
39
are in click position aligned directly in front of the patient. The beam width is that of an optic section which is focused on the limbalcornea junction thus splitting the cornea and limbus. Then view the arc of light through the cornea and that falling on the iris without the aid of the slit-lamp. The angular separation seen at the limbus-corneal junction is an estimation of the anterior chamber angle depth in degrees.
Conical beam
Examination of the anterior chamber for cells or flare must be performed before either dilation or applanation tonometry. High magnification (X16-X20) and high illumination may be needed. High illumination is used to detect floating aqueous cells and flare by the Tyndall effect (particles of dust floating in a sun light beam). The traditional method of locating and grading cells and flare is to reduce the beam to a small circular pattern with the light source 45 to 60 degrees temporally and directed into the pupil. The biomicroscope is positioned directly in front of the patients eye with high magnification and with as bright illumination as the patient will permit. The examiner always allows a
period of time to dark adapt. The conical beam is focused on a dark zone lying between the cornea and the anterior lens surface. This zone is normally optically empty and appears totally black. Flare (protein escaping from dilated vessels) makes the normally optically empty zone appear gray or milky when compared to the normal eye. Cells will reflect the light and can be seen as white dots. The techniques used may be either to oscillate the light source with the joystick from left to right while focused in the anterior chamber or to focus from the posterior cornea to the anterior lens while oscillating the light source.
40
view of the cornea or the crystalline lens. The three dimensional view permits observation of distinguishable details within the crystalline lens zones of discontinuity. As with the optic section, the angle between the illumination source and biomicroscope may be varied to expose more corneal epithelium, stroma and endothelium. The whole cornea should be scanned using a parallelepiped. When scanning the cornea, a clear undistorted view must be maintained by positioning the light source to the opposite side when crossing the mid-line of the cornea. Both normal and abnormal findings can be seen when scanning the cornea with varied levels of magnifications and brightness. Look for the following findings: 1. Tear debris is usually related to allergies or occasionally with infections. 2. Corneal nerves are white thread-like structures that bifurcate and trifurcate and are located anywhere within the cornea. 3. Blood filled vessels extend from the limbus onto or into the cornea, and may be diagnostic of chronic or acute insult or inflammation. 4. Ghost vessels extend from the limbus into the cornea. They are empty of blood and diagnostic of past deep corneal inflammation.
Indirect Illumination
Indirect illumination means looking at tissue outside the area which is directly illuminated and can be used in conjunction with most of the above techniques. Corneal opacities, corneal nerves and limbal vessels are easily seen under indirect illumination as glare is reduced. Examine always directly as well as indirectly illuminated areas of the structure. To use this type of illumination place the biomicroscope directly in front of the patients eye and the illumination light source at about 45 degrees. Make sure the illumination mirror is in click position. Use a parallelepiped beam sharply focused on a given structure like the cornea. The light passes through the cornea and falls out of focus on the iris. The dark area just lateral or proximal to the parallelepiped is the indirect or proximal zone of illumination. This is the area of the cornea which one surveys through the biomicroscope. This type of illumination is helpful in detection of microcystic edema, faint corneal infiltrates and irregularities of the corneal epithelium and tears. Because it utilizes
Slit-lamp Examination
direct, indirect and retroillumination simultaneously, one should consider it to be as important as any other type of illumination. light appear dark against a light background (e.g. corneal scars, pigment, and lens opacity). Portions that scatter light appear lighter than the background (e.g. edema of the epithelium, corneal precipitates). This method is useful for examining the size and density of opacities, but not their location. Retroillumination uses a parallelepiped that bounces unfocused light off one structure while observing the back of another. The alignment and angular separation of the biomicroscope to the illumination source will vary. The light source beam is reflected off another structure like the iris, crystalline lens or retina while the
41
Retroillumination
Retroillumination is another form of indirect viewing. The light is reflected off the deeper structures, such as the iris or retina, while the microscope is focused to study the more anterior structures in the reflected light (Figs 3.8A to D). It is used to study the cornea in light reflected from the iris, and the lens in light reflected from the retina. Structures that are opaque to
Figs 3.8A and B: Retroillumination: This technique allows the observer to view a clear structure with light that has been transmitted through, rather than just bounced off it. A Light from the slit-lamp is shone through the pupil, reflected off the fundus, and transmitted through the lens and cornea. B Light is reflected off the iris and transmitted through the cornea
42
Fig. 3.9: Sclerotic scatter: A bright, wide-slit is shone directly at the limbus; most of the light is trapped within the cornea through total internal reflection, and, therefore, the cornea appears dark. When the light hits the opposite limbus or anything abnormal located within the corneal substance, it will scatter; some of the scattered light is directed back to the oculars, the abnormality is visible to the observer
Sclerotic Scatter
Sclerotic scatter examination uses the principle of total internal reflection (Fig. 3.9). Slit-lamp is set to a low X6-X10 magnification and a narrow vertical-slit (1-1.5 mm in width) is directed in line with the temporal or nasal limbus. A halo of light will be observed around the limbus as light is internally reflected within the cornea, but scattered by the sclera. Presence of corneal opacities, edema or foreign bodies will be made visible by the scattering light, appearing as bright patches against the dark background of the iris and pupil. Even minute nebular opacities can be picked up.
Specular Reflection
Specular reflection is achieved by positioning the beam of light and microscope in such a position so that the angle of incidence is equal
to the angle of reflection. The light can be reflected from either the anterior or posterior corneal surface. Note that the reflected light should pass through only one eyepiece, and, therefore, this method is monocular. Any roughness or irregularity as induced by the presence of corneal guttata is visible due to irregular reflection of light. A parallelepiped is used to view the endothelial cells of the cornea. The cells are seen only by one eye and they appear in the opposite direction of the illumination light source. A parallelepiped is used for specular reflection. The angle between the illumination source and the biomicroscope should be approximately 60 degrees and a high magnification and high illumination must be used. Place the biomicroscope directly in front of the patients eye and the illumination light source at 45-60 degrees. Just off the limbus, obtain a sharply focused parallelepiped of the
Slit-lamp Examination
cornea. Slowly advance the parallelepiped across the cornea until a dazzling reflection of the filament is seen within the biomicroscope. This reflection is only seen by one eye. Keeping the reflected light within the field of view of biomicroscope, the focus is moved back toward the endothelial cells. There will be a point where two images of the filament are seen, one bright, and the other ghost-like or copper-yellow in color. When the biomicroscope is focused on the ghost-like filament a mosaic of hexagonal cells are seen. It should be noted that even with X40 magnification the endothelial cells do not look as large as most texts show. They resemble the appearance of the dimpled surface of an orange peel or basketball. When the slit-lamp illumination system and the biomicroscope are at equal angles of incidence and reflection, the endothelium of cornea is viewable. Both front and back surfaces of the crystalline lens can also be viewed by using the specular reflection. 1. Eyelids and lashes: A low magnification, with a long and fairly narrow beam should be used to scan the eyelashes and lid margins. The examination can reveal the presence of crusted material, lash loss, erythema and flaking suggestive of blepharitis. 2. Conjunctiva: For examination of conjunctiva, pull the lower lid away from the globe with hand and look at the palpebral and bulbar conjunctiva. One may find foreign body, purulent material, injection, conjunctival follicles, pinguecula or pterygium. Try to see the entire cul-de-sac while the patient looking up. The upper lid must be everted to examine the upper palpebral conjunctiva. 3. Cornea: A narrow beam should be directed approximately 45 degrees at the cornea. Scan the entire corneal surface, moving lids and beam appropriately while trying to evaluate the epithelium, stromal thickness and endothelium. Note any defects, opacities or pigment dusting on the endothelium. If defects are seen or suspected, instill a topical anesthetic and fluorescein stain. Make the beam as large as possible and flip the cobalt blue filter on. Examine the epithelium for areas of bright yellow-green staining. The staining represents an epithelial defect. 4. Anterior chamber: The depth of the anterior chamber can be determined by comparing the corneal thickness to the space between the posterior surface of the cornea and the iris surface. The beam should be directed at approximately 45 degrees and just inside the temporal limbus. An anterior chamber depth of less than 1/4 of the corneal thickness is considered a narrow-angle. A search for flare should also be made. 5. Iris: The iris is generally screened with a narrow-beam with full height. It should be fairly flat and free of masses. Small
43
Oscillatory Illumination
In oscillatory illumination, a beam of light is rocked back and forth by moving the illuminating arm or rotating the prism or mirror. This method may be used to determine occasional aqueous floaters and the extent of opacities in the crystalline lens.
Tangential Illumination
In tangential illumination iris is examined under very oblique illumination while the microscope is aligned directly in front of the eye. It is useful for examining tumors of the iris.
Clinical Application
Slit-lamp biomicroscopy is very useful in the diagnosis of eye diseases. It should routinely be performed in almost all diseases of the eye.
44
Slit-lamp Attachments
Besides routine examination of the eye, the slitlamp with the help of its attachments is used for various investigative procedures. Important slit-lamp attachments with their use are mentioned below: Goldmann tonometer (Fig. 3.10) is used for applanation tonometry. Pachymeter (Fig. 3.11) is used for measurement of corneal thickness. Gonioscope (Figs 3.12A to C) is used for visualization of the angle of the anterior chamber. Hruby lens is used for funduscopy. Digital camera for fundus photography (Fig. 3.13).
Slit-lamp Examination
45
Bibliography
1. Fingeret M, Casser L, Woodcombe HT. Atlas of Primary Eye Care Procedures. Norwalk, Appleton & Lange, 1990. 2. Waring GO, Laibson PR. A systematic method of drawing corneal pathologic conditions. Arch Ophthalmol 1977:95:1540-42.
46
Corneal Topography
The cornea is the most important refractive element of the human eye, providing approximately two-thirds of optical power of the eye, accounting for about 43-44 diopters at the corneal apex. Because its surface is irregular and aspherical, it is not radially symmetric, and simple measurement techniques are inadequate. The great upsurge in refractive surgery led to a need for improved methods to analyze corneal surface and shape since refraction and keratometric data alone were insufficient to predict surgical outcomes. Understanding and quantifying corneal contour or shape has become essential in planning modern surgical intervention for refractive surgery, as well as in corneal transplantation. It is also very valuable for assessing optical performance of the eye. The different methods for evaluating the anterior surface of the cornea, developed over several centuries, have, in the present era, led to the modern corneal topographers.
Keratometer
In 1854 Helmholtz described the first true keratometer, which he called an ophthalmometer (Fig. 4.1). With some minor improvements, it is still being used clinically for calculating refraction, intraocular lens power and contact lens fitting. This apparatus is based on the tendency of the anterior corneal surface to behave like a convex mirror and reflect light. The projection of four points, or mires, onto the cornea, creates a reflected image that can be converted into a
Corneal Topography
corneal radius, r, using a mathematical equation that considers distance from the mire to cornea (75 mm in the keratometer), image size and mire size (64 mm in keratometer). The corneal radius can be transformed into dioptric power using the formula: DP= (index of refraction of the lens - 1)/ r The standard keratometric index represents the combined refractive index of the anterior and posterior surfaces of the cornea, considers the cornea as a single refractive surface, and is 1.3375. Thus, the equation can be simplified to: DP= 337.5/ r Although keratometers are still common in ophthalmology clinics, they do have specific limitations that need to be considered in order to avoid misleading conclusions. 1. Most traditional keratometers measure the central 3 mm of the cornea, which only accounts for 6% of the entire surface. 2. It assumes that the cornea is a perfectly sphero-cylindrical surface, which it is not. The cornea is aspheric in shape, flattening between the center and the periphery. Usually the central corneal curvature is fairly uniform, and this is the reason why it can be used to calculate corneal power in normal patients. However, this is not true in some pathogenic conditions like ectatic disorders or after refractive surgery. 3. The keratometer provides no information as to the shape of the cornea either inside or outside the contour of the mire. Several corneal shapes can all give the same keratometric value so this apparatus is of little use should it become necessary to reconstruct the whole corneal morphology. reflections of a series of illuminated concentric rings (known as Placidos rings) first time in 1880 (Fig. 4.2). In 1896 Gullstrand developed a quantitative assessment of photokeratoscopy. The keratoscope, like a keratometer, projects an illuminated series of mires onto the anterior corneal surface, usually consisting of concentric rings. The distance between the concentric rings or mires gives the observer an idea of the corneal shape. A steep cornea will crowd the mires, while a flat cornea will spread them out. Surface irregularity is seen as mire distortion. When a photographic camera is attached to the keratoscope, it becomes a photokeratoscope, which gives semi-quantitative and qualitative information about the paracentral, midperipheral and peripheral cornea. Based on the mathematical equation, it is possible to calculate corneal power from object size. Still, photokeratoscopy gives limited information on the central area, which is not covered by the mires.
47
Videokeratoscopy
Modern corneal topographers are based on videokeratoscopy. A video camera is attached
48
Several studies have shown that the anterior corneal configuration tends to be prolate, i.e. the cornea progressively flattens out towards periphery by 2-4 diopters (Fig. 4.5).The asphericity of the normal cornea, depending on different studies, ranges from -0.26 to -0.11.
Corneal Topography
49
This tendency to flatten towards periphery can be detected in the topographic map. Toward the periphery, dioptric power appears to decline, and the nasal area flattens more than the temporal area (Fig. 4.6). This could be helpful in distinguishing right eye topography from the left eye topography. The topographic patterns of the two corneas of the same individual often show mirrorimage symmetry.
Corneal topographic patterns (Fig. 4.7) have been studied in normal eyes and the following shapes have been found: round (23%), oval (21%), symmetric bow-tie typical for regular astigmatism (18%), asymmetric bow-tie (32%), and irregular astigmatism (7%). In the round and oval shapes there is an area of uniform dioptric power close to 43 diopters (D) in the center of the cornea. The bow-tie configuration
Fig. 4.6: Corneal topography in a normal right eye. There is a flattening towards the periphery, more pronounced at the nasal area
50
B Figs 4.7A and B: A Oval topographic pattern, B Bow-tie pattern that shows an against-the-rule astigmatism
reflects the existence of corneal astigmatism. Depending on the position of the axes, corneal astigmatism is defined as against-the-rule (the
steepest axis is horizontal), with-the-rule (the steepest axis is vertical), or oblique (the steepest axis is near the meridian angles of 45 or 135).
Corneal Topography
51
D Figs 4.7C and D: Normal corneal topographic patterns: C With-the-rule astigmatism, D Oblique astigmatism
52
which can be interpreted as a contour map of surface elevations. Interference techniques are used in the optical industry to detect lens and mirror aberrations of subwavelength dimensions. High accuracy is theoretically possible, but clinical use has not been very wide-spread as yet.
Corneal Topography
anterior and posterior corneal surfaces with respect to a reference plane. ORBSCAN II TM (Fig. 4.8) uses placido disk and slit-based systems to obtain 40 slit-images of the cornea. These images are captured over one second and recorded.
53
4.9). When considering a color-coded map, the clinician must check that the unprocessed data upon which it is based, are reliable. If the videokeratoscope image is irregular, data cannot be processed by the instrument in a meaningful way. Thus, for Placido disk-based computerized videokeratoscopes, the videokeratoscope image should not be ignored. In fact, it is recommended to check this map before referring to any of the other topographic displays, and to go back to it when there are any doubts regarding the accuracy of the displayed data. This image provides important information for assessing tear film quality, mire centering on the cornea, lid opening, or the causes of local irregularities, and other artefacts. If the device used displays computer tracking of the placido mires it is important to rule out tracking errors. Devices that rely only on scanning slittechnology to analyze the anterior corneal surface lack valuable information provided by the raw videokeratoscope image. Whether the resulting map is based on reliable primary data or not is impossible to verify without the raw image. Some instruments identify regions of uncertainty, showing mire distortions that cannot be reliable, by leaving blank areas on the colorcoded map. Other instruments merely extrapolate
54
Color-Coded Scales
The shape of a cornea can be measured and represented by color-coded maps in which a given color indicates a different curvature or
B Figs 4.10A and B: Corneal topography map represented using a normalized scale A, an absolute scale B
Corneal Topography
i. Normalized scale (variable scale) uses a given color for different curvatures or elevations on each cornea analyzed, depending on the range for that particular cornea, determined by its flattest and steepest values. These maps are difficult to interpret and can lead to an incorrect diagnosis since they may magnify subtle changes in corneal surface if the scale is too narrow, or minimize large distortions if the scale is too wide. In addition, color recognition, one of the primary clues used to interpret on corneal topography, is lost with a variable scale, since it uses different colors for different eyes. ii. Absolute scale (fixed scale) uses the same color for the same curvature or elevation no matter which eye is examined. However, there are many different absolute scales since the examiner can choose different variables such as range or step size (intervals in color changes). For the specified scale, however, each display will use the same colors, steps and range. In order to facilitate comparisons over time and between patients, it is recommended to stick with a given fixed scale for routine examinations and to change the scale in the particular cases in which this becomes necessary. As an example the popular Klyce/Wilson scale ranges from 28 D to 65 D in equal 1.5 D intervals. Currently, there is no consensus as to the best absolute scale, but in general, dioptric scales with intervals smaller than 0.5 D are not clinically useful and provide details that are not relevant and may complicate map interpretation. For corneas with large dioptric ranges, for instance in advanced keratoconus intervals greater than 0.5 D are recommended. Regarding scales for elevation maps, elevation steps of approximately 5 microns appear to be clinically useful. As mentioned previously, color pattern recognition makes it possible to identify common topographic patterns such as the corneal cylinder, keratoconus (local area of inferonasal steepening) or pellucid marginal degeneration (butterflypattern or inferior arcuate steepening), as well
55
56
Refractive Map
The refractive map displays the refractive power of the cornea, which is calculated based on Snells law of refraction, assuming optical infinity (Fig. 4.12C). This map correlates corneal shape to vision, and is useful in understanding the effects of surgery.
Elevation Map
The elevation map displays corneal height or elevation relative to a reference plane (Fig. 4.12D), with a presumed assumption of the shape, which may be the best-fit sphere, best-fit asphere, average corneal shape, or even based on preoperative data. Points above the reference surface are positive (hot colors) and points below the reference surface are negative (cool colors). This map shows the three-dimensional (3D) shape of the cornea and is useful in measuring the amount of tissue to be removed by a refractive surgical procedure, assessing postoperative visual problems, or planning and/or monitoring surgical procedures.
Difference Map
The difference map displays the changes in certain values between two maps (Fig. 4.13). It is used to monitor any type of change, such as recovery from contact lens-induced warpage or surgery-induced changes.
Relative Map
The relative map displays some values by comparing them to an arbitrary standard (e.g. sphere, asphere, or normal cornea) and a specific mathematical model. This map enhances or magnifies unique features of the cornea being examined.
Corneal Topography
57
58
Fig. 4.12D: Elevation map Figs 4.12A to D: Different kind of topography maps for the same cornea
Corneal Topography
59
60
Fig. 4.15: Bad image for topography analysis due to lack of focus
Fig. 4.16: Distortion of the placido rings because of tear film breakup
tering dilating drops and taking intraocular pressures. In addition, one must avoid artefacts induced by the nose or the eyelids which can lead to a loss of information in certain areas (Fig. 4.18). These errors are transformed into black areas or areas without data on the topographic map. Correct positioning of the head, eyes and eyelid opening should be ensured to avoid these problems.
Corneal Topography
61
Fig. 4.17: Topographic irregularities and patches on the map because of a tear film instability
A Figs 4.18A and B: Loss of information of certain areas of the cornea due to eyelids not opened enough A, and due to nose B
and flattest corneal curvatures just as K1 and K2 are provided by the classic keratometer, to which it correlates well. The cylinder is calculated from the difference between SimK1 and SimK2. Its common uses are: a. Contact lenses fitting
62
Screening Tools and Artificial Intelligence Programs (Neural Networks) for Classification and Auto Diagnosis
As mentioned previously, even for an experienced person, interpretation of topography can be difficult, particularly when trying to differentiate the early stages of a disease from a normal cornea (suspected keratoconus), or when trying to differentiate between two similar conditions (contact lens warpage vs. early keratoconus). Several mathematical algorithms have been developed to help solve this problem, with high sensitivity and specificity. Rabinowitz and Mc Donnell developed the first numerical method for detecting keratoconus using only topographic data. They use the I-S value, which measures the differences between the superior and inferior paracentral corneal
Corneal Topography
regions, the central corneal power (Max K), and the power difference between both eyes. Their study presented that patients with keratoconus (suspect) had central corneal power > 47.2 D or I-S > 1.4 while those with clinical keratoconus had central corneal power > 47.8 D or I-S > 1.9. However, using only these simple measurements for a diagnosis could create specificity problems. To solve the specificity problem, the new strategy must be able to detect and consider the unique characteristics of keratoconus maps, such as local abnormal elevations. The Keratoconus Prediction Index, developed by Maeda et al, is calculated from the Differential Sector Index (DSI), the Opposite Sector Index (OSI), the Center/Surround Index (CSI), the SAI, the Irregular Astigmatism Index (IAI), and the percent Analyzed Area (AA). This method partially overcomes the specificity limitation. Maeda et al also developed the neural network model, based on artificial intelligence. It is a much more sophisticated method for classifying corneal topography and detecting different corneal topographic abnormalities; it employs indexes that were empirically found to capture specific characteristics of the different corneal pathologies, including keratoconus. Further modifications in neural network approach developed by Smolek and Klyce supposedly produce 100% accuracy, specificity and sensitivity in diagnosing keratoconus. considering two components of a whole host of refractive components in the optics of the eye. However, these two components sphere and cylinder do constitute the main optical aberrations of an eye. Even in a normal eye with no subjective need for refraction, optical aberrations can be detected. Since the cornea has the highest refractive power, more than 70% of the eyes refraction, it is the principal site of aberrations, although the lens and the tear film may also contribute to aberrations.
63
64
Zernike Polynomials
For a quantitative description of the wavefront shape there is a need for a more sophisticated analysis than conventional refraction, as the latter only divides the wavefront in two basic terms:
Fig. 4.19: Corneal wavefront analysis derived from height topography data
Corneal Topography
frequency (m). When talking about first, second, third order aberrations we point to indicate the radial order (n). Each radial order involves n + 1 term. There are an infinite number of Zernike terms that can be used to fit an individual wavefront. However, for clinical practice, terms up to the 4th radial order are usually considered: 1. Zernike terms below third order can be measured and corrected by conventional optical means. The first order term, the prism, is not relevant to the wavefront as it represents tilt and is corrected using a prism. The second order terms represent low order aberrations that include defocus (spherical component of the wavefront) and astigmatism (cylinder component). Wavefront maps that measure only defocus and astigmatism can be perfectly corrected using spectacles and contact lenses. 2. After the second radial order comes high order aberrations. These are not measured by conventional refraction or auto refraction. The aberrometer is the only method available that can quantify these complex kinds of distortions. 3. Third order terms describe coma and trefoil defects. 4. Fourth order terms represent tetrafoil, spherical aberration and secondary astigmatism components. Because spherical and coma aberrations refer to symmetrical systems and the eye is not rotationally symmetrical, the terms spherical-like and coma-like aberrations are normally used (Fig. 4.21).
65
sphere and cylinder. One can obtain more information by breaking down the wavefront into terms which are clinically meaningful, besides the sphere and the cylinder. For this purpose, a standard equation has been universally accepted by refractive surgeons and vision scientists, known as Zernike polynomials. Zernike polynomials are equations which are used to fit the wavefront data in a three dimensional way. The wavefront function is decomposed into terms that describe specific optical aberrations such as spherical aberration, coma, etc. (Fig. 4.20). Each term in the polynomial has two variables, (rho) and (theta), where is the normalized distance of a specific point from the center of the pupil, and is the angle formed between the imaginary line joining the pupillary center with the point of interest and the horizontal. According to that, we can imagine that aberrations are strongly influenced by pupil size, and, therefore, aberrometric measurements should be related to the diameter of the patients pupil. Zernike terms (Znm) are defined using a double index notation: a radial order (n) and an angular
Wavefront Maps
Wavefront map describes the optical path difference between the measured wavefront and the reference wavefront in microns at the pupil entrance. The wavefront error is derived mathematically from the reconstructed wavefront
66
by one of the techniques described above. It is plotted as a 2D or 3D map for qualitative analysis in a similar fashion to corneal topography maps. In wavefront error maps, each color represents a specific degree of wavefront error in microns (Fig. 4.22) and like corneal topography maps, it is necessary to consider the range and the interval of the scale.
Corneal Topography
67
Fig. 4.22: Corneal wavefront aberration maps that include all kind of aberrations including low and high order
the best measurement of optical quality since it does not represent the extent of the defect. Root mean square error (RMS error): This measure is by far the most widely used. In a simple way, the RMS wavefront error is a statistical measure of the deviation of the ocular or corneal wavefront from the ideal (Table 4.1). In other words, it describes the overall aberration and indicates how bad individual aberrations are. Strehl ratio: This represents the ratio of the maximum intensity of the actual image to the maximum intensity of the fully diffracted limited image, both being normalized to the same integrated flux. This ratio measures optical excellence in terms of theoretical performance
results and it is linked to the RMS by the Marchal formula. Point spread function (PSF): This is the spread function observed on the retina when the object is a point in infinity. PSF measures how well one object point is imaged on the output plane (retina) through the optical system. In the eye, small pupils (approximately 1 mm) produce diffraction-limited PSFs, because of the pupil border. In larger pupils, aberrations tend to be the dominant source of degradation. Modulation transfer function, Phase transfer function and Optical transfer function: Sinusoidal gratings greatly simplify the study of optical systems, because irrespective of the amount of eye aberra-
68
Fig. 4.23: Visual quality summary obtained with the CSO topographer. It is possible to visualize the wavefront map (gray scale), Strehl ratio, PSF and MTF function
REFERENCE VALUES FOR CORNEAL ABERRATIONS IN THE NORMAL POPULATION Astigmatism RMS 0.14 0.08 0.43 0.24 0.92 0.53 Spherical aberration 0.04 0.03 0.15 0.05 0.52 0.17 Coma RMS 0.05 0.03 0.14 0.08 0.42 0.23 Sphericallike RMS 0.07 0.02 0.18 0.05 0.57 0.16 Comalike RMS 0.09 0.03 0.20 0.08 0.52 0.22
RMS: root mean square, Coma primary coma: terms Z31, Spherical aberration primary spherical aberration: term Z40 Spherical-like: terms fourth and sixth order, Coma-like: terms third and fifth order Reference: Vinciguerra P, Camesasca FI, Calossi A. Statistical analysis of physiological aberrations of the cornea. J Refract Surg 2003; 19 (Suppl): S265-9.
Corneal Topography
tions, sinsusoidal grating objects always produce sinusoidal grating images. Consequently, there are only two ways that an optical system can affect the image of a grating, by reducing contrast or by shifting the image sideways (phase-shift). The ability of an optical system to faithfully transfer contrast and phase from the object to the image at a specific resolution are called respectively the modulation transfer function (MTF) and the phase transfer function (PTF). The eyes optical transfer function (OTF) is made up of the MTF and the PTF. A high-quality OTF is, therefore, represented by high MTF and low PTF.
69
Keratoconus
Keratoconus is characterized by a localized conical protrusion of the cornea associated with an area of corneal stromal thinning, especially at the apex of the cone. The typical associated topographic pattern is the presence of an inferior area of steepening (Fig. 4.25). In advanced cases, the dioptric power at the apex is at or above 55 D. In a small group of patients, the topographic alterations may be centered at the central cornea. In these cases there may be an asymmetric bowtie configuration, and normally the inferior loop is larger than the superior loop (Fig. 4.26). Keratoconic corneas have three common characteristics that are not present in normal corneas: 1. An area of increased corneal power surrounded by concentric areas of decreasing power 2. An inferior-superior power asymmetry 3. A skewing of the steepest radial axes above and below the horizontal meridian. Keratoconus suspects are problematic. They may signal impending development of a clinical keratoconus, but they may also represent a healthy cornea. The lack of ectasia in the fellow cornea does not indicate that the keratoconus suspect will not progress to true keratoconus. In these cases the ideal management is close follow-up of the signs of keratoconus in order to check on their stability, and a thorough analysis of the videokeratographic indexes.
Clinical Applications
Aberrometers allow practitioners to gain a better understanding of vision by measurement of high order aberrations. These aberrations reflect a refractive error that is beyond conventional spheres and cylinders. There may be a large group of patients whose best corrected visual acuity (BCVA) may improve significantly on removal of the optical aberrations and this new refractive entity has been called aberropia. Reduced optical quality of the eye produced by light scatter and optical aberrations may actually be the root cause of blurred vision associated with dry eye syndrome and tear film disruption. Measurement of these aberrations can also be helpful in keratoconus, orthokeratology, post graft fitting, irregular astigmatism or when refractive surgery has reduced the patients optical quality. Customized ablations are the future step in laser technology that should address not only spherical and cylindrical refractive errors (loworder aberrations), but also high-order aberrations such as trefoil and coma (Fig. 4.24). Thus, vision can be optimized to the limits determined by pupil size (diffraction) and retinal structure and function.
70
B Figs 4.24A and B: Customized ablation designed according to corneal aberration for the correction of aberrations induced by a decentered ablation. There is a large amount of coma: axial map A and customized ablation designed B with the ORK-CAM software (Schwind)
butterfly appearance that results in a flattening of the vertical meridian and a marked againstthe-rule irregular astigmatism (Fig. 4.27).
Keratoglobus
Keratoglobus is a rare bilateral disorder in which the entire cornea is thinned out most markedly
Corneal Topography
71
near the corneal limbus, in contrast to the localized central or paracentral thinning of keratoconus. It is very difficult to obtain reliable and reproducible measurements in these cases due to the high level of irregularity and the poor quality of the associated tear film. Reliable topographic examinations show an arc of
peripheral increase in corneal power (steepening) and a very asymmetrical bow- tie configuration.
72
When thinning is restricted to the superior and/ or inferior areas of the peripheral cornea, there is a relative steepening of the corneal surface approximately 90 degrees away from the midpoint of the thinned area. Therefore, high against-the-rule or oblique astigmatism is a
common feature, as this disorder involves more frequently the superior and/or inferior peripheral cornea. If the area of thinning is small or if the disorder extends around the entire circumference of the cornea, central cornea may remain relatively spared with a spherical configuration.
Corneal Topography
73
74
75
Postphotorefractive Keratotomy
Photorefractive keratotomy (PRK) is a procedure which uses a kind of laser (excimer laser, a cool
76
Corneal Topography
77
complicated patterns that may lead to severe vision disturbances are the presence of focal irregularities or central islands (Fig. 4.33) produced by an inhomogeneous laser beam or an irregular process of corneal healing.
78
B Figs 4.34A and B: Topographic patterns of LASIK decentered ablations after myopic treatment A and after hyperopic treatment B
Corneal Topography
79
B Figs 4.35A and B: Topographic analysis in a post-LASIK cornea with an epithelial in-growth at the inferonasal area: placido rings image A, and axial map B
collagen lamellae, depending on their shape and position, flatten or steepen the central cornea. Intrastromal rings could also be used to reduce the corneal steepening and astigmatism associated with keratoconus (Fig. 4.36).
Postkeratoplasty
Keratoplasty topographies exhibit a wide variety of patterns, depending on the type of keratoplasty
performed, the quality of the surgical procedure, whether sutures are still in place in the cornea, and the time elapsed after the procedure. Sutures usually induce a central bulge in the corneal graft and its removal results in a decrease of the astigmatic component. The prolate configuration after keratoplasty is the most frequent pattern with a high degree of irregularity (Fig. 4.37). There can be multiple regions of abnormally high or low power, or both simultaneously in
80
the map. Irregular astigmatism over the entrance pupil may be detrimental to optimum visual acuity in the keratoplasty patient.
occur mixed with one another: (i) peripheral steepening, (ii) central flattening, (iii) furrow depression, and (iv) central molding or central irregularity (Fig. 4.38). Inferior corneal steepening (pseudokeratoconus) is caused by a superiorly riding contact lens that flattens above the visual axis with an apparent steepening below. The topographic image could appear similar to keratoconus, but both conditions are easily differentiated. In corneal warpage, the shape indexes do not indicate any keratoconic condition, and the flat K is not as steep as in keratoconus.
81
82
3. To guide contact lens fitting: Selection of the probe lens and design of the lens. 4. To calculate the keratometry values for the calculation of the required power of an intraocular lens for implantation. This is an important issue in corneas that have undergone refractive surgery, because it is more difficult to estimate the real keratometric values in order to avoid over or under corrections. 5. To evaluate the effect of a keratorefractive procedure.
Bibliography
1. Ambrosio R Jr, Klyce SD, Wilson SE. Corneal topographic and pachymetric screening of keratorefractive patients. J Refract Surg 2003;19: 24-29.
2. Bogan SJ, Waring GO, Ibrahim O, Drews C, Curtis L. Classification of normal corneal topography based on computer-assisted videokeratography. Arch Ophthalmol 1990;108:945-9. 3. Boyd BF, Agarwal A, Alio JL, Krueger RR, Wilson SE. (Eds). Wavefront analysis, aberrometers and corneal topography. Highlights of Ophthalmology, 2003. 4. Cairns G, McGhee CNJ. Orbscan computerized topography: Attributes, applications, and limitations. J Cataract Refract Surg 2005;31:20520. 5. Corbett M, OBrart D, Rosen E, Stevenson R. Corneal topography: principles and applications. BMJ Publishing Group, 1999. 6. Corneal Topography. American Academy of Ophthalmology. Ophthalmology 1999;106:162838. 7. Courville CB, Smolek MK, Klyce SD. Contribution of ocular surface to visual optics. Exp Eye Res 2004;78:417-25. 8. Dabezies OH, Holladay JT. Measurement of corneal curvature: keratometer (ophthalmo-
Corneal Topography
meter). In Contact Lenses: the CLAO Guide to Basic Science and Clinical Practice. Kendall/ Hunt Publishing Co, 1995;253-89. Hamam H. A new measure for optical performance. Optom Vis Sci 2003; 80:174-84. Joslin CE, Wu SM, McMahon TT, Shahidi M. Higher-order wavefront aberrations in corneal refractive therapy. Optom Vis Sci 2003;80:80511. Karabatsas CH, Cook SD. Topographic analysis in pellucid marginal corneal degeneration and keratoglobus. Eye 1996;10:451-55. Kaufman H, Barron B, McDonald M, Kaufman S. Companion handbook to the cornea. London, Butterworth Heinemann,1999. Klyce SD. Corneal topography and the new wave. Cornea 2000;19:723-29. Krachmer JH, Mannis MJ, Holland EJ (Ed). Cornea. Surgery of cornea and conjunctiva. St Louis, Elsevier-Mosby, 2005. Maeda N, Klyce SD, Smolek MK. Neural network classification of corneal topography. Preliminary demonstration. Invest Ophthalmol Vis Sci 1995;36:1327-35. Meja-Barbosa Y, Malacara-Hernndez D. A review of methods for measuring corneal topography. Optom Vis Sci 2001;78:240-53. Miller D, Greiner JV. Corneal measurements and tests. In Principles and Practice of Ophthalmology. Philadelphia,WB Saunders,1994. 18. Molebny VV, Panagopoulou SI, Molebny SV, Wakil YS, Pallikaris IG. Principles of ray tracing aberrometry. J Refract Surg 2000;16:S572-75. 19. Rabinowitz YS. Keratoconus. Surv Ophthalmol 1998;42:297-319. 20. Rabinowitz YS, Nesburn AB, McDonnell PJ. Videokeratography of the fellow eye in unilateral keratoconus. Ophthalmology 1993;100: 181-86. 21. Rao SK, Padmanabhan P. Understanding corneal topography. Curr Opin Ophthalmol 2000;11:248-59. 22. Thibos LN, Applegate RA, Schwiergerling JT, Webb R. Standards for reporting the optical aberrations of eyes. J Refract Surg 2002;18:S652-60. 23. Vincigerra P, Camesasca FI, Calossi A. Statistical Anlysis of phisiological aberrations of the cornea. J Refract Surg 2003;19(suppl):265-69. 24. Wang L, Koch DD. Corneal Topography and its integration into refractive surgery. Comp Ophthalmol Update 2005;6:73-81. 25. Wilson SE, Ambrosio R. Computerized corneal topography and its importance to wavefront technology. Cornea 2001;20:441-54. 26. Wilson SE, Klyce SD. Advances in the analysis of corneal topography. Surv Ophthalmol 1991;35: 269-77. 27. Wilson SE, Lin DT, Klyce SD, Insler MS. Terriens marginal degeneration: corneal topography. Refract Corneal Surg 1990;6:15-20.
83
9. 10.
16. 17.
84
MANOTOSH RAY
Confocal Microscopy
of confocal microscope over the regular microscope. When focused on a transparent tissue like cornea with regular microscope, the unfocused layers affect the visibility of the focused layer. Confocal microscope, on the other hand, can focus on different layers distinctly without affecting the quality of the image.
Confocal microscopy, one of the most advanced imaging technologies, offers several advantages over conventional wide-field optical microscopy. It has the ability to control the depth of field, eliminate or reduce the background information away from the focal plane and the capability to collect serial optical sections from thick specimens. The basic key to the confocal approach is the use of spatial filtering techniques to eliminate out-of-focus light or glare. There has been a tremendous interest in confocal microscopy in recent years, due in part to the relative ease with which extremely high quality images can be obtained. Confocal microscopy has enhanced the ability to image the cornea in vivo. The application of this technology permits the acquisition of images of high spatial resolution and contrast as compare to conventional microscopy. Confocal microscope employs an oscillating slit aperture in an ophthalmic microscope configuration, especially suitable for the analysis of cell layers of cornea. It can focus through the entire range of a normal cornea from epithelium to endothelium. A series of scan shows: (a) epithelium, (b) corneal nerves, (c) keratocytes, (d) endothelium and (e) a computer generated slice of cornea. There are distinct advantages
Optics
A halogen light source passes through movable slits (Nipkow disk). A condenser lens (front lens) projects the light to the cornea. Only a small area inside the cornea is illuminated to minimize the light scattering. The reflected light passes through the front lens again and is directed to another slit of same size via beam-splitter. Finally the image is projected onto a highly sensitive camera and displayed on a computer monitor (Fig. 5.1). The confocal microscope utilizes a transparent viscous sterile gel that is interposed between front lens and cornea to eliminate the optical interface with two different refractive indices. The front lens works on Distance Immersion Principle. The working distance (distance between front lens and the cornea) is
Confocal Microscopy
performed, a graphic shows the depth coordinate on the Z axis and the level of reflectivity on the Y axis. The graphic also displays the distance between two images along the anteroposterior line. This simultaneous graphic recording is called Z scan graphic. The reflectivity on Z scan is entirely dependent on the tissue being scanned. A transparent tissue displays low reflectivity whereas a higher reflectivity is obtained from an opaque layer. Therefore, different corneal layers would display different reflectivity on Z scan. The corneal endothelium displays the maximum reflectivity while stroma is the lowest. An intermediate reflectivity is obtained from epithelial layers. A typical Z scan of entire normal cornea shows high endothelial reflection curves followed by low stromal reflection and then late intermediate reflectivity from superficial corneal epithelium. Thus confocal miscroscopy enables to perform corneal pachymetry or even can measure the distance between two corneal layers.
85
1.92 mm. The back and forth movement of the front lens enables scanning of the entire cornea starting from anterior chamber and corneal endothelium to most superficial corneal epithelium. Use of standard X40 immersion lens gives magnified cellular detail and an image field of 440 330 m. Other lenses (e.g. X20) delivers wide field but less distinct cell morphology. Newer model (Confoscan 2.0) captures 350 images per examination at a rate of 25 frames per second. Thickness of the captured layers varies from 3 to 5 microns depending on scanning slit characteristics. In addition, every recorded image is characterized by its position on the Z axis of the cornea. Every time a confocal scan is
86
Fig. 5.3: Basal epithelial cells. High cell density with well demarcated cell borders
Now deep vertical fibers derive from deep corneal plexus to run anteriorly to form subbasal and subepithelial nerve plexus. Small nerve fibers from subbasal plexus terminate at the superficial epithelium. This complex anatomy was not possible to visualize in vivo until the advent of corneal confocal microscope. Generally, the nerve fibers appear bright and well contrasted against a dark background (Fig. 5.4). Confocal microscopy can visualize the orientation, tortuosity, width, branching pattern and any abnormality of the corneal nerves.
87
Endothelium
Endothelium is a non-innervated single layer of cells at the most posterior part of cornea. Endothelial cell density is maximal at birth and progressively declines with age. Normal endothelial cell count varies from 1600 to 3000 cells/mm (average 2700 cells/mm) in a normal healthy adult.2-4 However, cornea can still maintain the integrity till the cell count declines below 300-500 cells/mm.
Homogeneous hexagonal cells with uniform size and shape represent healthy endothelial cells. Increasing age and endothelial assault cause pleomorphism and polymegathism. Confocal microscopy easily identifies endothelial cells. These cells appear as bright hexagonal and polygonal cells with unrecognizable nucleus. The
88
Confocal Microscopy
but with progression of the disease they can involve the posterior stroma as well. Confocal microscopy reveals highly reflective, bright, dense structures in the anterior and midstroma. Keratocytes are not involved. Depth of stromal involvement may be ascertained by using Z scan function. This is an added advantage over other contemporary investigations that enables surgeon to plan for surgical modalities. Confocal microscopy is also useful in differential diagnosis and follow-up of the disease.
89
with tapering ends are visible in anterior stroma near the apex. The nature of these abnormal bodies is not yet known but it may be due to altered keratocytes. The corneal endothelial changes vary from none to occasional pleomorphism and polymegathism.
Corneal Dystrophies
Corneal dystrophies are inherited abnormalities that affect one or more layers of cornea. Usually both eyes are affected but not necessarily symmetrically. They may present at birth but more frequently develop during adolescence and progress gradually throughout life. Some forms are mild, others severe.
Granular Dystrophy
This is an autosomal dominant bilateral noninflammatory condition that results from deposition of eosinophilic hyaline deposits in the corneal stroma.9 It specifically affects the central cornea and eventually can cause decreased vision and eye discomfort. Initially, the lesions are confined to superficial stroma
Posterior polymorphous dystrophy (PPD) is a rare inherited disorder of the posterior layer of the cornea. It is a bilateral disorder with early onset, although early stage diagnosis is rare since most of the affected individuals remain asymptomatic. The characteristic endothelial changes are small vesicles or areas of geographic lesions. In fact, endothelial cells lining of the posterior surface of the cornea have epitheliallike features.10,11 These cells can also cover the trabecular meshwork, leading to glaucoma in some patients. Most severe cases may develop corneal edema due to compromised pump function of the endothelial cells. Confocal microscopy shows multiple round vesicles at the level of Descemets membrane and endothelium.12 PPD usually distorts the normal flat profile of the endothelial cells and present large dark cystic impressions on confocal scan. The endothelial cells surrounding the lesion appear large and distorted.
90
Confocal Microscopy
yet known. However, corneal edema that may be caused by microkeratome cut and suction may play an important role. Postoperative scarring and tissue retraction could be other possible factors. Using a Z scan, it is possible to identify the interface that corresponds to a very low level of reflectivity. The flap thickness is obtained by measuring the distance between high reflective spike from the front surface of the cornea and the low reflective interface (Fig. 5.10). white bodies (Fig. 5.11). Microstriae are present at the Bowmans layer. Excessive interface microstriae and bright particles may lead to astigmatism and eventually poor outcome after LASIK. These microstriae can be imaged with confocal microscope even when the slit-lamp examination is unremarkable.
91
The interface usually appears as a hyporeflective space in between relatively hyperreflective cellular stroma. Interface can easily be imaged by confocal microscope. Typically, the keratocyte concentration is lower than normal in the interface. Bright particles and microstriae are consistently visible in the interface. These bright particles most probably originate from microkeratome blade and represented by highly reflective
Diffuse lamellar keratitis (DLK) also known as sands of Sahara syndrome, is a noninfectious inflammation of the interface. The etiology is not known but it is assumed to be toxic or allergic in nature. In confocal scan DLK appears as diffuse and multiple infiltrates in the interface with no anterior or posterior extension. Subepithelial nerve fibers are affected by LASIK. No nerve is visible in immediate postoperative period. However, the regenerating nerve fibers appear as thin irregularly branching line when confocal scan is performed 5-7 days after surgery. The residual stromal thickness can also be measured using Z scan technique as described while evaluating the epithelial flap.
Corneal Grafts
Confocal microscope is a useful tool to followup the corneal grafts and to diagnose the
92
It is well known that allograft rejection is one of the most common causes of graft failure. Graft rejection can be classified as epithelial, subepithelial and endothelial rejection, of which the endothelial rejection is the worst. Confocal
Fig. 5.13: Co-existence of degenerated and normal endothelial cells in early endothelial allograft rejection
Confocal Microscopy
features of epithelial rejection are distorted basal epithelial cells with altered subepithelial reflectivity. Subepithelial rejection is identified by discrete opacities underneath the epithelial layer.22 Endothelial rejection, on the other hand, is characterized by coexistence of normal looking and degenerated endothelial cells, focal endothelial cell lesions and bright highly reflective microprecipitates (Fig. 5.13).23 inclusion bodies located at the basal epithelial layer.24 Confocal microscopy adds newer dimensions to the existing knowledge. It demonstrates involvement of entire cornea, although vortex keratopathy is primarily a corneal epithelial pathology. The characteristic features are presence of highly reflective, bright intracellular deposits at the basal epithelial layer (Fig. 5.14). Overlying epithelium is usually normal. In advanced cases these microdeposits may extend to the stroma and eventually to the endothelium.25 Stromal keratocyte density is often reduced.
93
Intracorneal Deposits
Sources of intracorneal deposits can be exogenous or endogenous. They can involve various layers of cornea individually or in combination. Exogenous sources: Long-term use of contact lenses Refractive surgery Vitreoretinal surgery using silicone oil Drugs: Amiodarone, Chloroquine Endogenous sources: Wilsons disease Hyperlipidemia Fabrys disease Hemosiderosis The clinical diagnosis is based on slit-lamp biomicroscopy and systemic features in selected cases. The knowledge of confocal features in these disorders is limited except in drug induced keratopathies.
Vortex Keratopathy
Vortex keratopathy known as cornea verticillata is characterized by whorl-like corneal epithelial deposits. It can be induced by various drugs, e.g. amiodarone (used for cardiac arrhythmias) and anti-malarials (chloroquine, hydroxychloroquine). Clinically, vortex keratopathy is manifested as golden-brown opacities at the inferior corneal epithelium. On electron microscopy, they appear as intracytoplasmic lysosom-like lamellar
Conclusion
Ophthalmic investigations and instrumentations have come long way over the past decades. Confocal microscope is one of those wonderful innovations in recent time. It is becoming more popular everyday and its indications are expanding. Confocal microscopy is truly an exciting tool that can be useful for the clinical diagnosis, follow-up and analysis of many corneal lesions.
94
References
1. Weigand W, Thaer AA, Kroll P, et al. Optical sectioning of the cornea with a new confocal in vivo slit-scanning videomicroscope. Ophthalmology 1995;102(4):485-92. 2. Oliveira-Soto L, Efron N. Morphology of corneal nerves using confocal microscopy. Cornea 2001;20(4):374-84. 3. Tuft SJ, Coster DJ. The corneal endothelium. Eye 1990;4:389. 4. Nucci P, Brancato R, Mets MB, et al. Normal endothelial cell density range in childhood. Arch Ophthalmol 1990;108:247. 5. Gass JD. The iron lines of the superficial cornea: Hudson-Stahle line, Stockers line, and Fleischers ring. Arch Ophthalmol 1964;71:348. 6. Maguire LJ, Bourne WM. Corneal topography in early keratoconus. Am J Ophthalmol 1989; 108:107. 7. Maguire LJ, Lowry J. Identifying progression of subclinical keratoconus by serial topography analysis. Am J Ophthalmol 1991;112:41. 8. Somodi S, Hahnel C, Slowik C, et al. Confocal in vivo microscopy and confocal laser-scanning fluorescence microscopy in keratoconus. Ger J Ophthalmol 1996;5(6):518-25. 9. Werner LP, Werner L, Dighiero P. et al. Confocal microscopy in Bowmans and stromal corneal dystrophies. Ophthalmology 1999;106(9):16971704. 10. Hirst LW, Waring GO. Clinical specular microscopy of posterior polymorphous endothelial dystrophy. Am J Ophthalmol 1983;95(2):143-55. 11. Mashima Y, Hida T, Akiya S, et al. Specular microscopy of posterior polymorphous endothelial dystrophy. Ophthalmic Paediatr Genet 1986; 7(2):101-07. 12. Chiou AG, Kaufman SC, Beuerman RW, et al. Confocal microscopy of posterior polymorphous endothelial dystrophy. Ophthalmologica 1999;213(4):211-13.
Tonometry
95
Tonometry
Tonometry in reference to the eye is the measurement of intraocular pressure (IOP). A tonometer is an instrument that exploits the physical properties of the eye to permit measurement of pressure without the need to cannulate the eye. The first practical tonometer was invented by Maklakov in 1885. Fick is credited with inventing a second applanation tonometer employing a fixed area produced by an adjustable force. This instrument was a forerunner of the Goldmann applanation tonometer (1954) which is today considered the most accurate clinical tonometer. From a functional standpoint, a normal IOP is one that does not result in optic nerve damage. All eyes do not respond similarly to a particular IOP, therefore, a normal pressure cannot be represented as a specific measurement. Various studies of IOP distribution have shown a mean IOP of 15.5 2.6 mm Hg and the upper limit has been demonstrated to be 2 standard deviations above the mean IOP that is 20.5 mm Hg.
the resulting fluid displacement causes the remainder of the globe to distend. The tendency of the wall of the eye is to resist stretching, and deformation of the cornea raises the IOP. Tonometers in which the IOP is negligibly raised during tonometry (less than 5%) are termed as low-displacement tonometers. The Goldmann tonometer displaces only 0.5 l of aqueous humor and raises IOP by only 3%. Tonometers that displace a large volume of fluid and consequently raise IOP significantly are termed as highdisplacement tonometers. In a normal eye IOP becomes more during Schitz tonometry. Highdisplacement tonometers are mostly less accurate than low-displacement tonometers.
Types of Tonometry
Tonometry can be broadly classified into 2 types, direct and indirect.
Types of Tonometers
The physical properties of a normal cornea determine the limits of accuracy of tonometry. When the cornea is deformed by a tonometer,
Direct Method
A catheter is inserted into the anterior chamber of the eye and the other end is connected to a manometric device from which the pressure is calculated. Though this is the most accurate
96
Indirect Method
It is based on eyes response to an applied force.
Contact Tonometers
IOP measurement is performed by deforming the globe and correlating the force responsible for deformation to the pressure within the eye. Both indentation and applanation tonometers effect a deformation of globe but the magnitude varies (Fig. 6.1).
Noncontact Tonometer
Noncontact tonometer measures time required to deform a standard area of corneal surface in response to a jet of air.
Schitz Tonometer
Schitz tonometer (Fig. 6.2) consists of metal plunger that slides through a hole in a concave metal plate. The plunger supports a hammer device connected to needle that crosses a scale. The extent to which cornea is indented by plunger is measured as the distance from the foot plate curve to the plunger base and a lever system moves a needle on calibrated scale. The indicated scale reading and the plunger weight are converted to an IOP measurement. More the plunger indents the cornea, higher the scale reading and lower the IOP
Fig. 6.1: A Deformation of globe during indentation tonometry, B Deformation of globe during applanation tonometry
Indentation Tonometer
Indentation tonometer is used to measure the amount of deformation or indentation of the globe in response to a standard weight applied to the cornea or the area flattened by a standard force.
Tonometry
generated an empirical formula for linear relationship between the log function of IOP and the ocular distension. This formula has C a numerical constant, the coefficient of ocular rigidity which is an expression of distensibility of eye. Its average value is 0.025. Technique: Patient should be in supine position, looking up at a fixation target while examiner separates the lids and lowers the tonometer plate to rest on the anesthetized cornea so that plunger is free to move vertically (Fig. 6.3). A fine movement of needle on scale is in response to ocular pulsations. Scale reading is an average of the extremes of these excursions. The 5.5 gm weight is initially used. If scale reading is 4 or less, additional weight is added to plunger. Conversion table is used to derive IOP in mm Hg from scale reading and plunger weight. The instrument is calibrated before each use to check scale (reading is zero).
Fig. 6.2: Schitz tonometer
97
The standard instrument has following characteristics: Foot plate has concavity of 15 mm radius of curvature. The tonometer weighs 11 gm. Plunger has 3 mm diameter, a weight of 5.5 gm including the force of the lever rests on top of the plunger. Additional weights are added to plunger to increase it to 7.5, 10, or 15 gm. The scale reading is zero when plunger extends 0.05 mm beyond foot plate curve. Each scale unit represents 0.05 mm protrusion of the plunger. Basic concept: The weight of tonometer on the eye increases the actual IOP (Po) to a higher level (Pt). The change in pressure from Po to Pt is an expression of the resistance of the eye (scleral rigidity) to the displacement of fluid. Determination of Po from a scale reading Pt requires conversion which is done according to Friedenwald conversion tables. Friedenwald
Sources of error: Accuracy is limited as ocular rigidity varies from eye to eye. As conversion tables are based on an average coefficient of ocular rigidity; eye that varies significantly from this value gives erroneous IOP. High ocular rigidity is seen in high hyperopia, long-standing glaucoma, age-related macular degeneration, and vasoconstrictor therapy. Low ocular rigidity
98
biprism (Fig. 6.5) which is used to applanate cornea. Two beam splitting prisms within applanating unit optically convert circular area of corneal contact in 2 semicircles. Edge of corneal contact is made apparent by instilling fluorescein while viewing in cobalt blue light. By manually rotating a dial calibrated in grams, the force is adjusted by changing the length of a spring within the device. The prisms are calibrated in such a fashion that inner margin of semicircles touch when 3.06 mm of the cornea is applanated. Biprism is attached by a rod to a housing which contains a coil spring and series of levers that are used to adjust the force of the biprism against the cornea. Technique: Cornea is anesthetized, tear film is stained with sodium fluorescein. Cornea and biprism is illuminated by a cobalt blue light.
Tonometry
Fluorescein facilitates visualization of tear meniscus at margin of contact. Fluorescent semicircles are viewed through the biprism. Force against the cornea is adjusted until the inner edges overlap. Ocular pulsations create excursions of semicircular tear meniscus and IOP is read as the median over which arc glides. This is the end point (Fig. 6.6) at which a reading can be taken from a graduated dial which indicates grams of force applied to tonometer and so this number is multiplied by 10 to obtain IOP in mm Hg.
99
Figs 6.7A and B: Vertical misalignment. To minimize this, tonometer biprism should be rotated so that axis of least corneal curvature is opposite the red line on the prism holder. Other method is to obtain measurements with mires oriented horizontally and vertically and to average these readings
6. More than 6 D astigmatism produces an elliptical area on applanation that gives erroneous IOP. 4D with-the-rule and against-the-rule astigmatism underestimate and overestimate IOP, respectively. 7. Mires may be distorted on applanating on irregular corneas. Effect of central corneal thickness (CCT): Variations in corneal thickness change the resistance of the cornea to indentation so that this is no longer balanced entirely by the tear film surface tension thus affecting the accuracy of IOP measurement. A thinner cornea may require less force to applanate it, leading to underestimation of true IOP while a thicker cornea would need more force to applanate it, giving an artificially higher IOP. The Goldmann applanation tonometer was designed to give accurate readings when the CCT was 520 m. As shown by Ehlers et al, there can be under estimation or overestimation of IOP when the corneal thickness is less or more than 520 micron, respectively. They interpolated that deviation of CCT from 520 m yields a change in applanation readings of 0.7 mm Hg per 10 m. IOP measurements are also modified after PRK and LASIK. Thinning of the central cornea is believed to give lower readings on applanation.
Sources of error in applanation tonometry 1. Inadequate concentration of fluorescein in precorneal tear film gives hypofluorescence. 2. Fluorescein may lose fluorescence in acidic solution (quenching of fluorescence) causing underestimation of IOP. 3. Wider meniscus or improper vertical alignment gives higher IOP readings (Figs 6.7A and B). 4. Thin corneas underestimate and thick corneas overestimate IOP. 5. For every 3D increase in corneal curvature, IOP raises about 1 mm Hg as more fluid is displaced under steeper corneas causing increase in ocular rigidity.
100
Mackay-Marg Tonometer
Basic concept: Force is required to keep the flat plate of a plunger flush with a surrounding sleeve against the pressure of corneal deformation. Tonometer incorporates a 1.5 mm diameter plunger affixed to a rigid spring that extends 10 m beyond the plane of surrounding rubber sleeve. Movement of plunger is electronically monitored by a transducer and recorded on a moving paper strip. When the tonometer is placed against cornea, the tracing that represents the force applied to the plunger begins to rise. At 1.5 mm of corneal area applanation, tracing reaches a peak and the force applied = IOP + force required to deform the cornea. At 3 mm flattening, force required to deform cornea is transferred from plunger to surrounding sleeve, creating a dip in tracing corresponding to IOP. Flattening of >3 mm of area gives artificial elevation of IOP. It is accurate in eyes with scarred, edematous and irregular corneas.
Draeger Tonometer
Draeger tonometer is similar to Perkins but uses different set of prisms and operates with a motor adjusting the force on these prisms.
Tonometry Other Mackay-Marg-type Tonometers: CAT 100 Applanation and Biotronic Tonometers
They have an internal logic program which automatically selects the acceptable measurement and 3 or more good IOP readings are averaged and displayed on screen. The probe tip is applied perpendicularly to cornea until it is just indented. An audible click indicates that the measurement is acceptable. The process is repeated 4-10 times until a beep indicates a statistically valid average reading.
101
Pneumatonometer
Pneumatonometer or pneumatic tonometer is like Mackay-Marg tonometer. It has a core sensing mechanism for measuring IOP while force required to bend the cornea is transferred to surrounding structure. The sensor is a air pressure like electronically controlled plunger in Mackay-Marg tonometer. It can also be used for continuous monitoring of IOP. It gives significantly higher IOP estimates.
Tonopen
Tonopen (Fig. 6.10) is a portable and battery operated tonometer. It has the same principle as that of Mackay-Marg tonometer. The tip has a strain gauge that is activated when in contact with cornea. The built-in microprocessor logic circuit senses a trough force and records until an acceptable measurement is achieved. Four to ten such measurements are averaged to give a final IOP which is displayed.
Noncontact Tonometer
Fig. 6.10: Tonometry with tonopen
Noncontact tonometer (NCT) was introduced by Grolman. A puff of room air creates a
102
Original NCT has 3 subsystems: 1. Alignment system: It aligns patients eye in 3 dimensions. 2. Optoelectronic applanation monitoring system: It comprises transmitter, receiver and detector, and timer. a. Transmitter directs a collimated beam of light at corneal apex. b. Receiver and detector accept only parallel coaxial rays of light reflected from cornea. c. Timer measures from an internal reference to the point of peak light intensity. 3. Pneumatic system: It generates a puff of room air directed against cornea. When the reflected light is at peak intensity, the cornea is presumed to be flattened. The time elapsed is directly related to the force of jet necessary to flatten the cornea and correspondingly to IOP. NCT is accurate if IOP is nearly
Schitz Tonometer
Studies indicate that Schitz reads lower than GAT even when the postural influence on IOP is eliminated by performing measurements in supine position. The magnitude of difference between the two tonometers and the influence of ocular rigidity are such that Schitz indicates only that the IOP is within a certain range and is of limited value even for screening purposes.
103
Pneumatic Tonometer
Pneumatic tonometer correlates well with GAT readings. However, it gives significantly higher IOP estimates.
Noncontact Tonometer
Noncontact tonometer is reliable within the normal IOP range, although its reliability is
104
Tonopen
Tip is protected by a disposable latex cover.
Pneumatonometer
Tip should be cleaned with an alcohol sponge, taking care to dry the surface before use. Alternative is the use of disposable latex cover over the tip.
Bibliography
1. Armaly MF. On the distribution of applanation pressure. I. Statistical features and the effect of age, sex, and family history of glaucoma. Arch Ophthalmol 1965;73:11. 2. Bengtsson B. Comparison of Schitz and Goldmann tonometry and tonography in a population. Acta Ophthalmol (Copenh) 1972;50: 455.
Tonometry
3. Craven ER, et al. Applanation tonometer tip sterilization for adenovirus type 8. Ophthalmology 1987;94:1538. 4. Drance SM. The coefficient of scleral rigidity in normal and glaucomatous eyes. Arch Ophthalmol 1960;63:668. 5. Dunn JS, Brubaker RF: Perkins applanation tonometer, clinical and laboratory evaluation. Arch Ophthalmol 1973;89:149. 6. Durhan DG, Bigliano RP, Masino JA: Pneumatic applanation tonometer. Trans Am Acad Ophthalmol Otolaryngol 1965;69:1029. 7. Finlay RD. Experience with the Draeger applanation tonometer. Trans Ophthalmol Soc UK 1970;90:887. 8. Forbes M, Pico GJ, Goldmann B: A noncontact applanation tonometer description and clinical evaluation. Arch Ophthalmol 1974;91:134. 9. Friedenwald JS. Standardization of tonometers decennial report. Trans Am Acad Ophthalmol Otolaryngol 1954;58. 10. Friedenwald JS. Contribution to the theory and practice of tonometry. Am J Ophthalmol 1937; 20:985. 11. Friedman E, et al. Increased scleral rigidity and age-related macular degeneration. Ophthalmology 1989;96:104. 12. Glouster J, Perkins ES. The validity of the ImbertFick law as applied to applanation tonometry. Exp Eye Res 1963;2:274. 13. Grolman B. Non-contact applanation tonometry. Optician 1973;166:4. 14. Hollows FC, Graham PA: Intraocular pressure, glaucoma, and glaucoma suspects in a defined population. Br J Ophthalmol 1966;50:570. 15. Imbert A. Theories ophthalmotonometers: Arch Ophthalmol 1885;5:358. 16. Kaufman HE, Wind CA, Waltman SR. Validity of Mackay-Marg electronic applanation tonometer in patients with scarred irregular corneas. Am J Ophthalmol 1970;69:1003. 17. Khan JA, et al. Comparison of Oculab Tono-Pen readings obtained from various corneal and scleral locations. Arch Ophthalmol 1991; 109: 1444. 18. Krieglstein GK, Waller WK. Goldmann applanation versus hand-applanation and Schitz indentation tonometry. Graefes Arch Clin Exp Ophthalmol 1975;194:11. 19. Kronfeld PC. Tonometer calibration empirical validation: the committee on standardization of tonometers. Trans Am Acad Ophthalmol Otolaryngol 1957;61:123. Langham ME, McCarthy E. A rapid pneumatic applanation tonometer: comparative findings and evaluation. Arch Ophthalmol 1968;79:389. Macro FJ, Brubakar RF. Methodology of eye pressure measurement. Biorheology 1969;6:37. Markiewitz HH. The so-called Imbert Fick law (Correspondence). Arch Ophthalmol 1960;64:159. McMillan F, Forster RK. Comparison of MackayMarg, Goldmann, and Perkins tonometers in abnormal corneas. Arch Ophthalmol 1975;93:420. Moses RA. Fluorescein in applanation tonometry. Am J Ophthalmol 1960;49:1149. Moses RA. The Goldmann applanation tonometer. Am J Ophthalmol 1958;46:865. Pepose JS, et al. Disinfection of Goldmann tonometers against human immunodeficiency virus type I. Arch Ophthalmol 1989;107:983. Perkins ES. Hand-held applanation tonometer. Br J Ophthalmol 1965;49:591. Petersen WC, Schlegel WA. Mackay-Marg tonometry by technicians. Am J Ophthalmol 1973;76:933. Posner A. Practical problems in the use of the Maklakov tonometer. EENT J 1963;42:82. Posner A. An evaluation of the Maklakov applanation tonometer. EENT J 1962;41:377. Rootman DS, et al. Accuracy and precision of the Tono-Pen in measuring intraocular pressure after keratoplasty and epikeratophakia in scarred corneas. Arch Ophthalmol 1988;106:1697. Schmidt T. The clinical application of the Goldmann applanation tonometer. Am J Ophthalmol 1960;49:967. Schwartz NJ, Mackay RS, Sackman JL. A theoretical and experimental study of the mechanical behavior of the cornea with application to the measurement of intraocular pressure. Bull Math Biol 1966;28:285. Schields MB. The noncontact tonometer: Its value and limitations. Surv Ophthalmol 1980;24:211. Starrels ME. The measurement of intraocular pressure. Int Ophthalmol Clin 1979;19:9. Stepanik J. Tonometry results using a corneal applanation 3.53 mm in diameter. Klin Monatsbl Augenheidkld 1984;184:40. Ventura LM, Dix RD. Viability of herpes simplex type I on the applanation tonometer. Am J Ophthalmol 1987;103:48.
105
20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31.
32. 33.
106
A NARAYANASWAMY, L VIJAYA
Gonioscopy
Gonioscopy, the visualization and assessment of the anterior chamber angle, is an essential procedure in the diagnosis and management of glaucoma. The term gonioscopy was coined by Trantas in 1907. Subsequently, Goldmann introduced the gonioprism, and Barkan mastered the art of gonioscopy and highlighted its role in the management of glaucoma. All cases of glaucoma should undergo a routine and periodic gonioscopic evaluation. The procedure is fairly easy to perform, but experience is needed in accurate assessment and interpretation.
Optical Principles
The anatomy of the eye is such that the angle recess is not visualized by routine instrumentation due to total internal reflection of rays emerging from the angle recess. The gonioscope was evolved to overcome this optical problem of critical angle (Fig. 7.1).
Fig. 7.1: Optical principles of gonioscopy: a: Incident light from the angle exceeds critical angle resulting in total internal reflection and preventing visibility of the recess. b and c: The gonio lens optically eliminates the cornea as shown in the schematic diagrams and allows visibility of the angle
Types of Gonioscopy
Direct Gonioscopy
Direct gonioscopy is performed with the aid of
concave contact lenses (e.g. Koeppe) placed over an anesthetized cornea with the patient in supine position and the space between the lens and cornea filled with normal saline or methyl cellulose as a coupling agent. Viewing is achieved directly using a hand-held biomicroscope and an illuminator. Alternatively, the operating microscope can be used to evaluate the angle of the anterior chamber by making appropriate adjustments. Koeppes lenses are available in diameters of 16 mm and 18 mm allowing easy
Gonioscopy
TABLE 7.1: CONTACT LENSES USED FOR GONIOSCOPY Type Direct Lenses 1. Koeppe 2. Barkan 3. Thorpe 4. Swan-Jacob 5. Layden Indirect 1. Goldmann single mirror and three mirrors 2. Zeiss and Posner four mirrors 3. Sussman four mirrors 4. Ritch trabeculoplasty lens Features Diagnostic lens50 diopter concave lens available in two sizes for infants (16 mm) and adults (18 mm) Surgical lensavailable in various sizes and has blunted edges allowing access for goniotomy Surgical and diagnostic lens Surgical lens for goniotomy Diagnostic lens for evaluating neonatal angle Diagnostic and therapeutic lenses, provide excellent images with good magnification and globe stability Ideal diagnostic lenses, patient friendly and very valuable in evaluating narrow angles and to perform indentation gonioscopy Hand held four mirrors similar advantages as the Zeiss lenses Four-mirrored lens with pairs inclined at 59 and 62 degrees. One of each set has a convex lens over it providing magnificationboth diagnostic and therapeutic
107
use in pediatric patients. This technique can be practiced both in the outpatient clinic as well as in the operation theatre. A major advantage of this method is that it allows simultaneous comparison of different quadrants of the angle. Apart from the diagnostic value, lenses like the Swan Jacob, Barkan and Thorpe aid in surgical intervention (Figs 7.2 and 7.3).
Indirect Gonioscopy
Indirect gonioscopy employs reflecting prisms (e.g. Goldmann lens) mounted in a contact lens and angulated at appropriate degrees to evaluate the angle structures using the slit-lamp. The most popular lenses are the Goldmann type, Zeiss, Posner and Sussman four mirrors (Table 7.1). Goldmann lenses (Fig. 7.4) are of two types: (i) Single mirroredhas a mirror angulated at 62, (ii) Three-mirrored lenshas mirrors at 59 (tongue-shaped, used to evaluate the angle), 67
108
Fig. 7.6: The inferior rim of three mirror gonioscope is inserted in the lower fornix with patient in upgaze as shown and swiftly tilted on to the cornea preventing loss of any coupling fluid
Fig. 7.7: The four mirror gonioscope is applied gently and directly on to the cornea. Fingers rested over cheek to ensure adequate support and prevent inadvertent pressure over the globe
Gonioscopy
8. The patient is asked to maintain a straight gaze once the lens is in situ. 9. Low, but adequate illumination, and small beams are focused on the mirror, with viewing and illumination maintained in the same axis. The illumination arm is moved paraxial when needed to evaluate the nasal and temporal recesses. Magnification and illumination can be increased when needed to evaluate finer details like new vessels and foreign bodies. One quadrant can be evaluated at a time with the three mirror by sequential rotation while with the four mirror gonioscope all four quadrants can be evaluated without rotation and with minimum adjustments of the slit-lamp. Always remember the opposite quadrant (e.g. with mirror at 7 oclock, the 1 oclock angle) is being evaluated and the image is reversed but not crossed. Other dynamic maneuvers like compression and over the hill evaluation are subsequently done. Over the hill maneuver involves asking the patient to look in the direction of the mirror; which in turn gives access to viewing angle recess over the convex iris. Compression techniques will be dealt with subsequently. 10. Disinfection of lenses is necessary prior and after every use because of the potential of transmitting infection. Lenses can be swiped dry with bacillocid (2% gluteraldehyde) or alternatively lenses can be rinsed with soap solution and water and allowed to dry.
109
Fig. 7.8: Gonioscopic landmarks of a normal angle: 1 Iris root, 2 Ciliary body band, 3 Scleral spur, 4 Trabecular meshwork, 5 Schwalbes line, 6 Schlemms canal, 7 Parallelopiped effect
to Schwalbes line (Fig. 7.8) or from iris plane to Schwalbes should curtail errors in interpretation. To start with, from the peripheral iris plane one can follow upwards to the insertion of iris root. The contour of iris has several variations. The normal adult eye has a slightly convex contour. The same may be exaggerated in hyperopic eyes, where in the anterior segment it is crowded. A flat iris configuration is commonly associated with myopia and aphakia. A flat iris configuration with a peripheral convex roll or hump of iris that lies in close relation to the trabecular meshwork and can be seen in phakic normal eyes which often mimics a narrowangle and is referred to as plateau iris configuration. Contours could also be concave and are associated with high myopes and pigment dispersion syndrome. The insertion of iris root, may vary from a posterior, anterior or high insertions, thereby determining the visibility of the ciliary body band and the contour and depth of angle recess. The ciliary body band is composed of the anterior end of ciliary muscle
110
Pediatric Eye
The pediatric eye has definite but subtle variations in its anatomy. The iris contour in a newborn is usually flat and its insertion is posterior to scleral spur with the anterior extension of ciliary body band visible. This contour does eventually become convex as the angle recess develops in 6-12 months. The trabecular meshwork is nonpigmented and appears thick and translucent. Congenital glaucomas present with
Gonioscopy
TABLE 7.2: CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS FOR GONIOSCOPY System System basis Angle structures and classification All structures visible Angle recess not seen Ciliary body band not seen Posterior trabeculum obscured Only Schwalbes line visible Wide open (30-45) Moderately narrow (20) Extremely narrow (10) Partly or totally closed Anterior to Schwalbes line Behind (posterior) to Schwalbes line At scleral spur Deep into ciliary body band Extremely deep 0-40 degrees Regular (slightly convex) Quirk (posterior bowing) Steep Wide open Grade I narrow Grade II narrow Grade III narrow Grade IV narrow Grade Grade Grade Grade A B C D E r q s 3-4, closure impossible 2, closure possible 1, closure probable 0, closure present
111
Scheie (1957)
Shaffer (1960)
anterior insertions of the iris directly on to the trabeculum and at times the anterior iris stroma sweeps upward in a concave fashion to insert onto the trabecular meshwork.
Fig. 7.9: Gonio-photograph of a grade IV Shaffers angle (corresponds to SpaethD40r). (a) Iris root, (b) Ciliary body band, (c) Scleral spur, (d) Trabecular meshwork. Iris contour is regular with a deep recess
All the landmarksiris root, ciliary body band, scleral spur and trabecular meshwork are visible. When insertion of iris occurs at scleral spur, the peripheral iris appears slightly convex, the angle of the anterior chamber still remains open (Shaffers grade III or Speaths C30r, Fig. 7.10).
112
Fig. 7.10: Gonio-photograph of a grade III Shaffers angle (corresponds to SpaethC30r). Landmarks are visible upto scleral spur with a mild iris convexity
Fig. 7.12: The same angle on compression widens to reveal landmarks upto scleral spur
Compression Gonioscopy
Compression or indentation gonioscopy is a simple and invaluable technique that one needs to know to assess narrow angles (Fig. 7.11) and chronic angle-closure situations. It helps distinguish appositional angle-closure from synechial angle-closure. The technique employs exerting external pressure over the cornea using the Zeiss, Posner or Sussman four mirror lenses; thereby forcing the lens iris diaphragm posteriorly and allowing to visualize the hidden angle recess (Fig. 7.12). The technique involves a routine assessment of all quadrants, following which, if one subsequently decides the angle is narrow, each
quadrant is re-evaluated using a narrow slitbeam (to prevent miosis causing artifactual opening of the angle recess), pressure is applied directed towards the center of the eye. This results in deepening of the anterior chamber in the area of recess caused by bowing back of peripheral iris along with stretching of the limbal scleral ring and straightening of the angle recess; following this one can see structures that were not visible earlier, or confirm the presence of peripheral anterior synechiae. Corneal folds often distort the view but this can be minimized with appropriate technique in application of pressure. The physiological principles involved in compression gonioscopy have been depicted in Figure 7.13. Compression may not be effective when intraocular pressures are beyond 40 mm Hg as this limits the expansion of the limbal scleral ring.
Common Gonioscopic Findings and their Variations Peripheral Anterior Synechia (PAS)
The peripheral anterior synechia is a pathological term referring to the adhesions of peripheral iris to the anterior angle structures, most often the functional trabecular meshwork, or rarely,
Fig. 7.11: The photograph shows a narrow angle visible upto the Schwalbes line
Gonioscopy
arising from the peripheral iris surface and branching out in an arborizing and lacy pattern onto the corneoscleral portion of trabecular meshwork. Varying amounts of peripheral anterior synechiae may also be associated depending on the stage of disease process.
113
Pigmentation
Fig. 7.13: Compression gonioscopy: a: The narrow angle appears closed on a routine gonioscopy, b: Compression fails to allow visibility of angle structures due to PAS, c: Compression widens the recess and allows a view of all structures in the absence of PAS
extending to the Schwalbes line. Typically seen associated with primary angle-closure glaucoma, uveitic and other secondary angle-closure glaucomas, PAS may often be confused with iris processeswhich are normal fine lacy cords of uveal tissue extending from the peripheral iris to the trabecular meshwork. PAS on the other hand are broad adhesions commonly localized to quadrants with areas in between widening with indentation technique of gonioscopy. An angle that is closed 360 may often present a dilemma but one can follow the slit-beam from the posterior surface of the cornea which normally does not meet the beam on the iris directly in an angle that is open but instead lies alongside the other. A direct continuation of the beam without a break is suggestive of a closed-angle. Clinical correlation and experience will often help overcome this hurdle.
The trabecular meshwork has a varying amount of pigmentation varying from 0 to 4, which is a subjective grading that correlates to none (0), faint (1), average (2), heavy (3), and very heavy (4). Pigmentation increases with age under normal physiological conditions. Excessive pigmentation is usually pathological and is associated with pseudoexfoliation syndrome, pigment dispersion syndrome, traumatic and uveitic glaucomas.
Blood Vessels
Normally all vessels in the angle are restricted to the ciliary body band and iris root and do not extend to the scleral spur or trabecular meshwork. Anomalous vessels are not rare, they, however, can readily be distinguished from neovascularization which are vessels usually
Conclusion
In conclusion, the diagnostic basis of any glaucoma should be in correlation to the gonioscopic findings whenever possible. The management and prognosis of the disease depends on a complete diagnosis that includes
114
Bibliography
1. Epstein DL. Chandler and Grants Glaucoma (3rd edn). Philadelphia: Lea and Febiger, 1986. 2. Fellman RL, Spaeth GL, Starita RJ. Gonioscopy: Key to successful management of glaucoma. In Focal points Clinical Modules for Ophthalmologists, San Francisco, AAO 1984.
115
An estimated 67 million people worldwide have glaucoma in the year 2000. At least 50% do not know that they have the disease since it is usually without symptoms.1,2 Rapid advances in imaging technologies such as confocal scanning laser ophthalmoscopy, scanning laser polarimetry and optical coherence tomography for detection of early glaucomatous damage have only moderate sensitivity and specificity.3-5 New psychophysical procedures such as short wavelength automated perimetry, frequency doubling perimetry and motion automated perimetry which are targeted at specific visual functions have been shown to be more sensitive and specific than standard automated perimetry for identifying early glaucomatous damage. 6-8 However, these techniques may not be available to all clinicians and have the limitations of all subjective tests. Several studies have shown that abnormalities in the appearance of the optic disk may precede visual field defects.9,10 Conventional stereoscopic clinical evaluation and imaging of the optic disk with fundus photographs is still the most frequently used and sensitive means of diagnosing glaucoma. 11 With some training, it is possible to clinically evaluate optic nerve head and retinal nerve fiber layer stereoscopically and detect early glaucomatous damage. The aim
116
Fig. 8.1: Noncontact lenses: +60D, +78D and Volk superfield lenses
It is important to draw the appearance of the optic nerve head based on these methods. Though drawing of the optic disk suffers from the disadvantage of being subjective in nature, this does offer a quick and inexpensive method of evaluation of the optic nerve head in patients with glaucoma during follow-up. In addition, photographs may not be possible in all cases such as patients with rigid miotic pupils and those with significant media opacities. However, wherever possible, photographs are an indispensable adjunct to clinical evaluation.
Fig. 8.2: Disk margin (black arrow) and cup margin (white arrow)
B Figs 8.3A and B: Vertical disk diameter and horizontal disk diameter
117
Fig. 8.5: Measurement of disk diameter with slitlamp biomicroscopy with use of noncontact lenses
B Figs 8.4A and B: Cup-disk ratio in relation to optic disk size. A Optic disk is small with small cup and still has inferior notch (white arrow) with nerve fiber layer defect (black arrows) B Cup-disk ratio in a large disk
glaucomatous damage is that it is difficult to decide if the cup is physiological in a large disk or pathological in a small or normal-sized disk. In a recent study by Garway-Heath et al, vertical cup-disk diameter ratio corrected for the optic disk size was the best variable to separate between normal subjects and patients of ocular hypertension with retinal nerve fiber layer defect.15 Therefore, in the clinical description of the optic nerve head, it is important to state the vertical cup-disk diameter ratio in combination with the estimated disk size. The disk diameter can be easily measured by adjusting the slit-lamp beam height to the edges of the disk while viewing
the disk with a 60D lens (Fig. 8.5).16 The measurement by this method is roughly equal to the measurement obtained by the planimetry of disk photographs by Litmanns correction. Measurements can also be made with other lenses by multiplying the measured value with the appropriate magnification factor, Goldmann contact lens X1.26 and Volk superfield lens X1.5.16 It is important to differentiate contour cupping from color cupping. The margin of the cup should be determined by the bend of the small vessels
Fig. 8.6: Asymmetry of cupping in relation to asymmetry of disk size. The left optic disk is larger than right optic disk and has a larger optic cup
118
Fig. 8.7: HRT print out of the same optic disks shown in Fig. 8.6 showing asymmetry of optic disk cup in relation to disk area
across the disk rim and not by the central area of disk pallor.
Fig. 8.8: Shows ISNT rule, the inferior rim is the thickest followed by the superior, the nasal and then the temporal
must look carefully for any areas of thinning of the neuroretinal rim or for notching or in other words extension of the cup into the rim tissue. If the cup is especially deep in the notch, it is known as a pseudo-pit. Notching and pseudopits are usually seen at the superior or inferior poles. The width of the notch tends to correspond to the extent of the visual field defect (Figs 8.9A and B, and 8.10A and B). Optic rim pallor is another important indicator of glaucomatous disk
119
B Figs 8.9A and B: Relation between neuroretinal rim notch and visual field defect. The optic disk photograph shows inferior notch (black arrow) with corresponding superior arcuate field defect
120
B Figs 8.10A and B: Relation between inferior notch (here inferior notch is wider than the one seen in Fig. 8.9) and visual field defect. The optic disk photograph shows neuroretinal notch (black arrow) with corresponding superior arcuate field defect
121
Vascular Changes
Splinter hemorrhages on the optic disk are a common finding in glaucoma patients (Fig. 8.11). Various studies have shown that disk hemorrhages in association with localized nerve fiber layer defects and notches of the neuroretinal rim are more common among patients of normal tension glaucoma.18, 19 A possible explanation for the difference in frequency has been suggested by Jonas et al. They stated that the amount of blood leaking out of a vessel into the surrounding tissue depends on the intraocular pressure when the bleeding occurs.19 High transmural pressure gradient in normal pressure glaucoma leads to larger disk hemorrhages. Also, since the absorption rate of disk hemorrhages depends on the size of the disk bleed, the hemorrhages in patients of normal pressure glaucoma may take a longer time to disappear and thus have a higher chance to be detected than the disk
Configuration of Vessels
The retinal vessels on the optic nerve head can provide clues about the topography of the disk. Nasalization of the vessels and baring of circumlinear vessels can be seen in glaucoma as well as in other diseases of the optic nerve. Bayoneting of the vessels can be seen if the rim is absent or very thin. This causes the vessels to pass under the overhanging edge of the cup and then make a sharp bend as they cross the disk surface. This convoluted appearance of the vessels is called bayoneting.
Peripapillary Atrophy
The zone closer to the optic nerve head with retinal pigment epithelium (RPE) and choroidal atrophy and baring of sclera is called zone . The more peripheral zone with only RPE atrophy is called zone (Fig. 8.12). A highly significant correlation has been reported between the location of peripapillary atrophy and visual field defects.23 Sometimes, these changes may represent a congenital anomaly, especially in myopic eyes. However, appearance of these changes de novo or their presence in small, nonmyopic disks should be viewed with suspicion. Peripapillary atrophy may be focal or circumferential (Figs 8.13 and 8.14).
122
Fig. 8.12: Peripapillary atrophy. The diagram shows atrophic zone closer to the optic nerve head called zone and the more peripheral zone called zone
Fig. 8.13: Peripapillary atrophy: Localized in the temporal area of the disk
radially oriented striations. The small retinal blood vessels have a blurred and crosshatched appearance, as they lie buried in the nerve fiber layer. The best way to see the nerve fiber layer defect is through a dilated pupil with a stereoscopic lens, at the slit-lamp, using white or green light and a wide-slit beam. In the presence of nerve fiber layer atrophy, the small retinal blood vessels become more clearly visible and appear unusually sharp, clear and well focused (Fig. 8.15). The fundus in the affected area appears darker and deeper red in contrast to the silvery or opaque hue of the intact nerve fiber layer. Defects may be in the form of a wedge shape arising from the disk margin and widening towards the periphery, are pathological (Fig. 8.16), while slit-like defects narrower than the adjacent blood vessels may be physiological. Diffuse areas of atrophy are less common in early glaucoma and more difficult to identify.
123
Fig. 8.15: Retinal nerve fiber layer defect: Wedge-shaped RNFL defect can be seen between two black arrows. It is more easily marked in red free photograph
Fig. 8.17: Myopic disk with primary open-angle glaucoma Fig. 8.16: Retinal nerve fiber layer defect. Wedge-shaped RNFL defect reaching up to optic disk margin
carefully examine the disk to look for changes in the contour of the blood vessels, as well delineate the disk margin from the peripapillary changes (Fig. 8.17).
and it is, therefore, important to rule out these possibilities before making the diagnosis of glaucoma.
Physiological Cupping
Assessment of the size of the optic disk, careful examination of the neuroretinal rim and the retinal nerve fiber layer can help distinguish physiological cupping from glaucomatous damage in most cases.
Differential Diagnosis
In addition to glaucoma, other abnormalities can cause excavation and or pallor of the optic disk
124
Fig. 8.19: Optic disk photograph showing congenital optic disk pits
in about one-third. Involvement is usually unilateral in about 80% cases and the optic disk is larger on the involved side. Approximately 55-60% of the eyes have a field defect in the form of arcuate scotomas, paracentral scotoma, altitudinal defect, generalized constriction and nasal or temporal steps.24 In the absence of other indicators of congenital anomaly (like associated fundus coloboma, the differential diagnosis may be difficult and the absence of progression on follow-up may be the only indicator that the patient has a congenital anomaly and not glaucoma.
Fig. 8.18: Optic disk photograph showing characteristic morning glory syndrome
125
Fig. 8.20: Anterior ischemic optic neuropathy. The right-sided optic disk photograph is from patients with longstanding AION showing typical glaucomatous cupping
B Figs 8.21A and B: A Optic disk photograph showing significant cupping, but with out of proportion pallor. B Visual field defect showing a temporal hemianopia suggestive of pituitary tumor
126
Summary
In summary, the optic disk evaluation in glaucoma is best done stereoscopically at the slit- lamp with a dilated pupil using one of the 60D, 78D or 90D lenses. Changes in the neuroretinal rim, optic disk hemorrhages, peripapillary atrophy and nerve fiber layer defects are more important features than the cup-disk ratio. The cup-disk ratio is to be documented and interpreted along with the disk size and not in isolation. The diagnosis of glaucoma will depend on the presence of a visual field defect that correlates with the anatomic changes on the optic nerve head and the peripapillary retina.
References
1. Quigley HA. Number of people with glaucoma worldwide. Br J Ophthalmol 1996;80:389-93. 2. Dandona L, Dandona R, Srinivas M, et al. Openangle glaucoma in an urban population in southern India: the Andhra Pradesh Eye Disease Study. Ophthalmology 2000; 107(9): 170209. 3. Zangwill LM, Bowd C, Berry CC, Williams J, Blumenthal EZ, SanchezGoleans CA, Vasilie C, Wainreb RN. Discriminating between normal and glaucomatous eyes using the Heidelberg retina tomograph, GDx nerve fibre analyser and optical coherence tomograph. Arch Ophthalmol 2001;119:985-93.
127
16. 17.
18. 19.
128
Basic Perimetry
Visual field is a part of space, seen at any given moment. Changes in the visual field are produced by a number of disease conditions which can affect the visual system and often manifest through changes in the visual field. Hence, it is essential to determine the extent of the visual field for the diagnosis and management of these conditions. The visual field is usually perceived with both eyes. It is, however, measured separately for each eye. The normal visual field extends up to 50 degrees superiorly, 70 degrees inferiorly, 60 degrees nasally and 90 degrees temporally. After defining the visual field for each eye, the two can be compared with each other for asymmetry or compared to a normal reference test for any abnormality and be examined together to look for patterns suggestive of disease conditions. Perimetry is the science of measuring the peripheral vision (Peri= peripheral and -metry" = measurement). Perimetry involves placing the eye at the center of curvature of a hemispherical or arc-shaped instrument. The test objects have a constant angular size and are at a constant distance from the eye. The visual field has been compared to an island of vision in a sea of blindness by Traquair in 1930. This island of vision is a three dimensional structure. The
x and y co-ordinates represent the location of points on the visual field. At the fovea, the x and y co-ordinates are 0,0. The location of all points on the visual field are described along the x and y axis, with respect to fixation (Fig. 9.1). The blind spot is 15 degrees temporal to fixation. The z axis represents the height of the hill island of vision at a given co-ordinate (x,y) and corresponds to the retinal sensitivity at that point. Greater the sensitivity at a given point, greater is the height of the island
Fig. 9.1: A point on the island of vision is marked along the x and y axis
Basic Perimetry
of vision. Since sensitivity is maximum at the fovea, the height of the hill island of vision (z) is also maximum at the fovea. The retinal sensitivity drops to sea level 15 degrees temporal to fixation (blind spot). sensitivity (z) at each point (x,y). This technique of perimetry is called static perimetry because the test location is fixed, while the intensity of the test object of known size is varied, e.g. Tubinger, Octopus and Humphrey perimeters. Static perimetry provides a vertical slice through the hill island of vision. Because of the difficulty, inability and a potential for lack of reproducibility with kinetic perimetry, static perimetry is preferred for detecting and following subtle non-geographic defects in the diagnosis and follow-up of glaucoma patients. One can perform effective static perimetry with the tangent screen or the Goldmann perimeter. However, manual static perimetry is tedious, cumbersome and at times boring. Both the patient and the examiner find it difficult to concentrate for 30 to 90 minutes at a stretch. Automated /computerized perimetry presents targets at a random sequence undecipherable by the patient. It can test the same patient with the same methodology year after year and still does not get bored. Kinetic testing is difficult to computerize particularly with regard to the decisions regarding same speed and direction of presentation. A static test, on the other hand is relatively straight forward, since the target does not move, the machine has only to choose a site, target intensity and then record whether the patient responds, yes or no. Computers have revolutionized perimetry by allowing precise repetition and meticulous attention to detail, testing the patients response under optimal conditions repeatedly by allowing a binary yes/no answer from the patient. All this makes perimetry tailor made for computerization.
129
Types of Perimetry
Kinetic Perimetry
Perimetry aims to draw the map of the island of vision, such that it is a true representation for each eye and also aims to present it in a way which is clinically useful. Earlier methods defined the outer limits of the visual field by moving objects from the non-seeing area to the center. This technique of perimetry, called kinetic perimetry, it utilizes a moving object of a fixed size and intensity (e.g. Tangent screen or Goldmann perimeter) to define the boundary of the island of vision at a fixed height. This line representing the outer boundary for a given size of the test stimulus is called isopter. An isopter is synonymous to a horizontal slice through the hill island of vision. Manual kinetic perimetry allows large areas to be traversed in a fairly short order. One can move quickly over areas of little interest and spend relatively more time in examining critical regions. Equipment is inexpensive and durable. Since the perimetrist is constantly communicating with the patient, the patient is more comfortable. However, reproducible and reliable examinations require technical skill and early or subtle changes are more likely to be overlooked on manual kinetic perimetry. Isopters which are stylized representations of the visual field, making quantification and statistical analysis difficult.
Static Perimetry
The outer boundary of the island of vision can also be determined by measuring the retinal
Stimulus Presentation
During static visual field measurement the stimulus can be presented by projection or nonprojection. In the projection system a simple
130
Bracketing
Determining the threshold for each point in the field would require thousands of stimulii of varying intensity. However, the number of stimuli for threshold determination has been conveniently reduced by a testing algorithm which is also accurate. At a given point on the visual field, the patient responds to a given stimulus
Basic Perimetry
intensity (P1). The intensity of the stimulus is then decreased in steps of 4 dB till the stimulus is not seen (3). The threshold lies between 2 and 3. The intensity of the stimulus is then increased in steps of 2 dB till the patient is able to perceive the stimulus. Herein the threshold for the point is lying between 4 and 5, and is a more accurate assessment of the threshold value at that point. This technique of threshold determination is called 4-2 bracketing (Staircase technique). In the Octopus perimeter, the thresholding strategy continues, until a third reversal, in steps of 1 dB, called 4-2-1 algorithm (Fig. 9.3). Normal threshold values are dependant on the location of the point on the visual field and also the age of the patient. Fovea, the most sensitive point of the visual field corresponds to 0 degree of eccentricity. As the point moves from the fovea, the threshold value (sensitivity) decreases by 0.3 dB for every
131
132
Testing Strategy
With the inherent ability to vary the intensity of the light stimulus, static perimeters explore the visual field in three ways: 1. Suprathreshold screening. 2. Threshold related screening. 3. Full threshold determination. Suprathreshold screening: Very bright stimuli (suprathreshold) intense enough to be seen easily by most normal people are presented. The patient has simply to respond (yes / no) to the presence
Newer Strategies
Threshold determination at each point of the visual field is tedious and time consuming. Because by definition threshold is tested by the staircase algorithm, where every patient can see only half of the stimuli presented, newer techniques aim to make the procedure as short as possible, to ensure that the patient maintains concentration and thus provides better reliability. Swedish Interactive Thresholding Algorithm (SITA) is similarly based on the fact that a response at one location has implications at the point tested
Basic Perimetry
and also its neighboring points. Just as one tested point is normal, other points on the visual field are likely to be normal too. Tendency Oriented Perimetry (TOP) is available on the Octopus perimeter and takes advantage of each response of the patient five-fold. It tests and adjusts the location where the stimulus is presented and assesses the threshold of the four neighboring locations by interpolation. Several threshold tests are available on the two commonly available Octopus and Humphrey perimeters. In each test a certain number of points can be tested. The number of points tested in a given test is actually a compromise between the time applied and precision, which depends on the type of damage looked for as well as the diagnostic and therapeutic implications resulting therein. The response at each thresholded point is compared with a group of normal individuals. The likelihood of such a response in this population of normal patients is expressed as a probability symbol for each tested point. These probability symbols increase in significance from a set of 4 dots to a black box, p<5%, <2%, <1% and 0.5%. A black box indicates that few normal subjects will have that score; it does not necessarily correspond to an absolute defect. Many points with p<0.5% are relative defects; their actual threshold is available from the raw data. The 10-2 program tests 68 points 2 degrees apart in the central 10 degrees. This program helps to assess and follow-up fixation characteristics in patients with an advanced disease along with the macular test which examines 16 points in the central 5 degrees, each being 2 degrees apart. The efficiency and results of an examination are reflected by the location of the points tested. The two commonly used programs on the Octopus are the G1X and the G2 which test 59 locations in the central 30 degrees. Here the test points are concentrated in the central field, arcuate region and nasal midperiphery to maximize detection of significant changes. Fixation characteristics are assessed with the macular program M2X which tests 45 locations in the central 4 degrees, which are 0.7 degrees apart. Automated perimetry provides a large amount of data which is quantifiable, reproducible and amenable to statistical manipulation. However, the magnitude of the data makes interpretation complex, but a logical, consistent and sequential approach helps to make this less complex. The earliest injury in open-angle glaucoma is localized to the nerve fiber bundle, usually in the paracentral nasal region. The initial defect may be seen as a fluctuation in a cluster of points or as a relative defect with normal surroundings. This small area of increased scatter or threshold instability is often overlooked at the initial examination, since it does not meet the criteria for a valid visual field loss. Based on the other clinical data, a subtle area of unstable sensitivity may be suspected as being glaucomatous. It becomes more manifest when progression occurs and a serial review of fields shows that the area in question has changed with time. Progression of visual field defects occur in several ways increase in density of scotomas, expansion of areas of depression and the development of new ones. Uncontrolled glaucoma will eventually affect all areas of the field.
133
Test Programs
The standard programs on the Humphrey are the 30-2, 24-2, 10-2 and the macular grid program. In the 30-2 the central 30 degrees of the visual field are tested. It consists of 76 points 6 degrees apart on either side of the vertical and horizontal axes, such that the innermost points are three degrees from fixation. In the 24-2 program 54 points are examined. It is near similar to the 30-2 except the two peripheral nasal points at 30 degrees on either side of the horizontal axis are included while testing the central 24 degrees.
134
Statistical Analysis
The Statpac program introduced first in 1987 and then upgraded to Statpac Plus in 1988, was derived from a group of normal patients and helped answer the question: Are the field in question normal or not? It introduced the Global Indices along with the Single Field Printout,
Basic Perimetry
135
Fig. 9.5: The Humphrey single field printout is divided into eight zones. Each must be reviewed sequentially
136
Basic Perimetry
The Gray scale (Zone-3) is a rough indicator of the extent of field damage, but can be misleading. Each point on the gray scale is represented by a symbol of varying darkness which corresponds to the threshold level at that point. These are not indicative of disease. A normal elderly patient will have a darker gray scale than a younger patient because of reduced sensitivity in aging eyes. Additionally, there are a fewer points tested in the periphery, each of which occupies a larger space on the gray scale. For these reasons, the gray scale should not be the sole criterion for assessing the visual field. The Total deviation plot (Zone-4) is created by subtracting the actual raw data from the expected value for age matched controls, at each point. This depending on whether the patient did better or worse than expected is expressed as a positive or negative number. The corresponding probability symbols seen below the data indicate the statistical probability of finding such a point in normal subjects. These probability symbols increase in significance from a set of 4 dots to a black box, p<5%, <2%, <1% and 0.5%. The presence of a black box indicating that a few normal subjects will have that score, it does not necessarily correspond to an absolute defect. Many points with p<0.5% are relative defects their actual threshold is available from the raw data. The Pattern deviation plot (Zone-5) based on further calculations, is derived from the total deviation data and the overall depression of the visual field. It highlights focal changes which are concealed within diffuse changes, after making adjustment for the height of the hill of vision. Whereas the statistical significance, expressed as probability symbols, is measured for each point, the total deviation and pattern deviation probability maps are analyzed by taking the entire field into account and identifying how clusters of affected points occur, the number of points involved, their density and location. The Pattern and Total Deviation need to be compared and a difference if present should be explained. Corneal opacity, cataract and small pupil are the usual causes. Raw data / numeric data (Zone-6): It is the actual threshold score for each thresholded point. Areas flagged in the Pattern and Total Deviation plot should be inspected carefully for confirmatory signs like double thresholded points of abnormal or foci of high local fluctuation. This should be followed by a geographic survey of the entire numeric data. Global indices (Zone-7) are presented in the lower right hand corner of the printout and include: Mean deviation (MD): It is the weighted score of all the points on the total deviation plot. It takes into account both the severity of loss and amount of field affected. A positive MD indicates that the patient scored better than expected for his age, a negative number indicates that the score was worse than expected. Pattern standard deviation (PSD): It measures the extent to which the damaged points vary from the expected hill of vision (localized loss). Short term fluctuation (SF): Though listed under global indices it is a good indicator of intra test reliability. It measures the variation at each point on repeated thresholding in the same test. A SF from a patient with poor reliability scores is high, further indicating a poor test taker. Corrected pattern standard deviation (CPSD): It is calculated with the help of SF to adjust the PSD. It is a more accurate indicator of the extent of damage. Glaucoma Hemifield test (Zone-8) is a sophisticated analysis of 5 geometric point clusters in the superior and the inferior arcuate regions whose probability maps are compared with one another. It is very sensitive and specific at detecting asymmetry between these regions as well as symmetric deviations from normal data. The GHT can be within normal limits,
137
138
outside normal limits, borderline sensitivity, generalized reduction or abnormally high sensitivity (Fig. 9.6).
Basic Perimetry
139
Fig. 9.7: Octopus 1-2-3 seven in one printout like the Humphrey single field has eight zones which need to be viewed systematically
140
Basic Perimetry
numeric data, the global indices (visual field indices on the Octopus printout) are analyzed next, with the mean deviation (mean defect on the Octopus printout) being an indicator of the overall depression of the field. The pattern standard deviation (loss variance) or corrected pattern standard deviation (corrected loss variance) is considered significant when a score of p < 5% is noted. The short term fluctuation is analyzed as a part of the reliability indices and with the total and pattern deviation symbols. The glaucoma hemifield test is analyzed at the end, a reading outside normal limits is significant. The interpretation should also include allowance for artifacts such as drooping lid, prominent brow, or improper positioning of the patient/trial lens. Other mimics of glaucomatous field loss include retinal and neurological disorders along with disorders affecting the clarity of the ocular media. These need to be ruled out by a detailed ocular examination. The minimum criteria for the diagnosis of glaucoma are listed in Table 9.1.
TABLE 9.1: MINIMUM CRITERIA FOR DIAGNOSIS OF GLAUCOMA 1. Three or more non-edge points in the pattern deviation plot with sensitivity reduce to level of p < 5% or worse, with at least one point <1% 2. Glaucoma hemifield test is outside normal limits. 3 Corrected pattern standard deviation p <5% Criteria should be fulfilled on at least two occasions
141
While assessing single field printout, the presence of miotic pupil and media opacities should be taken into consideration because they can cause generalized depression of visual field. The interpretation should also include allowance for artifacts such as position of the patient, correcting lens (Fig. 9.12), drooping of the lid and prominent brow. It is not rare to find that visual field changes in neurological disorders (Fig. 9.13) may mimic the glaucomatous field defects. The visual field examination is a useful tool to study the course of an eye disease as well as to monitor the therapy. Periodic visual field testing is usually recommended for all glaucoma patients especially with a view to evaluate the desired target intraocular pressure. In spite of good control of the pressure, the patients visual fields may show deterioration on follow-up (Fig. 9.14) while in some patients the fields remain stationary (Fig. 9.15). Assessment of progression is difficult because of the long-term fluctuations. One needs to repeat the field test when in doubt. In clinical practice the recent fields are compared with the earlier baseline fields to judge the progression.
Conclusion
In conclusion automated perimetry is an extremely useful tool which has also become the standard technique for evaluating the visual field in patients with glaucoma or glaucoma suspects. Interpretation of the results is difficult and requires experience in addition to a detailed understanding of the underlying principles of automatic static perimetry and the applied statistical analysis. A word of caution is necessary. Automated perimetry should never be used in isolation. Treatment of patients requires combining the results of automated perimetry with an
Non-characteristic visual field defects (Figs 9.8 to 9.11) must be substantiated by clinical examination of the retina and optic nerve head. The first visual field test in an inexperienced patient should be taken with caution. After first test the patient becomes more proficient; the resulting improvement in the visual field is known as learning curve. It is, therefore, desirable to test two or more visual fields before proper interpretation. To be clinically significant, the visual field should be reproducible.
142
Fig. 9.8: Humphrey single field 24-2 SITA standard test of the left eye of a 53 year old patient. Reliability factors have been expressed as a percentage. The visual field is markedly depressed in the inferior hemisphere on the gray scale and total deviation plot. Andersons criteria are fulfilled. The height of the hill island of vision represented by the mean deviation is significantly reduced. Clinical correlation with the amount of optic disk cupping is necessary to determine the cause of such a defect
Basic Perimetry
143
Fig. 9.9: Humphrey single field 30-2 full threshold test of the left eye of a 64 year old patient. High false positives are bracketed. The gray scale and the total deviation plot show a marked depression of the visual field. However, only a cluster of points on the pattern deviation plot (p<2%) in the central 10 degrees are seen. No probability symbols are seen alongside the CPSD and the Glaucoma Hemifield test is showing a borderline/generalized reduction in sensitivity
144
Fig. 9.10: Octopus 1-2-3 seven in one single field printout of the left eye of a 61 year old male patient showing an early inferonasal step. There are a number of adjacent points in the inferonasal quadrant on the corrected probability plot, depressed to 5%, one of which is depressed to less than 1%. The left part of Bebies curve shows a localized depression. The corrected loss variance is 8.4. This field needs to be correlated clinically
Basic Perimetry
145
Fig. 9.11: Octopus 1-2-3 seven in one single field printout of the left eye of a 61 years old male patient to assess fixation characteristics. Here the catch trials are suggestive of poor reliability. The gray scale and comparisons are suggestive of depression of the inferior part of the 10 degrees being tested. Within the central 4 degrees of this program, each point is 0.7 degrees apart. This helps to assess fixation characteristics better. One of the four fixation points is depressed p < 2%. The Bebies curve is initially suggestive of normal points corresponding to the superior part of the field. A sudden drop in Bebies curve is due to the cluster of depressed points in the inferior part of the field. The CLV is also significant. This field is suggestive of extensive damage in the inferior hemisphere which is threatening fixation and needs to be correlated clinically
146
Fig. 9.12: Humphrey single field 24-2 full threshold test of the left eye of a 52 years old patient. A ring scotoma on the gray scale and the pattern deviation plot is evident. Andersons criteria are also fulfilled. Such visual field loss could be due to glaucoma or retinitis pigmentosa. However, the fundus findings were normal and on repeating the field test (with proper positioning of the lens) the changes in the pattern deviation plot disappeared (Lens rim artifact)
Basic Perimetry
147
Fig. 9.13: Humphrey single field 30-2 full threshold test of the right eye of a 59 years old patient. The gray scale and the total deviation plot show a depression of the visual field. Here the gray scale shows a marked temporal depression as is evidenced on the pattern deviation plot. Such defects which respect the vertical meridian are neurological in origin. In this patient the other eye also showed a temporal hemianopia
148
Fig. 9.14: Change probability analysis showing deterioration in fields over a period of time
Basic Perimetry
149
150
Bibliography
1. Caprioli J. Automated perimetry in glaucoma. Am J Ophthalmol 1991;111:235. 2. Fankhauser F. Problems related to the design of automatic perimeters. Documenta Ophthalmologica 1979;47(1):89. 3. Flammer J. The concept of visual field indices. Graefes Arch Clin Exp Ophthalmol 1986;224:389.
Ophthalmoscopy
151
10
Ophthalmoscopy
A comprehensive eye examination is a must for a complete assessment of the anterior and posterior segments of the eyebe it a diagnostic or preoperative evaluation. Although there are several methods of eye examination viz slit-lamp biomicroscopy, gonioscopy, perimetry, tonometry, ultrasonography, ophthalmoscopy remains an important tool for a complete evaluation of the posterior segment of the eye. In December 1850, Helmholtz announced the invention of an eyemirror, which was the original ophthalmoscope. It was mounted with a holder for one lens, and lenses had to be changed constantly for eyes of different refraction. Rekoss introduced a revolving disk carrying a series of lenses.
overlap. In the emmetropic eye this can happen only if the light source and the observers pupil are optically aligned. Under normal conditions this does not happen, hence the pupil normally appears dark (Fig. 10.2).
Principles of Ophthalmoscopy
The basic principle of ophthalmoscopy is shown in Figure 10.1. If the patients eye is emmetropic, light rays emanating from a point in the fundus emerge as a parallel beam. If this beam enters the pupil of an emmetropic observer the rays are focused on the retina and an image is formed. This is called direct ophthalmoscopy. The fundus can be seen only when the observed and the illuminated areas of the fundus
Fig. 10.2: The light source and the observers pupil are not optically aligned
The illuminating and the observing beams are aligned using a semi-reflecting mirror or a prism allowing fundal view (Fig. 10. 3).
Indirect Ophthalmoscopy
Ruete introduced indirect ophthalmoscopy in 1852. There are several types of indirect
152
ophthalmoscopes are available. One must understand optical principles of indirect ophthalmoscopy to carry an ocular examination (including fundus angioscopy). The indirect ophthalmoscope can be used in the treatment of disorders of the posterior segment.
Noncontact lenses: They are plus powered with two convex aspheric surfaces. The +60D version has the greatest magnification and is best used for the disk and macula. The +78D version is a commonly used diagnostic lens and the +90D is good for small pupils. They are available in clear or blue-free, yellow retina protector glass. They are comfortable to the patient and minimize the risk of phototoxic retinal damage due to prolonged exposure to the focused beam. Contact lenses: Goldman, Mainster, SuperQuad, Equator Plus, Area centralis, Super Macula lenses are often used. Field of view and image magnification obtained by these lenses are listed in Table 10.1.
Method of Examination
For examination, minimal slit-lamp intensity can be used in a dark room. Always focus the oculars to accommodate any examiner refractive error, then set the pupillary distance, remove all filters
There are five indirect ophthalmoscopy techniques. These are, slit-lamp indirect, head mounted indirect, monocular indirect, modified monocular indirect and penlight ophthalmo-
TABLE 10.1: FIELD OF VIEW AND IMAGE MAGNIFICATION OBTAINED BY DIFFERENT CONTACT LENSES Lens Super Quad 160 Equator Plus Quad Pediatric QuadrAspheric PDT Laser Trans Equator Area Centralis Super Macula 2.2 mag: magnification Field of view 160/165 114/137 100/120 120/144 115/137 110/132 70/84 60/78 Image mag. .5x .44x .55x .51x .67x .7x 1.06x 1.49x Laser spot 2.0x 2.27x 1.82x 1.97x 1.5x 1.44x .94x .67x Working distance contact contact contact contact contact contact contact contact
Ophthalmoscopy
and keep the magnification to the lowest setting, usually X6-X10. The illumination of the slit-lamp should be adjusted for an intermediate slit height and a 2 mm width, and then placed in the straight ahead position between the oculars (zero degrees or co-axial). Before examination, ensure that the condensing lens surfaces are clean. Hold the lens vertically between the thumb and index finger of the left hand to examine the patients right eye and vice versa.
153
Examination Procedure
Instruct the patient to fixate straight ahead, to stare wide and to blink normally. Center the beam in the patients pupil and focus on the cornea. Now the lens is placed in front of the patients eye, directly in front of the cornea so the back surface just clears the lashes. Examiners fingers may be placed on either the brow bar or the patients forehead. Using the joystick, focus on the fundus image by slowly moving away from the cornea, keeping the beam centered in the pupil. Once the retinal image is focused, the magnification may be increased. Scan across the entire lens keeping it steady. In order to view the peripheral retina, ask the patient to change fixation into the nine cardinal positions of gaze. The lens is realigned and refocused the slit-lamp as necessary. To reduce interfering reflections, tilt the lens or move the illumination arm upto 10 degrees on either side, once the fundus has been focused. For fine tuning of the fundus view, lateral and longitudinal adjustments of the lens may be made to optimize the field of view. When viewing finer fundus details, intensity and magnification of slit-lamp should be increased.
fundus. It provides for stereoscopic, wide-angled, high-resolution views of the entire fundus and overlying vitreous. Its optical principles and illumination options allow for visualization of the fundus regardless of high ametropia or hazy ocular media. Light beams directed into the patients eye produce reflected observation beams from the retina. These beams are focused to a viewable, aerial image following placement of a high pluspowered condensing lens at its focal distance in front of the patients eye. The resultant image is real, inverted, magnified, laterally reversed, and located between the examiner and the condensing lens. The observer views this image through the oculars of the head-borne indirect ophthalmoscope. An indirect ophthalmoscope (Fig. 10.6) consists of a head band for comfortable placement, light source with variable illumination and an adjustable mirrored surface in the main housing and knobs to align the low plus powered eyepieces (+2.00 to +2.50 D) with the examiners interpupillary distance. A 20 D condensing lens (Fig. 10.7A), a pair of scleral depressors (Fig.
154
10.7B) and fundus drawing sheet (Fig. 10.7C) are needed for a proper indirect ophthalmoscopy and documentation.
Examination Procedure
Proper placement and adjustment of the binocular indirect ophthalmoscope (BIO) is an important step in the examination. Place the loose BIO onto the head and position the bottom of the front headband one index finger width above the eyebrows. Tighten the crown strap until this headband position begins to stabilize then
Figs 10.7A to C: A 20 D condensing lens, B A pair of scleral depressors and C Fundus drawing sheet
Ophthalmoscopy
dominant hand and the scleral depressor with the dominant hand. The extended third finger acts as the pivot. The more convex surface should be toward the observer and the white-ringed edge closest to the patient so as to avoid bothersome light reflexes. These reflexes can be made to move in opposite direction from each other by slightly tilting the lens. Condensing lenses have their surfaces coated to reduce such reflexes. The lens must be smudge free. The patient should have atleast some idea of what to expect in the examination. Although the patient may be examined in either sitting or supine position, it is best to recline the patient on a couch with the face directed towards the ceiling to avoid stooping. The couch or table should be just high enough to reach the examiners hips. The examiner stands opposite to the clock hour position to be examined. The patient is instructed to keep both the eyes open and fixate towards his outstretched hand which points to the meridian of interest. From a working distance of 18 to 20 inches, direct the light beam into the pupil, producing a complete red pupillary reflex. Pull backward on the lens, maintaining the central position of the pupil reflex, until the entire lens fills with the fundus image. Fine adjustments are made in the lens tilt and vertex distance to produce a distortion-free full lens view. The patient must be repeatedly urged to open the fellow eye. Good cycloplegia is the most important single factor in getting co-operation in this regard. The eye with inadequate cycloplegia is very photophobic. All the vital elements involved in the visualization of the fundus, namely observers macula, the eyepiece of the ophthalmoscope, center of the condensing lens, patients pupil and the object observed in the fundus must be kept on an axis to maintain the fundal view. In order to develop and achieve a continuous sweeping picture of the fundus, a major retinal blood vessel must be picked out from the posterior pole and followed as anteriorly as possible by the observers movements alone. This vessel should be then followed back to the optic disk. This maneuver needs constant practice to master it. The problem of orientation in the fundus may be solved by learning to accurately draw the image exactly as we see in the condensing lens. The drawing chart may be placed inverted over the patients chest. Positioning 180 degrees away from the area of interest, the observer must think in terms of anterior in the fundus or posterior in the fundus (or central and peripheral). Draw the image seen in the lens on that part of the fundus chart that is closest to the observer. Since 30% of the retina lies anterior to the equator, failure to study this region will result in overlooking serious pathology in many cases. Scleral depression not only allows for an easy and complete view of the ora serrata and the pars plana but also allows a better evaluation of the retinal topography making lesions such as horseshoe tears or vitreo-retinal traction more visible. It is of particular value in differentiating a retinal hemorrhage from a retinal break, in recognizing a raised from a depressed lesion and in detecting whether a foreign body lies on or anterior to the retina. The absence of an overhanging orbital margin superonasally makes initial attempts at scleral depression easier. The depressor is applied to the superior lid, without pressure, at the tarsal margin. The patient looks up and the depressor slides posteriorly parallel to the surface of the globe, as the lid retracts. The depressor is gently pressed against the globe at the equatorial region and a grayish mound is seen to come up in view from the inferior part of the fundus. In viewing the ora, it is sometimes necessary to tilt the condensing lens somewhat forward, into a plane more nearly parallel to the iris. It must be remembered that scleral depression is a dynamic technique.
155
156
Ophthalmoscopy
Outline Chorioretinal atrophy beneath detached retina Posterior staphyloma Edge of buckle beneath detached retina. Color Code Yellow Solid Intraretinal edema Intraretinal or subretinal hard yellow exudates Deposits in retinal pigment epithelium Detached macula in some retinal separations Retinal edema as a result of photocoagulation, cryothreapy or diathermy Long and short posterior ciliary nerves Retinoblastoma. Stippled or dotted Drusen Color Code Black Solid Pigment within the detached retina (lattice, flap of horse-shoe tear, paravascular pigmentation) Pigment in choroid or pigmented epithelial hyperpigmentation in areas of attached retina Pigmented demarcation lines at the attached margin of detached retina or within detached retina Hyperpigmentation as a result of previous treatment with cryothreapy, photocoagulation or diathermy Completely sheathed retinal vessels. Outline Partially sheathed vessels (lattices, retinoschisis) Edge of buckle beneath attached retina Long posterior ciliary nerves and vessels (Pigmented) Short posterior ciliary nerves and vessels Chorioretinal atrophy.
Fig. 10.8: Showing a long-standing, partial, rhegmatogenous retinal detachment with demarcation lines and intraretinal macrocyst. A horse-shoe tear, lattice degeneration and a retinal dialysis are also seen. An improperly placed scleral buckle effect is made out. Pars plana is detached nasally. Retinoschisis with inner layer hole is seen in inferotemporal periphery. Pars plana cysts are seen inferiorly
157
158
ophthalmoscopy). By collecting and redirecting peripheral fundus-reflected illumination rays, which cannot be accomplished with the direct ophthalmoscope. The indirect ophthalmoscope (Fig. 10.10) extends the observers field of view approximately four to five times. An internal lens system then reinverts the initially inverted image to a real erect one (Fig. 10.11), which is then magnified. This image is focusable using the focusing lever/eyepiece lever. It gives a field of view of approximately 30 degrees, yet it is important that the patient looks in 6 to 8 different directions to see as much of the fundus as possible. The optical system of the monocular indirect ophthalmoscope (MIO) has a lens which erects the image and allows seeing things as they actually appear anatomically. It also gives a greater working distance from the patient of 5 to 6 inches. The MIO has a yellow filter that allows one to see deeper details of the retina at about the level of the choroid. The cost of the MIO is nearly equal to that of a good binocular indirect ophthalmoscope and of course it does not allow a stereoscopic view of the retina.
Ophthalmoscopy
159
Examination Procedure
To examine the right eye, remove the patients spectacle correction, stand to the patients right side, and ask him to fixate straight ahead and level with the left eye. The observer should wear his refractive correction. The iris diaphragm lever is pushed fully to the left to maximally increase the aperture size. Center the red dot on the filter dial to open the aperture for normal viewing. The observer's head should be against the forehead rest and align the eye through the instrument with the patients right eye. Then position several inches in front of the patient and focus through the pupil onto the fundus using the thumb and focusing lever. Adjust the focus and iris diaphragm to produce a clear maximally illuminated fundus view. Continue to approach the patient until the observers knuckle lightly touches the patients cheek, as the working distance decreases, fundus magnification increases. Angle the light slightly nasally to illuminate and visualize the optic disk.
160
Penlight Ophthalmoscopy
This is a very old, basically a bedside technique that originally utilized a penlight and a high plus lens. The patient must be dilated to get as much binocularity as possible and large field of view. The ophthalmoscope is held just below the eyes and its light directed into the patients eye. The patients eye is viewed from over the top of the ophthalmoscope while a 20 D lens is placed approximately 3-4 cm from the patients eye. The light leaving the condensing lens must come to focus within the pupil allowing the fullest field of view of the retina, approximately 30 degrees. The image is inverted and laterally reversed and located between the ophthalmoscope and the condensing lens. The degree of stereopsis depends on how fully the pupil is dilated and ones ability to converge and accommodate on the image. It gives a larger field of view than a MIO though less magnification. This is an alternative method to examine small infants. Should the bulb burn out in a BIO one has an alternative means to get a good view of the peripheral fundus? Do not put hands on the patients shoulder or head. Instead, use the back of the chair to steady yourself.
Examination Procedure
To begin the examination a red reflex is visualized through the direct ophthalmoscope held approximately 18 cm from the patients eye. A 20 D lens is then placed 3 to 5 cm in front of the patients eye in the path of the ophthalmoscope light beam, the examiner then needs to move slightly toward or away from the patient until a clear image of the retina is observed. An inverted, aerial image of the retina is produced, located between the observer and the lens. The apparent magnification will gradually increase as the examiner moves closer to this image (i.e. closer to the patient), allowing more detailed examination. Moving closer to the image obtains a magnification of X4 to X5. As the examiner moves closer additional lenses in the ophthalmoscope are needed, to keep the image clear depending on the accommodative needs of the examiner. A viewing distance of approximately 18 cm from the patient is optimal, providing suitable magnification and a wide field of view A disadvantage of the technique, as with conventional direct ophthalmoscopy is the lack of a true stereoscopic view, however, lateral movement and rotation of the direct ophthalmo-
Direct Ophthalmoscopy
Direct ophthalmoscope (Fig. 10.12) is most commonly used instrument in ophthalmic practice. The ophthalmologist must familiarize oneself with the use of the direct ophthalmoscope in an appropriate manner. Before being able to recognize the abnormalities in fundus, one must know what normal looks like. It is advisable to examine as many of your colleagues as possible both inside and outside clinic hours. Good observational and recording skills can be developed with practice.
Ophthalmoscopy
Using a large diameter aperture, examine the external features of the eye including pupils. With a +1 or +2 D lens in the ophthalmoscope, view the pupils at a distance of 40 to 66 cms from the patient. Look for media opacities. To find the location of the opacity, note movement of the opacity with relation to the movement of the ophthalmoscope, using the pupillary plane as a reference point. If the opacity moves in the same direction as the ophthalmoscope, the opacity is located behind the iris. If the opacity moves in the opposite direction to the ophthalmoscope, the opacity is located in front of the iris. Using the ophthalmoscope as a light source, which is held tangential to the iris one looks for any shadow that appears on the nasal side. If the nasal irido-corneal angle has no shadow, it denotes a wide-open angle. However, as this shadow increases in width relative to the overall cornea size, the angle seems narrow. Dial up +10 DSph lens in the lens wheel and observe the eye from a distance of 10 cm. Study the red reflex to detect any media opacity. The position of opacity can be inferred from its parallax with respect to the pupil. When the patient looks up and the opacity appears to move in the same direction within the red-reflex then it is located anterior to the pupil plane (i.e. in the cornea or in the anterior chamber). Opacity that remains stationary lies in the plane of the pupil but when it moves in the opposite direction to that of the patients gaze it lies posterior to the pupil plane (i.e. the posterior lens or vitreous). It may be easier to move yourself slightly from side to side rather than ask the patient to move his eye to achieve the same effect. During ophthalmoscopy it is advisable to keep both eyes open and suppress the image from the other eye. It may take some practice to accomplish this. It is better to move closer to the patient and gradually reduce the power of the lens in the wheel and focus on the crystalline lens, the vitreous and finally the fundus. The power of
161
Examination Procedure
Direct ophthalmoscopy is best carried out in a dark room with fully dilated pupils. One must be familiar with the color coding of the lens wheel and the various apertures and filters. Instruct the patient to look at a distant target (the white spot light on the vision chart) and to pretend to still see it even if obscured with your head. The patient may blink as required. Your left eye and left hand should be used to examine the patients left eye. The field of view of the fundus is increased when examiner goes closer to the patients eye. When patients with low myopes or low hyperopes are to be examined, it is better to remove their glasses. However, for myopes and hyperopes above 3.00 DSph and for astigmats above 2.50 DCyl, it is advisable to keep the glasses on in order to overcome problems associated with magnification, minification and distortion. The extra reflexes produced by the spectacle lenses will at first prove distracting but can be overcome with practice.
162
Examination Procedure
Patient co-operation can be enhanced by attention to his comfort and with the use of a fixation device. Once the illuminated slit is imaged in the patients pupil, the Hruby lens is introduced in front of the patients eye as close as possible without contacting the cornea or lashes. This mode of direct ophthalmoscopy can provide a very high level of magnification, even greater than that of the monocular hand held direct ophthalmoscope. The actual level of magnification depends on that available through the slit-lamp. Stereopsis is provided to a greater degree than all other examination techniques. The main disadvantage of this technique is the field of view. It is smaller than all other examination methods with the exception of direct monocular ophthalmoscopy (less than two disk diameters for an emmetropic patient). More dilation is required than in other binocular
Ophthalmoscopy
techniques. The quality of the image is easily degraded by media opacities; however, increasing the slit-lamp illumination can reduce this problem. As the magnification is so high, small movements of the observer, lens, or patient have an immediately noticeable effect on image quality.
163
Fig. 10.14: Wide-angle fundus photograph (Retcam) of a premature infant showing retinopathy of prematurity with a demarcation ridge clearly made out
Fig. 10.15: Fundus photograph (Retcam) of a premature infant showing retinopathy of prematurity with laser photocoagulation marks. Preretinal hemorrhage is seen beyond the superotemporal vascular arcade
is US FDA approved. It provides a 130 view for easy screening for retinopathy of prematurity (Figs 10.14 and 10.15), integrated image and patient management capabilities, comprehensive photodocumentation, fluorescein angiography and built-in software for reporting, storage and archiving.
Panoret
Fig. 10.13: Retcam viewing system
Panoret (Fig. 10.16) is a high resolution, wideangle retinal camera based on an innovative
164
Bibliography
1. Yanoff M, Duker JS, Augsburger JJ, et al (Eds). Ophthalmology (2nd edn). St. Louis, Mosby, 2004. 2. Benson WE, Regillo CD: Retinal detachment Diagnosis and Management (3rd edn). Lippincott-Raven, Philadelphia, 1998;75-99. 3. Regillo CD. Brown GC, Flynn Jr HW. Vitreoretinal DiseaseThe Essentials. Thieme, New York, 1999;41-49. 4. Schepens CL, Hartnett ME, Hirose T: Schepens Retinal Detachment and Allied Diseases (2nd edn). Butterworth-Heinemann, Boston, 2000;99129. 5. Rosenthal ML, Fradin S: The technique of binocular indirect ophthalmoscopy. Highlights of Ophthalmology 1967; 9:179-257. 6. Michels RG, Rice TA, Wilkinson CP. Retinal Detachment (2nd edn). Mosby, St. Louis, 1997; 347-70. 7. Havener WH, Gloekner S. Atlas of Diagnostic techniques and Treatment of Retinal Detachment. Mosby, St. Louis, 1997;1-51.
transscleral illumination concept using a fiber optic bundle, where no pupillary dilatation is necessary. Coverage angles are 50 and 100 with interchangeable front lens assembly. It is computer assisted in auto-light, auto-brightness and contrast control along with auto-disk storage.
Ophthalmic Photography
165
SADAO KANAGAMI
11
Ophthalmic Photography
Some of the ophthalmic photography and imaging equipments include the following in the long list of tools used in our field.
Among all types of medical photography, the speciality of ophthalmic photography is perhaps the most difficult to master as it requires in-depth knowledge of not only the ocular structures, and the disease process of the eye, but it also requires special photographic skills in regard to the equipment needed to record ocular pathology on silver base media or electronic medium. Captured ophthalmic images often have a direct influence not only on the diagnosis but also on the treatment choice as in the case of fundus fluorescein angiography (FFA) or indocyanine green angiography (ICGA). The responsibility of accurately capturing this information needed by the treating ophthalmologist becomes critical and weighs heavily on the shoulder of the ophthalmic photographerespecially with the advent of teleophthalmology where images may be captured hundreds of miles away from the treating ophthalmologist. The ophthalmic photography differs greatly from biological photography in general as the images captured by the ophthalmic photographer are part of the treatment decision process or utilized in the management of ophthalmic patients. Recent trends in ophthalmic photographic equipment include computerized equipment that further adds to the long list of specialized technique and changes in ophthalmic imaging.
35-mm Camera
A 35-mm camera with a motorized drive to automatically advance the film should be fitted with a long macro lens (135 mm to 150 mm or a medical lens such as the Nikon Medikor lens) in order to keep facial distortion to a minimum. This is very important especially when taking photographs in the speciality area of oculoplasty. A macro lens should be selected to include fields of one eye to full face; a second macro lens could include head/shoulder to full body (Fig. 11.1). The selected 35-mm camera should also be fitted
166
Fundus Camera
Mydriatic Fundus Camera
Conventional non-corneal contact mydriatic fundus camera (Fig. 11.2) can range between 20 and 60 degrees view of the ocular fundus. The ophthalmic photographer can choose the angle of view that will best reflect the needs of the photodocumentation, for example, in imaging the optic nerve for glaucoma one would use a view of 20 degrees, while in the case of a large melanotic choroidal tumor one would select a
Ophthalmic Photography
167
cameras have a very high sensitivity. The lower the LUX level of the color CCD camera, the faster the pupillary recovery time and thus, the faster the photographic procedure. There are many manufacturers of non-mydriatic fundus cameras some have the ability to capture angiographic images. When one uses mydriatic cameras in the mode of non-mydriatic, these cameras are usually confined for mid-phase only as a waiting period of at least one minute must be allowed to permit full pupillary recovery time. Nonmydriatic cameras can download their captured images to a computerized filing system. Often, non-mydriatic cameras (Fig. 11.3) are used to photograph diseases of the posterior segment of the eye. The camera is very small and light weighted, it can be easily taken outside of the clinic. Fundus images have been stored on a personal computer directly from the camera using USB cable and an exclusive software.
a retinal camera. ICGA examines the dynamic flow circulation of the choroidal vessels and adjunct structures (Fig. 11.4). Typically, a retinal camera that has been designed with special filters uses a black and white near-infrared CCD video camera (analog or digital) and records static megapixel images stored in a computer bank or dynamic images on videotapes as in the case of the scanning laser ophthalmoscope (SLO).
168
gonioscopy, topical anesthetic agent and a transparent gel such as Gogniosol should be used. A lens that has anti-reflection coating should be preferred. Use of gonioscopic lenses need special techniques, however, combined with the use of a video camera it makes it easier to preview the captured field as opposed to capturing on conventional 35-mm film and waiting for the film to be processed to evaluate the photographic technique. However, using video-captured image does not equal the quality of 35-mm film (resolution, hue, color, contrast) but most surgeons agree that the trade-off of immediacy in seeing the images is well worth than the quality of the 35-mm film. For publication a conventional 35-mm film can also be used in conjunction with the video images.
slit-adapter. It allows the user to take images on either 35-mm film, video or fully digital backs. Once the adapter is connected, it is possible to capture conventional anterior segment images including of gonioscopy (Fig. 11.7). For
Ophthalmic Photography
is to attach a camera directly to the operating microscope and have the operator take all images using one of the optical pathways of the microscope (right or left). Using this technique means that the photography port will be taken through a 70/30 type of prism and that the operator will have to look through only the optical pathway that is occupied by the camera. Using this technique will ensure the operator that what he/she sees is actually captured. Additionally, using this technique will give a good preview of the non-stereo image that is captured by the recording device since only one optical pathway is equipped with a recording device (usually the right optical pathway is best). It is critical that the microscope should be set for focusing the recording device and not the operators actual diopteric correction. If this is not done, captured images may not be sharp. The operator will also notice that the field viewed and the field photographed is not exactly the same area (usually the photographed field is smaller) but with practice and years of experience, very good results may be achieved. It is critical as in any other type of photography that the primary lens (lens close to the patients cornea) should be free of artifacts such as: dust, fingerprints, water stains, fluorescein stains. Attentive care should be given to the lens cleaning techniques to avoid possible damage to the costly lens. If this is not done, the quality and color of the captured images will be very low with color shift and low contrast images as well as poor optical resolution. specular illumination methods. This illumination can be achieved by using the illumination tower set at 45 degrees (incident light) from the apex of the cornea while observing the return light (reflected light) through the objective when the observation tower is set at 45 degrees from the opposite side of the illumination tower. Recent trends in specular microscopy are the use of noncontact specular microscope that causes little trauma to the patient and risk of cross contamination is less because no corneal applanation is required with the system. In Figure 11.8 one can easily compare the size and/or the arrangement of the endothelial cells. With innovative imaging technology the use of non-contact specular microscopy can be easily observed on large monitor obviating the use of prints or photography on silver highlight film base.
169
Specular Microscopy
Photography of the corneal endothelial cells can be easily performed using a slit-lamp photomicroscope and resulting images can be analyzed using a computer program. Typically, these images can show the borders of the cells that reflect the light towards the high magnification microscope lens when used in conjunction with
In the past, the role of the ophthalmic photographer was limited to the capturing of the endothelial cells of the cornea. Today, however, the role of the ophthalmic photographer has evolved to include the analysis of the corneal cells using a computer program (Fig. 11.9).
Imaging System
In 1990, the field of ophthalmic photography was introduced to electronic imaging technology. At first, only two companies in the United States
170
Advantages
Imaging system has following advantages: 1. Captured images are displayed on a monitor immediately, 2. Displayed images are large, so the patients who are dilated or have low vision can appreciate them, 3. Images may be reviewed by the treating ophthalmologist as they are being captured, 4. Prints can be produced immediately on thin paper so it is easy to put on a patients chart, and 5. Images may be stored in the computer data base system for easy review and follow-up.
were in the forefront of this newly introduced technologyKOWA VK-2 system (Fig. 11.10), Topcon ImageNet and Ophthalmic Imaging Systems (OIS). Soon thereafter, a flurry of imaging systems appeared mostly in PC base and mostly disappearing in a year or two. In the past ten years, this new technology has grown to be an
Disadvantages
Imaging system has following disadvantages: 1. The computer systems are quite expensive and technology changes rapidly making systems obsolete in one year, 2. Computer, large CRT screen and printer require additional space, 3. Operation of the computer and system software requires training and maintenance, and 4. Quality of image is not yet comparable with 35-mm film.
Ophthalmic Photography
Imaging systems in ophthalmology typically means that the conventional ophthalmic camera recording device such as the 35-mm or polaroid type back is replaced with a charged couple device (CCD) that may be either analog (video signal) or digital (higher resolution than video signal). These CCDs usually can add significantly to the cost of the fundus or slit-lamp camera especially if they are digital in nature. Digital CCD can be either a single chipped red, green and blue chipped or could be 3 chipped, one for each of the RGB wave lengths. The latter is far more expensive than the single chip but the color separation with the three-chip-CCD is superior. The area of sensitization of the CCD chip (usually varying from inch-to-inch) being much smaller than of the 35-mm surface (24 mm 36 mm) or of the polaroid sheet, the light (flash intensity) required to expose the light sensitive CCD is significantly less than that of traditional film base emulsion to expose the same area of the eye. Much like the film base emulsion, CCD comes in a variety of sensitivity calculated in LUX values. The lower the value in front of the LUX, the more sensitive (and usually more expensive) the CCD is. However, it can also be said that the more sensitive the CCD is, the more electronic noise (comparable to large grain when referring to film) can be produced (comparable to higher sensitivity film such as 1,600 or 3,200 ISO). More recently, ophthalmic manufacturers: have introduced non-mydriatic retinal cameras with purely digital recording devices. Non-mydriatic cameras are usually equipped with two CCD, one is a black and white infrared low resolution used for alignment of the patients retina (image is viewable on a small CRT screen located on the base of the non-mydriatic retinal camera), while the second is used to actually capture the color image of the retina through the naturally dilated pupil in a dimly lit room. One of the main advantages of the low light CCD chip used in the non-mydriatic camera is that retinal images can be captured sequentially without having to wait 4 to 5 minutes as with instant type photography (polaroid). The captured retinal images typically do not affect seriously the natural dilation of the pupil. Pupillary recovery is usually very fast as opposed to when using instant type film. Additionally, some non-mydriatic retinal cameras can capture ICG angiography since in some cases the infrared cameras used higher resolution.
171
172
proptosis, the best position is to capture the image from above the patients head using two macrotype electronic flashes set at 90 degrees from the patient. This technique will create the appropriate shadows that will help define areas of interest to the oculoplastic surgeon.
Photography of Pupil
In some cases of neuro-ophthalmology, it is important to document the pupillary changes of patients and to differences between the right and the left pupil (as both may dilate differently from each other under similar Lux conditions). The best way to record these differences is to use a black and white camera that is mounted on a tripod (for added steadiness) and have the patient place his chin in a chin-rest (also for added steadiness). The room is then darkened and about 5 minutes is needed to allow for each pupil to either dilate or constrict depending on the particular condition of the patient (at times a flash light, white light, may be used to provoke
Ophthalmic Photography
a specific pupillary reaction that is recorded on video). Analog iris recorders are available that use infrared CCD cameras in combination with an infrared illumination system that is not perceivable to the patient and where the patients pupil does not react. Images are then recorded as either a series of still images or as a string of segments (continuous video images) that are then transferred to a computer for numeric processing. Typically when performing these studies, no mydriatic agents are used unless otherwise indicated by the examiner. and lens, however, the reflexes will only partially disappear and the iris detail is made very dark.
173
External Photography
When taking photographs of the cornea and the lens, the choice instrument is a photo slit-lamp since it has the correct optical magnification and the appropriate flash to accomplish the task at hand. However, when a photo slit-lamp is not available, a 35-mm SLR camera with macro lens and electronic flash or even a fundus camera (using a plus diopter) may be used. External close-up photography of one eye for the purpose of documentation of ocular trauma or tumors can be taken with a macro type lens (usually a long lens) and a side macro flash (usually mounted on either side of the front of the macro lens) to avoid disturbing flash reflexes often found when using a ring flash type systems. Careful evaluation of where the flash reflex will fall is critical in obtaining useful photo-documentation. Many macro type electronic flashes have what is called a modeling light that is mounted directly next to the flash tube. These modeling lights will illuminate the field of interest and give a good idea of where the flash reflexes will show-up when the photograph is captured. Since the cornea and sclera are highly reflective surfaces, special attention needs to be given to the illumination technique. It is possible to limit these reflections by using polarizing filters on the flash
174
(as well as in some cases selecting a higher magnification lens) by focusing the retinal camera until the images becomes clear. Film type and flash exposure is the same as for regular fundus photography (Fig. 11.14). For taking fluorescein stain photography of the cornea or sclera, the retinal camera may be the most useful instrument since it already has both the exciter and barrier filter in place (Fig. 11.15). When performing iris angiography, again the retinal camera is best suited for this purpose not only due to the filters but also because these cameras are equipped
Fig. 11.16: Anterior segment fluorescein angiogram
with an internal timer that is critical for fluorescein studies requiring dynamic flow analysis (Fig. 11.16). Black and white films ISO 400 or instant type (polaroid or Fuji) film can be used and processed in a similar way as for retinal angiography.
Ophthalmic Photography
emitted through the objective of the camera lens is a ring-shaped image. The distance from this ring to the surface of objective lens is referred to as the working distance and is of great importance in taking good artifact-free fundus photographs. The actual position of this ringshaped light can be best observed by looking from the side of the fundus camera. To keep this relative position constant is one of the most important and basic points in fundus photography to insure good color saturation and artifact-free photography (Fig. 11.17). agent to achieve best possible pupillary dilation (optimally a pupillary dilation of over 8 mm is desirable). The objective lens should be clean and free from dust and smear. Any dust particles must be carefully removed with a manual blower while smear should be removed with lens cleaning paper. Check that the film is correctly loaded and flash intensity control is properly set according to the film sensitivity as well as the retinal pigmentation. Also adjust the eyepiece diopter scale to match the operators diopteric correction (Fig. 11.18). Adjust the height of the motorized camera table as well as the operators and patients stool so both may be as comfortable as possible in front of the fundus camera (Fig. 11.19).
175
176
Operational Procedures
The patient rests his/her chin on the chin rest and presses his/her forehead lightly against the forehead bar. Adjust the patients lateral canthus with the head rest of the fundus camera and align the patients eye with the illumination beam and optical pathway of the fundus camera. If necessary, adjust the optical table for optimal patient comfort. Looking through the viewfinder of the fundus camera, focus the camera until you obtain a sharp image of the posterior segment of the eye. Slightly adjust the joystick (left-right-forward and backward) to set the camera to a position in which the subjects eye is evenly illuminated. It should be free from flares and reflections. One should try to achieve maximum color saturation. Ask the patient to gaze at the fixation target until you have the desired area of the fundus in your viewfinder. It is important for operator to ask the patient to keep both eyes open throughout the entire photographic session. Also make certain that the eyelids as well as eyelashes should not obstruct the light passage. The light
Fig. 11.20: Beam pathway
beam should be projected entirely into the pupil to avoid artifacts to be recorded on the film (Fig. 11.20). If pictures are taken before the above conditions are fully satisfied, reflections and/ or artifacts will be produced and it will result in a lower picture quality and poor contrast. Once all these conditions have been fully satisfied, capture the image with a minimum delay, otherwise the patient may be tired and lose fixation and concentration. When the patient is asked to keep his eye open for over 30 seconds, the tear film starts breaking and cornea gets dry causing a low contrast photograph. It is important to always keep in mind that the patients comfort and well-being is critical in order to achieve good photo-documentation. Speak slowly and clearly explain the photographic procedure to the patient in order to lessen his or her anxiety.
177
490 nm), sodium fluorescein reflects a green fluorescence towards the film plane of the retinal camera. Before arriving to the film plane, that green fluorescence passes through a yellow barrier filter (referred as the barrier filter) that removes all unwanted blue light that may interfere with the true appearance of the fluorescence found at about 520 nm. These exciter filters (cobalt blue set at 490 nm) and the barrier filter (sharp cut-off filter set at 520 nm) must be matched perfectly in order to render true fluorescence images of the retinal vessels (Fig. 11.21).
178
2. Arterial and venous phase: This is the early phase of the angiogram study usually within 14 to 30 seconds after injection of sodium fluorescein (Fig. 11.22). 3. Mid-phase: When all retinal vessels have been filled (stained) with sodium fluorescein (from 30 seconds to 120 seconds). 4. Late phase: This is the last phase and varies in duration depending on the disease of the patient. In diabetic retinopathy, this phase may vary from 3 to 5 minutes, whereas in some ocular tumors, it may last as long as 15 to 20 minutes (Fig. 11.23).
The fluorescein angiography helps in understanding various retinal diseases and abnormalities. One needs to study carefully the retinal drawing of the patients chart and look for notes or direction from the retina specialist to understand the areas of interest and the main phase of the study (early, mid or late). It is critical to follow precisely the retina specialists notes to understand the diseased eye to be first studied (right or left eye). How soon the retina specialist needs to evaluate the results of the angiogram? Does the retina specialist need to treat the patient with laser immediately after the angiographic study? This is referred to as a STAT angiogram. A good practice is to carefully study the diseased retinal areas when performing color photography, usually done prior to an angiography. Once you understand the ocular disease, you can start the angiographic procedure with a good plan. Number of images in each phase, early, mid and late phases as well as area of interest, are dependant on a particular study. It is, however, important to get different results from what were initially anticipated. In fact, at times, angiographic pattern may be completely different from what was anticipated, a retinal vessel that was thought to be leaking may be intact and
Ophthalmic Photography
179
a normal one may be found leaking. Anticipating the unexpected findings comes with years of angiographic experience and a good set of standardized angiographic protocol.
may be very useful while documenting a patient with glaucoma to demonstrate nerve fiber dropout. A green filter (referred to as red-free) will cut out all red-light making those areas black (red is seen as black) creating a nice high contrast image of the posterior pole. Red filters will allow the longer wavelengths of the visible spectrum to penetrate deep into the ocular structures to reveal the choroidal vascular pattern (choroidal vessels appear as white while retinal vessels will appear as black Fig. 11.25) and a choroidal nevus or melanoma (Fig. 11.26). These photographs, in particular those taken with red-free light, are very suitable for printing use.
180
Different from fundus photography, photo slitlamp biomicroscopy is perhaps the most challenging type of photography in the field of ophthalmology. It requires a good understanding of the ocular structures; disease process as well as illumination techniques to illustrate the area of interest to the clinician. The illumination is of key importance. Since pathology varies greatly and may appear differently for each case, simple changes of slit-width, height angle of the illumination tower or even the use of diffuser, the same pathology may show itself quite differently in the final picture. It becomes essential to select most suitable lighting technique for each situation. This challenge is perhaps what gives the photographer greatest pleasure in taking pictures of best area of interest. In observing through the slit-lamp the reflections from the cornea and lens are not so offensive. However, same reflections may become disturbing and even harmful in hiding areas of interest when taking photographs. Adjust the illumination tower angle to avoid unwanted reflections. When using auxiliary light (often
referred to as fill light), it is necessary to pay attention to avoid the reflection that light may produce on the cornea. Carefully place the area of interest in the field to be photographed while making certain that you are using the best possible form of illumination. Use appropriate magnification to ensure that not only the area of interest is captured but you leave enough room to have a point of reference for follow-up photographic sessions (for example, in photographing an iris melanoma; use of medium magnification would allow for a portion of the iris to be seen for identification that the mass is located at 12, 3, 6 or 9 oclock and provides an idea about the size of the mass.
Bibliography
1. Fogla Rajesh, Rao KS. Ophthalmic photography using a digital camera. Indian J Ophthalmol 2003;51:69-72. 2. Kwan A. A simple slit-lamp digital photographic system. Eye News 2000;6:18-21. 3. Prasad S. Digital video in a surgical setting. J Cataract Refract Surg 2004;30:2302-03.
Fluorescein Angiography
181
R KIM, S MANOJ
12
Fluorescein Angiography
of the dye and its characteristics by slit-lamp biomicroscopy and ophthalmoscopy. Chao and Flocks provided the earliest description of fluorescein angiography in 1958. Finally, it was introduced into clinical use in 1961 by Novotny and Alvis, who demonstrated the photographic documentation of the fluorescein dynamics. Over the last 3 decades advances have occurred in this sphere, with the development of high quality photography equipment, photographic filters, newer printing techniques, stereophotography and digital imaging which has made possible the generation of high resolution angiography of the retina and choroid.
The study and diagnosis of retinal, macular and choroidal pathologic lesions have been greatly revolutionized with the advent of fundus fluorescein angiography (FFA). From an initial laboratory tool, it has now become a useful diagnostic tool that has aided the diagnosis and monitoring of the treatment of retinal vascular and macular diseases. Although the retina can be readily examined by direct and indirect ophthalmoscopy and slit-lamp biomicroscopy, the fluorescein angiography provides a valuable addition to these techniques. Over the last 40 years, it has been successfully utilized in many research studies, controlled clinical trials and national collaborative studies and its usefulness and popularity have increased. With the development of high quality retinal fundus cameras, digital imaging and photographic filters, high resolution angiography of the retina and choroid is now possible.
Basic Principles
The basic principle of FFA is based on the understanding of luminescence and fluorescence. Luminescence is the emission of light from any source other than high temperature. When light energy is absorbed into a luminescent material, a few electrons are elevated into a higher energy state. Spontaneous decay then occurs of these electrons into their lower energy states. When this decay occurs in the visible spectrum, it is called luminescence. Fluorescence is
History
The technique of using intravenous fluorescein to evaluate the ocular circulation was probably introduced 40 years ago by Mac Lean and Maumenee, who described the direct observation
182
Equipment
The traditional fluorescein angiography unit (Fig. 12.2) has two 35 mm cameras, one for color fundus photography while the other (black & white) for fluorescein angiography. Most fundus cameras take 30 photographs (magnification of X2.5 on a 35 mm film), which are adequate for a detailed study of posterior pole lesions especially macular diseases. Many camera units provide variable magnification at 20, 30 and 50 degrees. The 50 view is most useful for lesions involving a large area of the fundus. The flash unit and powerpack recharges rapidly enough
Fluorescein Angiography
to allow angiophotographs to be taken at 2 second intervals. The motor drive in most equipments advance the film automatically and the timer records the interval between the various phases of angiography and is vital especially in conditions when the arterial perfusion pressure is low. The equipment has 2 filters. The exciter filter transmits blue light at 465 490 nm, the absorption peak of fluorescein excitation. The barrier filter transmits light at 525 to 530 nm the emitted peak of fluorescein. appear black and on positive film or paper it is white. Usually a roll of 35 mm negative film used for FFA has 36 frames.1
183
Digital Angiography
Commercial digital angiography imaging systems have been available for over 15 years and continue to improve in quality each year. Although photographic film is still capable of capturing greater detail than current digital systems, digital imaging offers some distinct advantages over the more traditional film-based angiogram. Instant access to the electronic images increases efficiency and promotes better patient education by reviewing images on a monitor with the patient. Image enhancement and manipulation is easily achieved with imaging software. Lesions can be measured, or digital overlays used to identify changes in lesion size in serial photographs. Images can be stored on magnetic media like CD-ROMs and transmitted electronically to remote sites equipped with a computer for viewing. Digital systems also offer the additional advantage of shortening the learning curve for novice angiographers. Having instant feedback allows the angiographer to adjust exposure settings and camera alignment to correct any flaws in technique. Cutting edge microelectronics and optical designs of unmatched performance enable the present day digital cameras to take retinal images of exceptional resolution with stunning speed and simplicity. Digital imaging system like the IMAGE-net digital imaging system achieves faster, more efficient acquisition, storage, retrieval and analysis of images. These imaging systems also incorporate a full range of image enhancement programs (sharpness, color, contrast) that can be of great help in precisely evaluating difficult pathologies. For easy and precise photography, digital cameras are now provided
The most frequently used film for FFA is Kodak 400 ASA (black and white). Various developing solutions are available but the best developing time for a particular camera and power pack combination is variable. After the film is developed, the negatives can be counter printed into either film (transparency) or paper (print). On the negative, areas of flourescence
184
Fluorescein Solution
Solutions containing 500 mg of fluorescein are available in vials of 10 ml of 5% fluorescein or 5 ml of 10% fluorescein, 3 ml of 25% fluorescein solution (750 mg) is also available. With a greater volume the injection time increases, with a smaller volume, more fluorescein remains in the dead space between the arm and the heart. Therefore, 5 ml of 10% solution (500 mg) fluorescein is generally preferred. The venous dead space between the hand or the antecubital vein and the heart may be as much as 5 to 10 ml, leading to sluggish or reduced flow of fluorescein into the central circulation. The fluorescein can be flushed with
Fluorescein Angiography
Follow an angiography plan depending on the case. No standard and comprehensive plan is possible to evaluat e all the possible retinal vascular and macular diseases. However, the photographer should use his own judgment to follow a particular order in shooting the various quadrants during flourescein angiography. For example, in central serous retinopathy or choroidal neovascular membrane, it is important to take early films and posterior pole photography is sufficient. In macular disorders, concentrating on the posterior pole during angiography is often adequate. Diabetic and other vascular diseases, however, require a detailed fundus study where the first few photographs are taken of the posterior pole and then each peripheral quadrant is specially taken in a clock-wise fashion from the superior quadrant onwards. Photography of the peripheral retina demands patience, precision and skill due to problems in patients compliance, light reflexes and awkward camera placements. At the end, reassure the patient and explain the side effects namely discolored skin and urine. If the patient develops nausea or vomiting or signs of allergic response the procedure is stopped and necessary steps taken.1 important because the photographs are taken and positioned on the film so that the angiogram is read from right to left. Most of the modern cameras have a stereo lock, which can be activated to take stereophotographs. Specially made stereo viewers are available to read the stereo images.
185
Stereophotography
Stereophotography facilitates interpretation by allowing the images of both eyes to be viewed simultaneously in depth. It helps us in interpreting the condition under study with respect to its relationship to the various layers of the eye. Adequate stereophotographs can be achieved with a pupillary dilation of 4 mm although dilation of 6 mm or more is preferred. The first photograph is taken with the camera positioned as far to the photographers right of the pupils center. The second photograph of the pair is taken with the camera held as far to the photographers left of the pupils center. This order is extremely
Nausea
Nausea occurs in about 3-15% of patients and is the most frequent side effect. It is most likely to occur in patients under 50 years of age or when fluorescein is injected rapidly. It begins about 30 seconds after injection and lasts for 2 to 3 minutes and then disappears slowly.
Vomiting
Vomiting occurs in about 0-7% of patients nearly 40 to 50 seconds after injection. When patients experience nausea or vomiting, they should be reassured that the unpleasant and uncomfortable feeling will subside rapidly.
186
Pruritus
Pruritus or itching is one of the most frequent allergic reaction (1 in 82), usually occurring 2 to 15 minutes after the fluorescein injection. Oral or intravenous antihistamics are often beneficial.
Vasovagal Attacks
Vasovagal attack is caused more by patient anxiety than by the actual injection of fluorescein.
Anaphylaxis
Anaphylaxis to fluorescein may range from hives to laryngeal edema, bronchospasm or cardiovascular collapse. Hives may occur 2 to 15
Fluorescein Angiography
fluorescein leakage. Fluorescein freely permeates through the Bruchs membrane up to the RPE. The RPE blocks to a great degree the visualization of the choroidal fluorescence. The watershed zone refers to the vertical zone of slightly delayed filling choriocapillaris passing through the papillomacular region and/or the disk, which represents the border area between the two main posterior ciliary arteries. The choriocapillaris by virtue of its lobular arrangement has a patchy filling, gradually filling in a transverse fashion with one lobule spilling over into another. The foveal avascular zone (FAZ) represents the area of the macula devoid of any retinal capillaries and measures about 400-500 microns in diameter. Because most of the optic disk is fed by the ciliary system, fluorescein appears simultaneously at the optic nerve head and the choroid before it is apparent in the retinal arteries.
187
Phases
Fluorescein angiogram consists of five phases according to the appearance of dye in the retinal circulation. 1. The prearterial phase: The choroidal larger vessels and choriocapillaris begin to fill with dye. Fluorescein usually appears approximately one second before in the choroidal circulation as compared to the retinal circulation. Early choroidal fluorescence is faint, patchy and irregularly scattered throughout the posterior fundus. It is interspersed with scattered islands of delayed fluorescein filling. This early phase is referred to as the choroidal flush. When adjacent areas of choroidal filling and non-filling are quite distinct, the pattern is designated as patchy choroidal filling (Fig. 12.4). Within the next 10 seconds due to extreme choroidal fluorescence, the angiogram becomes very bright. The macula does not show choroidal fluorescence because of the taller, more pigmented pigment epithelium present in the fovea and, therefore, remains dark throughout the angiogram. If a cilioretinal artery is present, it fills at the same time as choroidal circulation and even
Fig. 12.4: Prearterial phase of angiogram showing presence of cilioretinal artery (arrow)
188
Fig.12.6: Early venous phase of the angiogram showing laminar flow of the dye
two parallel laminae along the wall of the retinal veins becomes thicker. At the junction of two veins, the inner lamina of each vein may merge. This creates three laminae, one in the center and one on either side of the veins. As fluorescein filling increases in the veins, the laminae eventually enlarge and meet, resulting in complete fluorescence of the retinal veins (Fig. 12.7)
Fig. 12.7: Venous phase of the angiogram showing both veins and arteries filled with dye Fig. 12.5: Arterial phase showing the dye filling the arteries, background choroidal fluorescence is also seen
Fluorescence of the disk emanates from the posterior ciliary vascular system, both from the
Fluorescein Angiography
edge of the disk and from the tissue between the center and circumference of the disk. Filling also comes from the capillaries of the central retinal artery on the surface of the disk. Because healthy disk contains many capillaries, the disk becomes fairly hyperfluorescent on the angiogram. The perifoveal capillary net cannot always be seen on the fluorescein angiogram. It can be best seen in young patients with clear ocular media about 20 to 25 seconds after a rapid fluorescein injection (Fig. 12.8). This is called the peak phase of the fluorescein angiogram. Loss of portions of the perifoveal capillary net is believed to be responsible for the decrease in visual acuity in patients with macular disease, diabetic maculopathy and other conditions. The perifoveal net is an important landmark when considering laser therapy. the region of the macula and longest in the more peripheral portions of the retina. Approximately 30 seconds after injection, the first high concentration flush of fluorescein begins to empty from the choroidal and retinal circulations. 5. Recirculation phase: During this phase fluorescein at a lower concentration continues to pass through the circulation of the fundus (Fig. 12.9). About 3 to 5 minutes after injection, the choroidal and retinal vasculature slowly empties the fluorescein and the vessels become gray. Vessels of most normal patients almost completely empty fluorescein in approximately 10 minutes.
189
Fig. 12.8: Peak phase of the angiogram showing the foveal avascular zone and the perifoveal vascular net in the patients with diabetic retinopathy and choroidal neovascularization in the macular area
Fig. 12.9: Recirculation phase of the angiogram showing decreased fluorescence in the retinal vessels
4. Transit phase: The aggregate of the arterial, arteriovenous and venous phases is commonly referred to as the transit phase of the angiogram. The transit phase represents the first complete passage of fluorescein in blood through the retina and choroid. At the end of the transit phase fluorescein remains in the choroid and sclera due to leakage from the choroidal vessels and choriocapillaris. The transit time is shortest in
The large choroidal vessels and retinal vessels do not leak fluorescein. The extravasated fluorescein from the choriocapillaris diffuses through the choroidal tissue, Bruchs membrane and sclera. Leakage of fluorescein with retention of the dye in tissues is designated as staining. In the later phase of the angiogram, staining of Bruchs membrane, choroid and especially sclera may be visible if the pigment epithelium is lightly pigmented. Fluorescein also leaks from the vessels of the ciliary body, so that in the venous and
190
Hypofluorescence
Hypofluorescence1,5 is an abnormally dark area on the positive print of an angiogram. There are two causes of hypofluorescence namely blocked fluorescence and vascular filling defect.
Hypofluorescence
Blocked fluorescence Vascular filling defect
Blocked Fluorescence
Blocked fluorescence1,5 is also called as masked, obscured or negative fluorescence or transmis-
Fluorescein Angiography
191
Figs 12.10A to C: A Fundus photograph shows a subhyaloid hemorrhage (black arrow), B Mid AV phase shows blocked retinal and choroidal fluorescence corresponding to the hemorrhage and an area of capillary non-perfusion (white arrow), C Late venous phase shows the persistence of capillary non-perfusion (white arrow) Note the disc hyperfluorescence has increased denoting a NVD
(Fig. 12.10). Nerve fiber layer hemorrhage, which is usually flame-shaped, blocks the smaller retinal vessels lying deeper in the retina but only partially blocks the larger retinal vessels in the nerve fiber layer.5 Blocked retinal fluorescence Anterior segment material Vitreous material Inner retinal material Blocked choroidal fluorescence Blocked choroidal fluorescence occurs when fluid, exudate, scar or hemorrhage lie deep to the retina and in front of the choroidal vasculature.
i. Deep retinal material Fluid, hard exudate, hemorrhage and pigment can block the choroidal fluorescence. Deposition of edema fluid usually occurs in the outer plexiform layer. When it reaches a certain volume it tends to form spaces between compressed nerve fibers and Mllers fibers causing cystoid retinal edema. Retinal edema blocks choroidal fluorescence in the early phase of the angiogram but later it fluoresces.1 ii. Subretinal material Blood under the retina will cause complete blockage of choroidal fluorescence with the retinal fluorescence showing normally. Subretinal hemorrhage has irregular margins
192
Figs 12.11A and B: Geographical helicoid pigment epitheliopathy (GHPC) resolved lesion with pigmentation. A Shows the scar tissue with pigmentation (black arrow), B Shows the late phase of the angiogram with hypofluorescence corresponding to the pigmentation and hyperfluorescence (staining) of the scar (black arrow)
(between photoreceptors and pigment epithelium) whereas sub-pigment epithelial hemorrhage is often round and well demarcated. Accumulated pigments (Fig. 12.11), like melanin from diseased retinal pigment epithelium can also cause blocked choroidal fluorescence.1 Blocked choroidal fluorescence Deep retinal material Subretinal material Sub-RPE material Choroidal material
angiogram the retinal arteries fill first, then the retinal capillary bed followed by the retinal veins, and, therefore, it is easy to differentiate arterial and venous occlusion. Also the blocked vessel can usually be traced in the angiogram.1 Vascular filling defects of the disk The capillaries on the disk may not fill due to congenital absence of disk tissue, atrophy of disk tissue and its vasculature, or because of vascular occlusion (Fig. 12.13). All these conditions show early hypofluorescence with late hyperfluorescence resulting from staining of the involved tissue. Choroidal vascular filling defect This is usually caused by obstruction of tissue and has the following characteristics: 1. Normal retinal vascular flow 2. Depigmentation of the pigment epithelium 3. Reduction of choroidal blood flow, and 4. Hypofluorescence in the early phases caused by loss of the normal ground glass choriocapillaris fluorescence. The most common form of choroidal vascular filling defect has been termed patchy choroidal filling. Areas adjacent to the foci that are filling show early hypofluorescence but eventually fill normally usually 2 to 5 seconds later.
Fluorescein Angiography
193
Figs 12.12A to C: A Fundus photograph of inferotemporal BRVO showing superficial hemorrhages (white arrow) and blocked vascular segment (black arrow), B,C Early and Mid AV phase of angiogram showing blocked fluorescence corresponding to the hemorrhage (white arrow) and area of capillary non-perfusion (black arrow) corresponding to the blocked vascular segment
Figs 12.13A and B: Anterior ischemic optic neuropathy. A Fundus photograph showing disk edema, B Late AV phase of the angiogram showing hypoperfused segment of the disk (black arrow)
194
Hyperfluorescence
They are abnormally white areas on the positive print of an angiogram. The common possible causes are: 1. Pre-injection fluorescence 2. Transmitted fluorescence 3. Abnormal vessels 4. Leakage
Figs 12.14A to C: A Optic nerve head drusen, B Autofluorescence of the drusen is seen in the pre-injection phase of the angiogram, C FFA shows normal optic nerve head
Fluorescein Angiography
195
Figs 12.15.A and B: Pigment epithelium defect (PED). A Fundus photograph showing PED (white arrow) and a foci of RPE atrophy (black arrow), B Late phase of the angiogram showing the corresponding well-defined hyperfluorescent lesions
light only. This light reflected off highly reflective surfaces passes through these mismatched filters and stimulates the film. Any light colored or white fundus structure like sclera, exudate, scar tissue, myelinated nerve fibers, foreign body can thus cause pseudofluorescence.
2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Anastomosis Neovascularization (Fig. 12.16) Aneurysms Telangiectatic vessels Tumor vessels. All these changes can be viewed in the early phases and usually appear as hyperfluorescence. Abnormal choroidal vessels It can occur with subretinal neovascularization and vessels within a choroidal tumor. In subretinal neovascularization early phases show a lacy, irregular and nodular hyperfluorescence. With a choroidal tumor it is also early vascular type fluorescence although it may increase in the later phases.4
Leak
The fluorescence of the retinal and choroidal vessels diminishes about 40 to 60 seconds after injection and empties almost completely about 15 minutes after injection. Any fluorescence that remains after the retinal and choroidal vessels have emptied is leakage. Certain forms of leakage occur in the normal eye. They are: 1. Fluorescence of the disk margins from the surrounding choriocapillaris
Abnormal Vessels
Abnormal retinal and disk vessels They can be divided into following categories: 1. Tortuosity and dilatation
196
Figs 12.16A to C: Proliferative diabetic retinopathy (PDR). A Fundus photograph showing NVD, B Late AV phase of the angiogram showing hyperfluorescence of the disk (black arrow), C Late venous phase showing increased disk hyperfluorescence (Leakblack arrow)
2. Fluorescence of the lamina cribrosa 3. Fluorescence of the sclera at the disk margin if the retinal pigment epithelium terminates away from the disk 4. Fluorescence of the sclera when the pigment epithelium is lightly pigmented.1 Vitreous leak Vitreous leak is caused by: 1. Neovascularization growing from the retinal vessels onto the surface of the retina or disk or vitreous cavity 2. Intraocular inflammation 3. Intraocular tumors. The vitreous leak due to neovascularization is usually localized and appears as a cotton ball type of fluorescence, and following inflammation,
the leak is usually generalized. If secondary to tumors it is most often localized over the tumor.1 Disk edema In the early phases, dilation of the capillaries on the optic nerve head may be seen and in the late phases, the dilated vessel leak resulting in fuzzy fluorescence of the disk margin. Retinal leak When the leakage is severe, the extracellular fluid may flow into cystic pockets and the angiogram shows fluorescence of the cystic spaces. Cystoid retinal edema is apparent as the fluorescein pools in small loculated pockets (Fig. 12.17). In the fovea it takes on a stellate appearance, elsewhere it has a honeycombed appearance. Fluorescent staining of non-cystoid
Fluorescein Angiography
197
Figs 12.17A and B: A A case of ruptured macroaneurysm with a ring of hard exudates and edema (white arrow), B FFA- late AV phase showing macroaneurysm (black arrow) and edema as a diffuse hyperfluorescence (white arrow)
Figs 12.18A and B: Central serous retinopathy. A Fundus photograph shows the serous collection involving the macula, B Late phase of the angiogram shows the site of leak, smoke stack appearance and pooling of the dye (white arrow)
edema is diffuse, irregular and not confined to well demarcate spaces. Sometimes the large retinal vessels can also leak. This is called perivascular staining and is seen in inflammation, traction and occlusion.1 Choroidal leak It can appear as pooling or staining. Pooling is leakage of fluorescein into a distinct anatomic space, staining is leakage of fluorescein diffused into tissue. There are specific differences between the fluorescent pooling patterns of sensory and pigment epithelial detachment. In a sensory
retinal detachment the pooling tends to fade away gradually toward the site where the sensory retina is attached (Fig. 12.18). In contrast in a pigment epithelial detachment the pooling extends to the edges making the entire detachment and its margins hyperfluorescent.3 Staining refers to leakage of fluorescein into a tissue or material. The most common form of staining occurs with drusen. Drusens hyperfluoresce early in the angiogram since choroidal fluorescence is transmitted through defects in the pigment epithelium overlying them. However,
198
Figs 12.19A and B: Disciform scar of Age-related macular degeneration (AMD). A Fundus photograph showing the macular scar with pigmentation (white arrow), B Late phase of the angiogram showing staining of the scar tissue (white arrow)
some of the drusens remain hyperfluorent even in the late phases of angiogram due to staining. Scars also demonstrate staining- hyperfluorescence (Fig. 12.19). Sclera usually exhibits late hyperfluorescent staining1.
collarette. In abnormal conditions such as rubeosis, leakage of fluorescein dye from the abnormal vessels is extensive. This leakage occurs early in the angiogram.2
Iris Neovascularization
In rubeosis iridis an abnormal growth of new blood vessels occurs on the surface of the iris. Only vessels on the anterior surface are clearly detected. However, if leakage of fluorescein dye from behind the iris is considerable, posterior surface vessels should be suspected. Abnormal new vessels have an irregular distribution across the iris surface, with a tendency to concentrate at the pupillary border and at the chamber angle. Normal iris vessels follow a fairly straight pattern from the iris root to the pupillary border. Some anastomotic connections exist between the vessels at the iris root and the vessels at the collarette. Leakage of fluorescein occurs from the abnormal vessels in the early phase of the angiogram.2
References
1. Ryan SJ, Schachat AP (Eds). Retina. St Louis, Mosby-Year Book Inc, 2001;875-942.
Fluorescein Angiography
2. Joseph WB, Robert WF, David HO, James SK. Fluorescein and indocyanine green angiography Technique and interpretation. American Academy of Ophthalmology, San Francisco, 1997. 3. Stein MR, Parker CW. Reactions following intravenous fluorescein. Am J Ophthalmol 1971; 72: 861-68. 4. Yannuzzi LA, Rohrer MA, Tindel LJ, et al. Fluorescein angiography complication survey. Ophthalmology 1986;93:611-17. 5. Rabb MF, Burton TC, Schatz H, Yannuzzi LA. Fluorescein angiography of the fundus: a systematic approach to interpretation. Surv Ophthalmol 1978;22:387-403. 6. Schatz H. Flow chart for the interpretation of fluorescein angiograms. Arch Ophthalmol 1978;10:625. 7. Schatz H. Essential fluorescein angiography A compendium of 100 classic cases. San Ansalmo, Pacific Medical Press, 1985.
199
200
VASUMATHY VEDANTHAM
13
Indocyanine green (ICG) angiography (ICGA) is fast emerging as a popular and useful adjunct to the traditional fundus fluorescein angiography (FFA) in the diagnosis of macular, choroidal and outer retinal disorders. This technique was introduced in ophthalmology in 1973 by Flower and Hochheimer.1 FDA approved the ophthalmic use of ICG dye in 1975. Yet, for the next twenty years the ICGA remained largely unpopular owing mainly to technical difficulties. With the advent of videoangiogram recordings and the recognition of its potential in delineating occult choroidal neovascular membranes, the clinical use of ICGA has increased tremendously.
Indocyanine Green
The indocyanine green (ICG) is a tricarbocyanine dye that comes packaged as a sterile lyophilized powder and is supplied with an aqueous solvent. It was first used in 1957 to measure cardiac output. It is an anhydrous 3,3,3,3-tetramethyl1,1-di-(4-sulfobutyl)-4,5,4,5-dibenzoindotricarbocyanine hydroxide sodium salt. Its empirical formula is C43H47N2O6S2Na. It contains less than 5% sodium iodide (in order to increase its solubility). It has a pH of 5.5 to 6.5 in the dissolved state, and also has limited stability, and hence must be used within 10 hours after reconstitution. Ninety eight percent of the injected dye is bound to plasma proteins, with
201
Adverse Reactions
The rate of mild, moderate and severe reactions to ICG dye is 0.15%, 0.2% and 0.05%, respectively.4 The reported death rate following ICGA is 1 in 333,333 (in contrast to 1 in 222,000 following FFA).5 Owing to its iodine content, it has to be used cautiously in patients with known allergy to iodine containing substances such as shell fish. ICGA is contraindicated in patients with history of severe allergies, uremia and liver disease. In fact, persistence of the ICG dye in the retino-choroidal circulation of the eye for more than 30 minutes in the late phase of the angiogram should prompt the search for hepatic dysfunction. The ICG should also be avoided in pregnancy due to lack of human toxicity data in this area. No more than 5 mg per Kg of body weight of ICG dye should be used for safety purposes. Extravasation of the dye causes a painless greenish-blue stain that migrates from the injection-site to the elbow, which often disappears in a week. Removal of the injection needle before
202
203
Limitations of ICGA
1. The choriocapillaris cannot be imaged separately with ICGA since their average cross-sectional diameter (21 m) is much smaller than that of their feeding and draining vessels, and hence the fluorescence of the former cannot be differentiated from that arising from the latter. The edge of one capillary vessel too, cannot be distinguished from that of an adjacent one since the intercapillary spaces are on an average only 5 to 7 m, which is below the limit of resolution of ICGA. 2. The phenomenon of Mie scatter also masks the unfilled retinal vessels that cannot be visualized well in low speed angiography systems. 3. Bright areas do not necessarily signify dye leakage due to the phenomenon of additive fluorescence which the fluorescence increases linearly with increase in vascular thickness until an aggregate thickness of 50 m is reached, when a plateau is reached and no further increase in brightness occurs. Mie scatter contributes to this additive fluorescence by making the bright area fuzzy and apparently larger. 4. ICGA is poorer than FFA in the imaging of classic CNVM since the early hyperfluorescence of the CNVM is overwhelmed by the intense background choroidal filling. Moreover, since the affinity of the ICG dye to the serum proteins is considerably greater than fluorescein, the leakage of the former from the classic CNVM is lesser than that of the latter even in the late phases. 5. Although superior to FFA in the imaging of occult CNVM, ICGA may underestimate the size of the CNVM, when there is little dye leakage. It is, therefore, imperative to view the films as late as 30 to 40 minutes after injection.
204
205
Figs 13.1A to C: Show the various phases of a normal ICG angiogram (ICGA). A Early phase of ICGA of the left eye of a patient (1 minute after injection) showing well-delineated choroidal and retinal vessels. Note that the hyperfluorescence of the choroidal vessels is superior to that of the retinal vessels in this phase. B Mid phase of ICGA of the left eye of a patient (7 minutes after injection) showing decreased hyperfluorescence of the choroidal and retinal vessels (dye washout) with homogenous background fluorescence. C Late phase of ICGA of the left eye of a patient (30 minutes after injection) showing a dark optic disk and ill-defined late background choroidal hyperfluorescence. Note that the choroidal vessels stand out in relief (silhouettes) as relatively hypofluorescent structures against the hyperfluorescent background
206
Figs 13.2A to F: Hot spot. A Color fundus photograph of the left eye of a patient showing a hemorrhagic detachment of the posterior pole. B Arteriovenous (AV) phase of fundus fluorescein angiogram (FFA) of the left eye showing an area of blocked fluorescence corresponding to the hemorrhagic detachment. Also seen are multiple hyperfluorescent areas suggestive of pigment epithelial detachments (PEDs). There is no hyperfluorescence that could point towards the underlying choroidal neovascular membrane (CNVM). C Early phase of ICGA of the left eye showing a small spot of intense hyperfluorescence suggestive of a hot spot (white arrowhead). D Early phase of ICGA of the left eye showing the increasing hyperfluorescence of the hot spot (white arrowhead). E Mid phase of ICGA of the left eye showing the increasing hyperfluorescence of the hot spot suggestive of leakage (white arrowhead). F Mid phase of ICGA of the left eye showing the progressively increasing hyperfluorescence of the hot spot (white arrowhead). The area of blocked fluorescence corresponding to the hemorrhagic detachment is also obvious
207
Figs 13.3A to D: Plaque. A Color fundus photograph of the left eye of a patient showing a hemorrhagic PED with a notch (black arrowhead). Also seen are hard exudates with retinal pigment epithelial (RPE) degeneration at the fovea. B Venous phase of the FFA of the left eye showing blocked fluorescence corresponding to the hemorrhagic PED (black arrowhead). There is an ill-defined hyperfluorescence in the area of the notch (white arrow). C Mid phase of ICGA of the left eye showing blocked fluorescence corresponding to the hemorrhagic PED (black arrowhead). D Late phase of ICGA of the left eye showing a well defined plaque of hyperfluorescence suggestive of CNVM (white arrowhead) along with an adjacent area of blocked fluorescence of the hemorrhagic PED (black arrowhead)
commonest type of occult CNVMs and they correspond to the thick subretinal pigment epithelial membranes (Figs 13. 3A to D). They are usually subfoveal in locations and hence ICG-guided laser photocoagulation is not advisable and either transpupillary thermotherapy (TTT) or photodynamic therapy (PDT) may be tried. Combination lesions can further be divided into marginal spots, focal spots at the edge of a plaque in 3% of cases (Figs 13.4A to D),
overlying spots, hot spots overlying plaques in 4% of cases (Figs 13.4A to D) or remote spots (focal spots remote from a plaque of neovascularization seen in 1% of cases). Interestingly, the patients are often found to develop the same morphologic type of CNVM in the other eye as well.12 ICGA also reveals the retinochoroidal anastomosis (RCA) in eyes with occult CNVM along with a vascularized pigment epithelial
208
Figs 13.4A to D: Marginal and overlying hot spots. A Color fundus photograph of the right eye of a patient showing an occult CNVM with subretinal blood seen superiorly and sub-RPE blood inferiorly and overlying the fovea. B Mid phase ICGA of the right eye showing the blocked fluorescence due to subretinal and sub-RPE blood with a vague central hyperfluorescence. C Late phase ICGA of the right eye showing blocked fluorescence (black arrow) and central hyperfluorescence (white arrowhead). D Late phase ICGA of the right eye showing a well-defined plaque (white arrowhead) along with two hyperfluorescent hot spots (white arrows). The vertical arrow denotes the overlying hot spot while the horizontal arrow denotes the marginal hot spot
detachment (PED). This is a variant of CNVM that is fed by both a choroidal and retinal vascular component.13 RCA is the stage III of a retinal angiomatous proliferation (RAP) which originates in the inner retinal layers, progresses into the subretinal space and becomes eventually associated with new vessel growth from the choroid. Associated features in this type of CNVM include pre- or intraretinal hemorrhages at the lesion site, dilated tortuous retinal vessels, sudden termination of a retinal vessel and cystoid
macular edema. Of these, intraretinal hemorrhage is considered pathognomonic of RAP. This entity has to be distinguished from small branch retinal vein occlusions. RAP responds poorly to treatment. These lesions are difficult to be detected on early phase of ICGA and are better imaged on the mid-late phases when there is progressive intraretinal dye leakage (Figs 13.5A to H). They are best identified when they overlie a serous PED that produces a homogenous background of relative hypofluorescence. FFA is poorer to
209
Figs 13.5A to H: Retinochoroidal anastomosis (RCA). A Color fundus photograph of the right eye of a patient showing an occult CNVM with an inverted C-shaped subretinal hemorrhage (SRH). B Arterial phase of the FFA of the right eye showing blocked fluorescence corresponding to the SRH. The white arrow points to the two hyper fluorescent spots (choroidal in origin) connected to the vasculature arising from the inferior temporal artery. C Arteriovenous phase of the FFA of the right eye showing the spots to progressively increase in hyperfluorescence (white arrow). Also seen are a few hyperfluorescent spots representing RPE window defects in the papillomacular bundle. D Venous phase of the FFA of the right eye showing progressive increase in hyperfluorescence of the spots (white arrow). E Late venous phase of the FFA of the right eye showing increased hyperfluorescence of the spots suggestive of leakage (white arrow). F Early phase of the ICGA of the right eye showing a small area of hyperfluorescence at the choroidal level suggestive of a new vessel (white arrow). G Mid phase of the ICGA of the right eye showing the communication of the choroidal vessel to the retinal vasculature (arising from the inferior temporal artery) (white arrow). H Mid phase of the ICGA of the right eye showing the communication of the choroidal vessel to the retinal vasculature (arising from the inferior temporal artery) with progressively increasing hyperfluorescence (white arrow)
ICGA in the detection of RAP lesions due to obscuration of the lesion due to progressive dye leakage both intra and subretinally. In contrast, the RAP lesions in ICGA remain localizable to a small spot of hyperfluorescence due to lesser dye leakage till late into the study. Polypoidal choroidal vasculopathy (PCV) that is considered to be a variant of AMD in recent years has a characteristic appearance on ICGA.
The characteristic lesion is a vascular bulge from the surface layer of the choroidal vessels, visible as a spheroidal orange-red polyp-like structure. These lesions have a predilection to the peripapillary areas but isolated lesions in the macula or the periphery can also occur and are associated with serosanguineous detachments of the neurosensory retina and the retinal pigmentary epithelium. When the leakage is
210
Figs 13.6A to D: Polypoidal choroidal vasculopathy (PCV). A Color fundus photograph of the right eye of a patient showing the characteristic orange lesions of PCV (white arrowheads). Also seen is an area of subretinal hemorrhage (SRH) superior to the disk. B Venous phase of FFA of the right eye showing the blocked fluorescence corresponding to SRH superior to disk. Also seen are mottled hyperfluorescent areas over the macula. C Mid phase of ICGA of the right eye (10 minutes) showing multiple polyps in relation to large choroidal vessels (white arrowheads). D Mid phase of ICGA of the right eye (20 minutes) shows that the polyps (white arrowheads) are not leaking
predominantly serous from the polpys the entity might be mistaken for central serous chorioretinopathy (CSCR). In the early frames, larger choroidal vessels of the PCV network are easily identifiable, with the area around and within the network remaining relatively hypofluorescent. Shortly thereafter, small hyperfluorescent polyps, corresponding to the reddish-orange choroidal excrescences seen clinically, become visible (Figs 13.6A to D).14 The late phases of ICGA first show a reversal of the
fluorescence pattern (hypofluorescent core and a hyperfluorescent surrounding casement of the polpys); and later show usually a uniform disappearance of the dye (washout) from the polyps (except when they are actively leaking), with no late staining characteristic of classic or occult CNVM. The ring of ICG staining due to reversal of fluorescence has also been noted in retinal arterial macroaneurysms and serous pigment epithelial detachments (PEDs). The central core of polyps less than 0.5 disk diameters
211
Figs 13.7A to D: Central serous chorioretinopathy (CSCR). A Color fundus photograph of the left eye of a patient showing a central blister of subretinal fluid with subretinal fibrin. B Early phase of ICGA of the left eye showing widespread choroidal hyperpermeability with no clear cut vasculature. C Mid phase of ICGA of the left eye is similar to the early phase, showing multiple islands of choroidal hyperpermeability. D Late phase of ICGA of the left eye showing multiple hyperfluorescent spots representing PEDs (black arrowheads). The central hyperfluorescent streak represents a leaking PED
212
213
Figs 13.8A to D: Acute posterior multifocal placoid pigment epitheliopathy (APMPPE). A Color fundus photograph of the left eye of a patient showing yellowish white plaque like peripapillary lesions. Also seen are peripapillary concentric lines suggestive of subretinal fluid. B Venous phase of FFA of the left eye showing hyperfluorescent and hypofluorescent spots. The former are seen in the peripapillary area. C Mid phase of ICGA of the left eye (10 minutes) showing peripapillary hypofluorescent spots (white arrowheads). D Mid phase of ICGA of the left eye (20 minutes) is similar showing persistence of the hypofluorescence of the peripapillary spots (white arrowheads)
Choroidal Tumors
Heavily pigmented tumors such as choroidal melanomas absorb the near-infrared light and block ICG fluorescence. However, the tumor borders are better delineated by ICGA than FFA, which is essential in the assessment of tumor size in response to treatment as well as in follow-
up.6 Choroidal hemangiomas, due to their vascular channels demonstrate progressively increasing hyperfluorescence on ICGA, with very intense late hyperfluorescence.19 Choroidal metastasis show variable characteristics on ICGA depending on their vascularity and pigmentation. For instance, while metastasis of thyroid carcinoma and metastatic bronchial carcinoid tumors are hyperfluorescent, metastasis of breast carcinoma blocks the choroidal fluorescence of ICGA.19
214
215
10.
11.
12.
References
1. Flower RW, Hochheimer BF.A clinical technique and apparatus for simultaneous angiography of the separate retinal and choroidal circulations. Invest Ophthalmol 1973;12: 258-61. 2. Cherrick GR, Stein SW, Leevy CM, Davidson CS. Indocyanine green: observation of its physical properties, plasma decay and hepatic excretion. J Clin Invest 1960;39:502-600. 3. Sutoh N, Murakoka K, Takahashi K, et al. Remodeling of choroidal circulation in carotid cavernous sinus fistula. Retina 1996;16: 497-504. 4. Hope-Ross M, Yannuzzi LA, Gragoudas ES, et al. Adverse reactions to indocyanine green. Ophthalmology 1994;101:529-33. 5. Lutty G. The acute intravenous toxicity of biological stains, dyes and other fluorescent substances. Toxicol App Pharmacol 1978;44: 22549. 6. Bischoff PM, Flower RW. Ten years experience with choroidal angiography using indocyanine green dye: A new routine examination or an epilogue? Doc Ophthalmol 1985;60:235. 7. Yannuzzi LA, Flower RW, Slakter JS (Eds). Indocyanine Green Angiography. St. Louis, Mosby, 1997. 8. Hayreh SS. In vivo choroidal circulation and its watershed zones. Eye 1990;4:273-89. 9. Hayashi K, Hasegawa Y, Tazawa Y, et al. Clinical
13.
14.
15.
16. 17.
18. 19.
216
14
A-scan Ultrasonography
graphy of the eye was initially performed using the A-mode. Later on the biometric precision of A-scan was increased by increasing transducer frequencies and using more advanced time measurement techniques to replace the ruler measurement of photographed A-mode displays. In 1967, Giglo and Ludlam developed the system, using 20 mHz focused transducer with a multitrace oscilloscope display. In the 1970s the interpretation of A-mode patterns became more precise and standardized due to the efforts of Ossoinig of Vienna. However, its acceptance was limited because the multiple peaks of an A-scan were bewildering for the uninitiated. Standardized echography is a widely used ultrasonic method in ophthalmology conceptualized by Ossoinig, which combines diagnostic A-scan, diagnostic B-scan, biometric A-scan and at times Doppler evaluation. Ultrasonograhy has thus become a reliable and simple procedure with increasing indications. The advent of high resolution, high frequency probes has improved B-mode studies for intraocular and orbital imaging thus pushing A-scan into the backdrop. However, A-scan still remains the best modality for biometry.
Ophthalmic ultrasonography is a non-invasive, efficient and inexpensive diagnostic tool to detect and differentiate various ocular and orbital pathologies. It is an indispensable tool for the calculation of intraocular lens (IOL) power, the evaluation of the posterior segment behind dense cataract or vitreous hemorrhage, the diagnosis of complex vitreoretinal conditions and the differentiation of ocular masses. Ultrasound, unlike other imaging modalities, is examinerdependent and needs a high level of skill and expertise. It is a dynamic test where diagnosis is best reached during examination and not from still pictures. However, a correlation with clinical findings is essential to make a precise diagnosis.
History
Ultrasound was first used in ocular diagnosis in 1956 by Mundt and Hughes who employed the A-scan technique. Oksala and Lehtinen of Finland further refined this technique in the early 1960s. Baum and Greenwood developed the Bscan using the immersion method in late 1950s. The quality of these B-mode images was quite poor and, therefore, almost all the ultrasono-
A-scan Ultrasonography
217
Physics of Ultrasound
Ultrasonography is based on the propagation, reflection and attenuation of sound waves. Ultrasound consists of high frequency sound waves of greater than 20 kilohertz (20 kHz). Those used for diagnostic ophthalmic ultrasound have a frequency of 7.5 to 12 megahertz (1 MHz = 106 Hz). These high frequency waves have a small penetration (approximately 6 cm at 7.5 MHz) but provide good resolution of minute structures in the eye and orbit. The speed of the ultrasound depends on the medium through which it passes. As the ultrasound passes through tissues, part of the wave may be reflected back towards the probe; this reflected wave is referred to as an echo. Echoes are produced by acoustic interfaces that are created at the junction of media with different sound velocities. The greater the difference in sound velocities of the media at the interface, the stronger is the echo. For example, the lens (velocity = 1641 m/s) produces a stronger echo when adjacent to aqueous (velocity = 1532 m/s) as opposed to blood (velocity = 1550 m/s), such as in hyphema. The returning echoes are affected by many factors, including the size and shape of acoustic interfaces, the angle of incidence of sound beam, absorption, scattering and refraction. The detected echo is highest when the beam is incident perpendicular to the interface.
Instrumentation
An ultrasound unit is composed of four basic elements : pulser, receiver, and display screen, all contained within the same unit and connected to the transducer located at the tip of the probe, which acts as sending and the receiving device (Figs 14.1A and B).
The pulser produces electric pulses that excite the piezo-electric quartz of the transducer probe generating sound waves. The returning echoes are received by the transducer and transformed into electric signals, which are processed in the receiver and then displayed on the screen as echograms. The examiner can adjust the amplitude of the echo signal displayed by changing the gain or sensitivity of the instrument. The display may be in one of the two modes: A-scan or B-scan.
218
These spikes represent reflectivity, location and size of the anatomic structure (Fig. 14.2). The A-mode display is a time-amplitude display. The X-axis represents time elapsed, which is a function of tissue depth. Knowing the speed of ultrasound in soft tissues the distance between two spikes can be derived. The horizontal expansion can be modified according to type of examination for which three modes orbita, bulbus and varia have been provided. The orbita mode is used for orbital examination, each microsecond measures approximately 1 mm on screen. In the bulbus mode examination (in intraocular examination) each microsecond measures approximately 2 mm of horizontal expansion on the screen. The varia mode is used for axial length measurement. The reflectivity is measured in decibels on the Y-axis and is directly related to the height of the spike above the baseline. When on highest gain, the sound beam is widest, the penetration highest and the spike amplitude maximum, enabling visualization of the weak signals. When gain is lowered, the sound beam
A-scan Ultrasonography
patient reclining or sitting, after anesthetic drops are instilled in both eyes. No other coupling agent is needed. The echographer sits on an adjustable examining stool on one side of patient. The ultrasound probe is first applied at 6 oclock limbus (Fig. 14.6), aiming at the center of the globe. It examines the opposite chorioretinal layers at the 12 oclock meridian. The patient is instructed to look away from probe to avoid scanning through the lens. The probe is shifted from limbus to fornix (Fig. 14.7) still aiming it towards the center of the globe, thus screening a particular meridian from the posterior pole to the ora serrata. The ultrasound beam is always kept perpendicular to the opposite retina (Fig. 14.8). The same procedure is repeated in eight o'clock meridians, moving the probe temporally around the globe (Fig. 14.9).
219
Fig. 14.5: Simultaneous display of A and B modes (Note: White arrow is pointing at A-scan spikes corresponding to the B-scan display above it)
Procedure
To perform a successful ultrasound examination, two key components need to be mastered viz. the acquisition of images, and the interpretation of images.
220
Indications for anterior segment evaluation are limited. However, A-scan may be performed by using a simple immersion technique. A scleral shell filled with methylcellulose is inserted between the lids and the probe placed on it. Using this technique the cornea, anterior chamber, iris, lens and retrolental space can be evaluated and axial length of the eye can be measured.
Topographic Echography
Fig. 14.9: Screening-probe position for scanning in eight meridians
The printout is labeled according to the meridian that has been screened, and the segment of the meridian that has been examined, using P for posterior, E for equator and A for anterior. For example, when the probe is placed at 6 oclock limbus for examining the posterior pole at the 12 oclock meridian, the picture is labeled as 12P.
It entails the assessment of shape, location and elevation of lesions. The following maneuvers are used: a. The probe is placed at the limbus of the meridian opposite to the center of the lesion and then moved from limbus to fornix to assess the lesion anteroposteriorly (radially). b. The probe is shifted from side-to-side (parallel to limbus) to evaluate the lesion laterally.
A-scan Ultrasonography
TABLE 14.1: TOPOGRAPHIC DIFFERENTIATION OF LESIONS ON A-SCAN Category Echogram Differential diagnosis Point-like Single spike Foreign body Vitreous opacities Membrane-like Single spike or chain of spikes Retinal detachment Choroidal detachment Vitreous membranes Tumor surfaces Space-occupying Chain of spikes Melanoma Retinoblastoma Hemangioma Vitreous hemorrhage
221
c. The probe is placed in positions that are 90 apart, to examine the lesion from different beam directions. The pathological findings are classified into one of the three categories point-like, membranelike and space occupying (Table 14.1).
Quantitative Echography
Once the topographic findings have been ascertained, quantitative echography is performed with A-scan to determine the reflectivity (i.e. spike amplitude) of a lesion, after directing the sound beam perpendicular to it. The resultant spike height is expressed as a percentage of the maximum height that can be displayed on the screen and the lesion can be categorized (Table 14.2). The determination of reflectivity is necessary for evaluation of the internal structure and sound attenuation of a mass lesion. Internal structure refers to the histological configuration (size and arrangement of interfaces) of mass lesions. An internal acoustic structure of a lesion is classified as regular when the echo spikes are uniform. The spikes are uniformly low in melanoma and uniformly high in hemangioma.
The acoustic structure is irregular (heterogenous) if the echo spikes show marked variation in amplitude as seen in a metastatic carcinoma. Sound attenuation occurs when incident sound energy is scattered, reflected or absorbed by a given medium. It is indicated by decreasing spike height within, or posterior to a lesion (occurring from left to right). This spike decrease called angle kappa is determined by drawing an imaginary line through the peaks of the lesion spikes and estimating the angle then formed with the vitreous base line (Fig. 14.10). The steeper the angle, the greater is the
TABLE 14.2: CATEGORIZATION OF LESIONS ON SPIKE HEIGHT PERCENTAGE Spike height 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Low (2-20%) Low medium (10-60%) Medium (20-80%) High (80-100%) Very high (100%) Lesions Senile vitreous floaters Choroidal melanoma Vitreous membrane Asteroid hyalosis, metastatic carcinoma Retinal detachment, organized vitreous hemorrhage or foreign body
222
Kinetic Echography
The purpose of this examination is to detect spontaneous movements and after movements. It is done at a low gain. Spontaneous movements indicate a vascular lesion as evidenced by multiple, very quick, small amplitude, vertical oscillations in the echo spike pattern. This is assessed with the probe stationary and the eye fixing steadily on a target. After movements indicate mobility and are seen as a vertical motion of the echo spikes following cessation of eye movements. Non-solid lesions like PVD or retinal detachment display after movements, whereas solid lesions like tumors do not.
Indications of A-scan
A-scan ultrasonography is indicated for evaluation of the posterior segment of the eye in the presence of complete or partial opacification of the anterior or posterior segments. It is also used to localize and measure and differentiate tumors and evaluate growth during follow-up of patients as well as to detect intraocular foreign bodies and assess extent of intraocular damage in case of trauma. Biometry is another important indication of A-scan for accurate axial length measurements required in IOL power calculation. Measurement of the axial length of globe, is also important in evaluating congenital glaucoma, microphthalmos, nanophthalmos, myopia, PHPV and phthisis bulbi. Morphological characteristics of the eyeball and its contents, like corneal thickness, lens
A-scan Ultrasonography
223
Fig. 14.11: Normal A-scan with sound beam bypassing lens; I: Initial spike, B: baseline representing echo-free vitreous, R: retina, S: sclera, O: orbital soft tissues, E: electronic scale
3. The retinal spike (R) is a straight, high rising echo spike perpendicular to the baseline. A jagged echo spike means that the probe is not perpendicularly placed. 4. The choroidal spikes are multiple high reflective spikes, which are seen between the retinal spike (R) and the scleral spikes (S). 5. The scleral spike (S) is difficult to differentiate from choroidal spikes. 6. The orbital spikes (O) are multiple spikes behind the scleral spike. The initial spikes are high reflective and the reflectivity decreases rapidly because of sound attenuation in the orbit. 7. An electronic scale (E) is displayed on the lower part of the screen. Examination at low system sensitivity (low gain) clearly identifies the retinal and scleral spikes.
Asteroid Hyalosis
Multiple echo spikes with medium to high reflectivity (50100%) are displayed along the baseline. The high reflectivity results due to presence of calcium within the asteroid bodies.
224
Vitreous Hemorrhage
In fresh, mild vitreous hemorrhage with dispersed red blood cells, a chain of low amplitude spikes is found on A-scan. These are often limited posteriorly by a higher reflective spike representing a posterior vitreous detachment. Denser the hemorrhage, the higher is the reflectivity of the echo spikes. If the blood organizes larger interfaces are found, which may present even 60-100% reflectivity (Fig. 14.13).
Endophthalmitis
In endophthalmitis diffuse inflammatory cells are present in the vitreous, which are displayed as multiple echo spikes with low to medium reflectivity (1060%). With organization and membrane formation, the reflectivity increases (Fig. 14.14). Daily follow-up examinations are required.
Fig. 14.14: A-scan of endophthalmitis, a week after its occurrence. Spike due to organized inflammatory membrane in vitreous (arrow)
A-scan Ultrasonography
225
Fig. 14.15: A-scan at high gain: A:medium reflective spike of PVD, B: low reflective spike from subvitreal blood
Fig. 14.16: A-scan of retinal detachment showing 100% tall single peak spike (R)
The distance between the retinal spikes and the ocular wall spikes in a given beam direction is equal to the degree of elevation. The presence of signals between the retinal and scleral spikes is indicative of an exudative or hemorrhagic retinal detachment. Sometimes it is difficult to differentiate between a thick vitreous membrane due to
inflammation or trauma, and a retinal detachment, as both may show a highly reflective (100%) spike. However, they have different reflectivities in the periphery. A retinal detachment is highly reflective both posteriorly and in the periphery. Vitreous membranes tend to be highly reflective posteriorly but less in the periphery (Fig. 14.17).
Fig. 14.17: A-scan technique for differentiating a dense PVD or thick vitreous membrane from RD in the superior portion of eyeball. On scanning the membrane posteriorly 100% high spike is first seen (1). The probe is then shifted so as to follow the membrane to its insertion in the periphery. A PVD shows low reflective spikes in the periphery, while the retina remains highly reflective as seen in (4)
226
Intraocular Tumors
A-scan helps in the detection, differentiation and measurement of intraocular tumors.
Choroidal Hemangioma
The acoustic structure of choroidal hemangioma is regular with a very high internal reflectivity due to multiple blood filled channels. Vascularity is present and follow-up shows no growth.
Choroidal Hemorrhage
Choroidal hemorrhage may show a reflectivity similar to that of melanoma but profoundly differs from it by displaying after movements during kinetic echography if it is sufficiently elevated.
TABLE 14.4: A-SCAN ULTRASONIC DIFFERENTIATION OF CHOROIDAL TUMORS Criteria Internal structure Reflectivity Spontaneous movements (vascularity) Growth during follow-up Choroidal melanoma Regular Low to medium (10-60%) Fast, vertical Significant Metastatic carcinoma Irregular High (80-100%) Minimal or no movements Slow Choroidal hemorrhage Regular High (100%) Fast, vertical None
A-scan Ultrasonography
227
Fig. 14.19: A-scan of retinoblastoma. Very high reflective tumor spikes (T) are seen with decreased reflectivity behind them due to shadowing of sclera and orbital tissues. Vitreous seeding is seen as a low reflective echo spike (V)
Figs 14.18A to C: Differential diagnosis of choroidal tumors: A Choroidal melanoma, low internal reflective, B Choroidal hemangioma, uniform high reflectivity, C Metastatic carcinoma, variable reflectivity, Arrow internal tumor spikes, T: tumor surface, S: sclera
Retinoblastoma
Retinoblastoma is best diagnosed by indirect ophthalmoscopy. A-scan offers additional diagnostic information through the quantitation of sound attenuation by the lesion. The measurement of axial length helps in differentiating it from other causes of leukocoria. The status of
the lesion and the effect of treatment can also be assessed by A-scan. On A-scan, a retinoblastoma shows an irregular acoustic structure with high internal reflectivity (70-100%) (Fig. 14.19). Tumor cell arrangement, large vessels and particularly calcifications are responsible for the high reflectivity. Vascularity is present as evidenced by spontaneous movements of the lesion spikes. The axial length may be normal or increased. The A-scan pattern may vary depending upon size of tumor and degree of tumor calcification and necrosis. A small retinoblastoma without calcification will not produce a high reflectivity. Other conditions that can cause leukocoria but can be differentiated from a retinoblastoma by ultrasonography include, persistent hyperplastic primary vitreous (PHPV), retinopathy of prematurity, and Coats disease (Flow Charts 14.1A to D). In PHPV, an A-scan examination confirms the absence of a retinal pathology, as normal retinal echo spikes are seen. The axial length of the affected eye is shorter than the fellow eye. In retinopathy of prematurity, the A-scan shows absence of a mass lesion and the presence of a large echo spike representing the detached retina with normal axial length. Coats disease consists of retinal detachment with subretinal exudates. A-scan shows a high reflective echo
228
A-scan Ultrasonography
Flow chart 14.1C: Diffuse mass lesions on topographic echography
229
230
Choroidal Detachment
A thick steeply rising 100% high spike is produced by choroidal detachment on A-scan. On lowering the gain the spike is observed to be double peaked. If choroidal hemorrhage is present, low to medium spikes are seen in the subchoroidal space. If choroidal effusion is present the space is echo-free.
Ocular Trauma
In a traumatized eye, the fundus visualization may be obscured by a hyphema, a cataract or a vitreous hemorrhage. A-scan examination of the eye in such cases is used to detect any intraocular damage and the presence of an intraocular foreign body (IOFB). It is advisable to repair an open wound before ultrasonic examination. However, if intraocular assessment is imperative before closure, the Ascan probe should be placed on the conjunctiva in an area away from the wound. Marked lid swelling or severe pain may prevent placement
A-scan Ultrasonography
231
Fig. 14.20: A-scan of traumatic retinal detachment: R: 100% tall spike from retinal detachment, H: low reflective echo spike from subretinal hemorrhage
displayed if it is centered within the sound beam at any angle. Therefore, the sound beam is aimed towards the foreign body at an angle oblique to the sclera, thus decreasing its reflectivity. High reflective foreign body spikes are then displayed in front of the lower reflective ocular wall spikes if the foreign body is intraocular.
reflective spikes representing the lens nucleus, separating the surface spikes (Fig. 14.21).
Phthisis Bulbi
In phthisis bulbi the globe is atrophic and shrunken, the intraocular contents are disorganized and intraocular calcification may be present. The A-scan represents these changes as an irregular pattern of high and low reflective echo spikes which fill the globe. High reflective echo spikes may be present due to ossification and the normally high orbital echo spikes are absent. The axial length of the eyeball is shorter than normal.
Biometry
The most commonly used function of the A-scan is for measurements in the eye, i.e. biometry. This
Fig. 14.21: A-scan of dislocated lens in vitreous: A: anterior lens spike, P: posterior lens spike seen in vitreous cavity
232
Method
The A-scan biometer probe is a 10 MHz solid probe with an inbuilt fixation light. The probe has to be aligned with the optical axis of the eye for accurate axial length measurement. This can be done by the immersion or the contact technique.
Contact Technique
The contact technique for axial length measurement is an alternative to immersion biometry. It does not use scleral shell. Instead the probe comes in contact with the cornea, which can be done in two ways: either hand held by examiner or attaching the probe to slitlamp biomicroscope or applanation tonometer holder (Fig. 14.23). The patient is examined in the seated position after instilling local anesthetic drops. The patient is asked to fixate a target straight ahead with the non-testing eye or to look directly at the probes fixation light with the tested eye. The probe is brought forward to touch the cornea
Immersion Technique
The patient is placed in a supine position or in a reclining examination chair and local anesthesia is instilled. A scleral shell is applied to the eye, the most commonly used being Hansen or Prager shell, which is available in different diameter sizes. The scleral shell is filled with 1% or 2% methylcellulose, which should be free of air bubbles; the presence of air bubbles causes
Fig. 14.22: A: scan display of phakic eye measured with Immersion technique. IS: Initial spike produced at the tip of the probe. C: The corneal spike C is double peaked representing the anterior C1 and posterior surfaces C2 of the cornea. L1: The anterior lens spike generated from anterior surface of lens. L2: The posterior lens spike generated from posterior surface of lens and is usually smaller than L1. R: The retinal spike, from anterior surface of retina. It is straight, highly reflective and tall whenever the ultrasound beam is perpendicular to the retina. S: Scleral spike. O: The orbital spikes are low reflective behind the scleral spike
Fig. 14.23: A-scan probe fit into the applanation tonometer holder
A-scan Ultrasonography
233
Fig. 14.24: A-scan display of a phakic eye measure with contact A-scan biometry. Since the probe is in contact with the eye, the initial spike and the anterior corneal spike become one: C: cornea/probe, A: anterior lens surface, P: posterior lens surface, R: retina, S: sclera
without indenting it. It is properly aligned along the visual axis to optimize the five high amplitude spikes on the screen. The five spikes in a phakic patient represent from left to right: (1) anterior surface of cornea, (2) anterior surface of lens, (3) posterior surface of lens, (4) anterior surface of retina, (5) sclera (Fig. 14.24). An aphakic eye will not show the lens spikes (Fig. 14.25) though sometimes a spike of intact posterior capsule, if present, may be seen. The leading edge of each echo spike should be perpendicular to the horizontal baseline. The gain is kept at the minimum level that allows proper resolution of these spikes. The density of the cataract determines the need for changing the gain setting due to absorption of sound. Dense cataract requires higher gain to achieve good resolution. The anterior chamber depth which appears on the screen should also be monitored to detect corneal compression during contact biometry. The biometer has an automatic as well as manual mode. Use of the automatic mode
increases the risk of error as the biometer may capture poor quality scans. Biometers are programed to capture any scans with spikes that are of high amplitude within their given appropriate area. However, they cannot determine if the spike arose steeply from the baseline or if a step or hump was present in the spike origin. Manual mode is preferable, in which the examiner presses a foot switch to capture the scan when it is seen to be of high quality. The axial length of the eyeball is measured from corneal surface to retinal surface and an electronic readout is obtained. A comparison between contact and immersion techniques of biometry is given in Table 14.5.
Fig. 14.25: A-scan of an aphakic eye with probe on cornea. Note the striking absence of the lens spikes: C: cornea/probe: R: retina, S: sclera
234
glaucoma from megalocornea in which axial length remains normal. It can also monitors efficacy of glaucoma therapy. The immersion technique is preferable as it can detect minute changes in axial length in small eyes of children.
Nanophthalmos
The diagnosis of nanophthalmos is made when the globe of an adult is smaller than 17 mm with thickening of retinochoroid and sclera.
Myopia
Biometry helps differentiating the axial myopia from the lenticular myopia. A posterior staphyloma in highly myopic eyes causes an increase in axial length. A comparison with previous axial length measurement or with that of the other eye may reveal a difference of more than 1 mm.
Fig. 14.26: A-scan of intraocular lens implant producing multiple signals: L: highly reflective spike from IOL, M: multiple signals (reverberations). PMMA lens has a longer chain of reverberations than a silicone lens
A-scan Ultrasonography
signals and may cause error in axial length measurements. These artifacts can be distinguished from true echoes by their position in the echograms as well as by their more pronounced movements. high reflectivity. Reflectivity may be due to some other causes such as intraocular calcification or bone formation in phthisis bulbi. Axial length measurement and clinical history should be helpful in making the correct diagnosis.
235
Attenuation Artifacts
Silicone oil disperses the ultrasound beam, and the examination is, therefore, very difficult to perform. The sound attenuation prevents resolution of posterior ocular wall and orbital contents (Fig. 14.27). The velocity of sound in silicone oil is much less than in vitreous. This causes the echograms to appear larger than normal.
Vitreoretinal Diseases
Dispersed vitreous cells or hemorrhage may be missed initially due to low reflectivity. The gain should be increased to improve resolution. It is sometimes difficult to differentiate between a thick vitreous membrane and retinal detachment as both show high reflectivity.
Tumors
A tumor mass less than 0.75 mm will be missed on A-scan. To detect the acoustic structure the thickness should at least be 2 mm. A false negative result may occur in case of a small retinoblastoma with no calcification, as it will show low reflective spikes. A diagnosis of retinoblastoma may be made if a mass shows
Fig. 14.27: A-scan of globe filled with silicone oil: A: spikes from anterior surface of silicone drop, B: spikes from posterior surface of silicone drop, C: markedly attenuated spikes from ocular wall and orbit
236
Fig. 14.28: Misalignment demonstrated by the decreased amplitude of the posterior lens spike (arrow): A: anterior lens surface, P: posterior lens surface, R: retina
A-scan Ultrasonography
the distance between the corneal and retinal spikes, with the average velocity in a phakic eye taken as 1550 m/s. However, the velocity of sound in various ocular media in the same eye and in same ocular media of different eyes is not the same, but the machine does not differentiate it. For example, in a myopic person who is likely to have a fluid vitreous, sound waves should be able to travel faster in the vitreous cavity than in a hyperopic person. Since the biometer is not capable of recognizing the difference in velocities it may underestimate the length of vitreous cavity in myopia. It will be the reverse in hyperopia, where axial length may get overestimated. An axial myopia of 29 mm is best measured at an average velocity of 1550 m/s while an axial hyperope of 20 mm is best measured at average velocity of 1560 m/s. The type of eye (phakic, aphakic or pseudophakic) should also be carefully fed in before biometry as the average velocities programed for them are different. The errors which creep into the estimation of axial length prevent accurate IOL power calculation. An error of 1 mm in measuring axial length affects the postoperative refraction by at least 2.5 diopters. This causes a large residual postoperative error of refraction (spherical) in eyes with high ametropia. Modification in IOL calculation formulae have been suggested (Holladay modification), but these are complex, time consuming and require additional software. on A-scan as both show low to medium reflective echo spikes. A clinical history assists in their differentiation. In case of a dense cataract, an ultrasound examination is warranted when other clinical features raise the suspicion of a posterior segment abnormality. Such indications include a rapidly developing cataract, history of trauma or a possible IOFB, heterochromia, afferent pupillary defect, posterior synechiae, acute red eye, acute rise of IOP and diabetes mellitus.
237
Bibliography
1. Atta HR. Ophthalmic Ultrasound: A Practical Guide. London,Churchill Livingstone, 1996.
238
B-scan Ultrasonography
239
TARAPRASAD DAS, VASUMATHY VEDANTHAM, ANJALI HUSSAIN, SANGMITRA KANUNGO, LS MOHAN RAM
15
B-scan Ultrasonography
kilohertz (kHz). The tissue ultrasound interaction consists of reflection (and refraction), scattering, and absorption of the sound energy.
Since the first application in ophthalmology by Mundt and Huges,1 ultrasonography, in little over four decades, has emerged as an indispensable tool in the diagnosis and management of various ocular and orbital abnormalities. The value of ultrasonography in the diagnosis of vitreoretinal diseases, and particularly in preoperative evaluation of the posterior segment of the eye need not be over emphasized.2 Ultrasonography is mostly indicated in hazy media when the traditional optical evaluation is not possible. It is also of immense diagnostic and therapeutic value in selected situations despite media clarity such as intraocular space occupying lesions. This chapter briefly describes the technique, and evaluation of the posterior segment eye diseases using B-scan contact ultrasonography. Care is taken to describe the ultrasonic features of commonly seen vitreoretinal diseases with representative illustrations. An acquaintance with the technique and interpretation is imperative to appreciate the technical potential of ocular ultrasound.
Scattering
Scattering of ultrasonic energy occurs both at rough interfaces between different tissues and
240
Absorption
In the ocular tissues, an ultrasound pulse loses energy due to conversion of the vibrational energy of the pulse to other energy forms such as heat. The mechanisms of absorption in media are not properly understood; different tissues exhibit different frequency dependent absorptions. Ophthalmic ultrasonography utilizes 8-10 MHz sound waves. As it travels through the eye, it is reflected by the intraocular structures, and the echoes or the signals are returned to the screen.
Ultrasound Unit
An ultrasound unit is composed of four basic elements: the pulser, the receiver, and the display unit are all contained within the same chassis and connected to the transducer, located at the tip of the probe by an electrically shielded cable. The pulser produces electric pulse at a rate of 1000 pulses per second. Each pulse excites the electrodes of the piezo-electric crystal of the transducer, generating sound waves. The returning echoes are received by the transducer and transformed into electric signals. These signals are processed in the receiver and demodulator, and then displayed on the screen of the display unit. Ophthalmic ultrasonography commonly uses two modes of displaythe A-scan, and B-scan. A-scan or amplitude modulation scan provides one dimensional image of vertical deflections from a base line. The A-scan provides information
B-scan Ultrasonography
that surpass any of the volume estimation methods available with conventional 2D ultrasound techniques. Accurate volume measurements of intraocular tumors allow the physician to monitor changes over a certain period of time, i.e. growth of a small choroidal tumor, decrease in size of a disciform macular degeneration, or the response of a melanoma to radiation, laser or drug therapy. 3. Profile A-scan analysis: Using an S-shaped amplifier that allows an evaluation of the internal echo-spikes an accurate linear measurement in any chosen direction can be made. 4. Analysis of the volume-of-interest: With multidirectional slicing can show a tomographic display of intraocular pathology. 5. Surface rendering with a three-dimensional view: The surfaces and boundaries of the ocular pathology can be made under examination. if the pathology is not located in one of the major meridians (3, 6, 9, 12 oclock) an oblique transverse scan can be used to evaluate the pathology. In order to completely scan the eye it is prudent to first direct the probe face at the limbus, and then slowly shift to the fornix. Thus one could evaluate from the posterior pole to the periphery in each quadrant. Once the crosssectional evaluation is completed, the area of interest is scanned by longitudinal scan. Longitudinal scans allow for evaluation of a single meridian from its most posterior aspect to the far periphery. This is accomplished by directing the marker at the corneal limbus opposite the area to be examined. Axial scan provides a pleasing, generally understandable picture; however, it requires placement of the probe directly on the cornea and thus the risk of corneal abrasion increases. A-scan produces a series of deflections from the base line. The amplitude of the spike is directly related to the density of the interface, and the space between the spikes indicates the time it takes for the sound to encounter an interface and return as a signal.
241
Screening Techniques
It is best to begin with a maximum gain (80 decibels) setting on the B-scan, with the patient lying on his back. The eye is anesthetized with topical paracaine when the transducer can be placed on the sclera; alternately, the probe can be placed on the closed eyelid and in such a situation the eye need not be anesthetized. The probe is placed on the globe opposite the area to be examined. The marker on the probe acts as the orientation point and corresponds to the upper portion of the echogram. To evaluate the superior and inferior fundus the marker is directed towards the nose (horizontal transverse), and to evaluate the nasal and temporal fundus, the marker is directed at 12 oclock meridian (vertical transverse). The best detail of pathology is obtained in the central portion of the echogram;
242
Asteroid Hyalosis
Asteroid hyalosis, a unilateral condition characterized by formation of calcium soaps within the vitreous cavity, appears as bright round signals on B-scan, and medium amplitude spikes in A-scan, with an echo free space just in front of the retina that represents the echofree vitreous gel (Fig. 15.2). This is in contrast to an eye with emulsified silicone oil, where there is no echo-free space. Generally, these opacities exhibit distinct movement on movement of the eye.
Fig. 15.1: Normal globe: Ultrasonogram shows an echolucent vitreous cavity, concave retinochoroidal layer and the triangular shadow of the optic nerve
B-scan Ultrasonography
243
Fig. 15.2: Asteroid hyalosis: Bright round signals seen on B-scan with echo free space separating them from the retina
of B-scan of PVD reduce as the gain is reduced; in contrast the RD maintains its 100% reflectivity all the time. Kinetic scanning is also useful where a PVD shows wafting after-movements (Fig. 15.3). PVD may be complete or incomplete. It is incomplete in most of the vascular retinopathies associated with vitreous hemorrhage, particularly proliferative diabetic retinopathy (PDR). One could also image vitreoschisis that usually occurs in PDR.
Fig. 15.3: Posterior vitreous detachment (PVD): B-scan shows an undulating membrane in front of the retinochoroidal layer attached to the optic disk. The configuration of the detached vitreous is changed with the movement of the eye (right)
244
Endophthalmitis
Ultrasonography of the eye with endophthalmitis depends on the degree and severity of infection and the extent of vitreous involvement. Generally opacities are noted, and membrane formation becomes apparent in severe cases. Choroidal thickening, choroidal detachment, retinal detachment and retained IOFB are possible associated findings (Fig. 15.6).
Retinal Detachment
Retinal detachment appears as tall (100% amplitude) spike separated from the choroidoscleral layer; it is attached, however, to the optic nerve and the ora serrata. By serial scanning
Fig. 15.4: Vitreous hemorrhage: Intragel and subhyaloid in location and the posterior vitreous is partially detached
B-scan Ultrasonography
245
Figs 15.5A to D: B-scan of posterior hyaloid detachment. A shows a high echoreflectivity due to thickening of posterior hyaloid with medium echo reflectivity due to less dense subhyaloid hemorrhage. Corresponding A-scan, B shows initial high reflective spike with low to medium echospikes. In contrast, dense subhyaloid hemorrhage, C shows high echo reflectivity and corresponding A scan, D shows medium to high echoreflectivity
Fig. 15.6: Endophthalmitis: Ultrasonogram shows low to medium echoreflective vitreous opacities with choroidal thickening
the extent of retinal detachment can be determined. Recent retinal detachments are characterized by a mobile retina and translucent subretinal space (Fig. 15.7). With time when the proliferative vitreoretinopathy (PVR)4 sets in, the vitreous space becomes
limited, there is decreased mobility of the retina in kinetic scanning, and membranes form and adhere to the retina from all sides. This causes a variety of configurations in the B-scan and the most prominent one is the funnel configuration of the detached retina (Fig. 15.8 ). Two
246
Fig. 15.7: Retinal detachment (fresh): B-scan shows detached retina as a thin, attached to the optic disc and fanning peripherally. Vector A-scan showing a tall, highly echoreflective spike signifying a retinal detachment. The subretinal space in fresh retinal detachment is usually sonolucent
Fig. 15.8: Closed funnel retinal detachment: Ultrasound shows a detached thick retina in a triangular configuration, with apposition of the sides of the triangle in front of the optic disc
configurationsopen, and closed funnel are described in PVR. In triangular retinal detachment the sides of the triangle represent the highly detached stiff retina, and the base of the triangle is the proliferating vitreous membrane. An attempt was made to ultrasonically differentiate advanced grades of PVR.5 In PVR C1 the detached retinal leaves are thickened, and the subretinal space is sonolucent in contrast to PVR C2 and C3 where the subretinal space is not sonolucent. In PVR D1 and D2 the retinal leaves are thickened and shortened and subretinal space is no longer sonolucent. In PVR D3 three configurations are observedtriangular, morning glory, and T-shape.
Long-standing retinal detachments may also develop retinal cysts (Fig. 15.9) and become partially calcified, and cholesterol debris may accumulate in the subretinal space. It is important to remember that an axial B-scan view may not always demonstrate the insertion of a retinal detachment into the optic nerve. Therefore, a longitudinal approach should be used to properly assess the relationship of a membrane to the optic nerve.
Retinal Tear
Large retinal tears can be visualized easily, but the smaller ones require a meticulous examina-
B-scan Ultrasonography
247
Fig. 15.10: Retinal tear: B-scan showing a breach of retinal tissue. Vitreous is attached to this breach of tissue suggesting the element of traction in causing retinal tear
Fig. 15.9: Longitudinal B-scan shows formation of intraretinal cysts (white arrow) and retinal detachment with high reflective surface spikes on corresponding A-scan. Often intraretinal cysts may mimic a tractional retinal detachment
tion. It appears as a breach of tissue on B-scan, and on A-scan it appears as a highly reflective tissue separate from the other fundus spikes (Fig. 15.10). Giant retinal break with detachment appears as a rolled out tissue on B-scan with clear breach of tissue. In general, however, detecting retinal tears on ultrasonography is not easy and it is never as specific or sensitive as on optical evaluation. It is useful in situations when fresh vitreous hemorrhage due to retinal tear obscures the fundus view; in these situations the retinal tears are mostly located in the upper half of the retina.
Retinoschisis
This condition most often involves the inferotemporal peripheral fundus. It may be
248
Fig. 15.11: Tractional retinal detachment: B-scan shows a concave configuration of the retina with a broad area of vitreoretinal adhesion signifying a table-top traction of the retina. The corresponding vector A-scan showing a highly reflective spike, signifying RD
Fig. 15.12: Exudative retinal detachment and choroidal thickening in VKH syndrome: B-scan shows diffuse choroidal thickening (better appreciated at the low gain of 77.0 dB), with overlying exudative RD. Corresponding vector A-scan shows a highly reflective spike signifying retinal detachment and low to medium reflective spikes behind it signifying choroidal thickening
B-scan Ultrasonography
demonstrate slight vertical after movement. It differs from retinal detachment by its more focal, smooth and thin character. A choroidal detachment is thicker than retinoschisis and may have a double peaked spike.
249
Cysticercosis
There is a characteristic echographic appearance with a sharply outlined, oval cyst within the vitreous cavity and/or in the subretinal space (Fig. 15.14). The scolex of the parasite is seen as a very highly reflective, echo-dense nodule that is located adjacent to the inner wall of the cyst.
Fig. 15.13: Retinoschisis: Transverse B-scan shows a moderately elevated thin smooth dome-shaped membrane echo (arrow) located in the inferotemporal periphery. Very thin 100% spike is also seen on A scan
Choroidal Thickening
Thickening of choroid can be localized or diffuse, and is seen in a number of conditions. They include posterior uveitis, sympathetic ophthalmia, Vogt-Koyanagi-Harada disease, late stage of endophthalmitis and uveal effusion syndrome.
unilateral or bilateral. On B-scan it appears as smooth, thin, dome-shaped membrane that does not insert in the optic disc (Fig. 15.13). On Ascan, 100% high spike is produced, which may
Fig. 15.14: Subretinal cysticercosis: B-scan shows a sharply outlined cyst in the subretinal space, with a bright spot adjacent to the inner wall corresponding to the scolex. The vector A-scan through the scolex shows a tall and highly reflective spike
250
Fig. 15.15: Choroidal detachment: B-scan shows smooth, dome-shaped, thick membranous structure. The corresponding vector A-scan, shows a series of medium to high reflective spikes behind the retinal spike with a sonolucent suprachoroidal space
Choroidal Detachment
On B-scan a choroidal detachment appears as a smooth, dome-shaped, thick membranous structure that does not insert to the optic nerve (Fig. 15.15). The choroidal detachment can be localized, or involve the entire fundus (kissing choroidal detachment). The B-scan also can demonstrate the nature of suprachoroidal fluid; in serous detachment, the suprachoroidal space is echo-lucent, and in hemorrhagic detachment, the suprachoroidal space is echo-dense. On A-scan the thickened choroid appears as a series of high reflective spikes just behind the retinal spike. The detached choroid produces a 100% reflective, double peaked spike (retina and choroid together). This spike exhibits little or no after movement on kinetic scanning. The suprachoroidal space appears sonolucent or with low to medium height spikes depending on the nature of suprachoroidal fluid.
patient cooperation. Ultrasonography permits evaluation of the intraocular structures, locating a retained intraocular foreign body, and identifying any posterior wall disruption.
Vitreous Hemorrhage
The ultrasonic character of vitreous hemorrhage is not different than vitreous hemorrhage in nontraumatic conditions. However, a large retinal dialysis can be easily detected. Occasionally the trail of hemorrhage in the solid vitreous can be traced to the site of bleeding such as avulsion of major vessel or scleral rupture (Fig. 15.16).
B-scan Ultrasonography
strands of vitreous might be attached to the dislocated lens (Fig. 15.17).
251
Fig. 15.17: Dislocated lens: B-scan shows a globular structure in the posterior vitreous signifying a dislocated lens. Acoustic shadowing is seen, implying that the lens could be cataractous or calcified
Dislocated Lens
Dislocated lens appears as a round or oval globular structure in the posterior vitreous, and
Fig. 15.18: Intraocular foreign body: B-scan shows a bright signal in front of the optic disk in the posterior vitreous, with a high 100% reflectivity on vector A-scan, that persists on lowering of the gain. Orbital shadowing is also seen at low gain
252
Fig. 15.19: Posterior globe rupture: B-scan shows breach of scleral tissue with echolucent space in the subTenons space signifying fluid
round metallic foreign body. Glass and vegetative matter (radiolucent) are more challenging, but they also produce bright signals on B-scan, and tall reflective echo on A-scan.
Fig. 15.20: Optic nerve avulsion: B-scan shows a scleral break near the optic disk signifying optic nerve avulsion
features such as shape, location, and extension. A-scan provides information on structure, reflectivity, vascularity, and height. Serial ultrasonography is useful in measuring the height and growth of the tumor over a period of time.
Melanoma
Ultrasonically melanomas appear as solid, regularly structured, vascular lesions of low to medium reflectivity. Vascularity of the tumor is well appreciated as distinct spontaneous
B-scan Ultrasonography
irregular contour, with a central elevation. They have medium to high reflectivity, with minimal to none internal vascularity. The large interface between the choroidal tissue and the carcinoma mass is responsible for the high reflectivity. On A-scan, irregular spikes of medium to high amplitudes are seen.
253
Choroidal Hemangioma
These tumors appear as a flat, echogenic, solid, subretinal mass, often located at the posterior pole, with minimal sound attenuation, with or without concomitant exudative retinal detachment (Fig. 15.22). On A-scan, it has a regular acoustic structure with very high (95-100%) internal reflectivity, that results from the large interfaces formed by the vessel surfaces. By reducing the gain, the vascularity of the tumor can be better appreciated.
Fig. 15.21: Choroidal melanoma: B-scan shows a collarbutton-shaped mass from the choroid into the vitreous cavity
movements of the lesion spikes during examination in A-scan. While the most common shapes are a dome or collar-button, they can also be diffuse. A collar-button shape signifies rupture of Bruchs membrane, and it is usually associated with retinal detachment (Fig. 15.21). There can be other signs such as acoustic hollowing (decreased reflectivity at the tumor base due to uniform echotexture of the tumor), choroidal excavation at the tumor base and posterior scleral bowing (noted in younger individuals).
Retinoblastoma
On B-scan retinoblastoma, if large, is seen as an irregular echogenic mass involving the vitreous, retina, and/or the subretinal space. Area of calcification is seen as area of high echogenicity. This causes strong sound attenuation, and is seen as an area of echolucency behind the calcification (Fig. 15.23). This is because the
Fig. 15.22: Choroidal hemangioma: LeftOn B-scan, a flat echogenic solid subretinal mass is seen with concomitant exudative retinal detachment of 4.16 mm thickness. RightA decrease in thickness is seen after photocoagulation
254
Fig. 15.23: Retinoblastoma: B-scan shows an irregular, large echogenic mass involving the vitreous from the retina. Corresponding vector A-scan shows high internal reflectivity (70 to 90%), due to spots of calcification
sound is almost totally reflected by calcification, thus preventing its further propagation beyond. On A-scan, the characteristic features are solid consistency (absence of after movements following a sudden ocular movement), high internal reflectivity (70-90%), and presence of vascularity. High internal reflectivity is due to calcification and the large interface between area of necrosis and viable tumor cells.7 The axial length of the eye may be normal or increased in case the tumor invades the ocular wall. The increased axial length is thus an important point in differentiating retinoblastoma from other conditions causing leukocoria.
location, and solid consistency, it can be differentiated by its irregular acoustic structure, medium to high reflectivity, absence of vascularity, and rarity of associated retinal detachment (Fig. 15.24).
Structural Anomalies
Structural anomalies of globe include phthisis bulbi, atrophic bulbi, posterior staphyloma, choroidal coloboma, optic nerve head drusen and anophthalmos.
Phthisis Bulbi
In phthisis bulbi the globe is smaller than normal with multiple echogenic vitreous opacities, choroidal thickening, and calcification of ocular coats, with resultant absence of high reflective orbital echospikes due to shadowing (Fig. 15.25).
B-scan Ultrasonography
255
Fig. 15.24: Disciform macular scar: B-scan shows a solid subretinal lesion. In contrast to a melanoma, it has an irregular acoustic structure, and medium to high reflectivity in the corresponding vector A-scan
Fig. 15.25: Phthisis bulbi: B-scan shows a smaller than normal globe, with multiple echogenic vitreous opacities and calcification of ocular coats. The corresponding vector A-scan shows the resultant orbital shadowing
Atrophic Bulbi
Atrophic bulbi is characterized by a normal globe contour with calcification of ocular coats (Fig. 15.26). It has normal axial length.
Choroidal Coloboma
Choroidal coloboma is seen as an excavation, usually involving the posterior pole; but in contrast to posterior staphyloma, its edges are sharp. Associated findings include microphthalmos, and retinal detachment.
Posterior Staphyloma
Posterior staphyloma is seen as a shallow excavation of the posterior pole with smooth edges on sonographic evaluation of highly myopic eyes.
256
Fig. 15.26: Atrophic bulbi: Ultrasonogram shows a normal globe contour with calcification of the ocular coats
Fig. 15.27: Optic nerve head drusen: B-scan showing bright echogenic spot over the optic disk. Corresponding vector A-scan showing a highly reflective spike that persists on lowering the gain
B-scan Ultrasonography
high reflectivity at or within the optic nerve head. They are best seen with transverse and longitudinal B-scan approaches, which bypass the lens, and demonstrate the calcified nodules better than the axial approach (Fig. 15.27).
257
Immersion B-scan
Immersion B-scan is used to study the anterior segment structures (Fig. 15.29). A water bath is used to incorporate the delay zone. Ophthalmic ultrasonography is an invaluable tool in diagnosis and evaluation of the posterior segment of the eye. Knowledge of various features and appropriate clinical correlation is essential to gain maximum information from this technology.
Fig. 15.28: Optic nerve head coloboma: Horizontal Bscan showing sharp defect over the optic disk area suggestive of coloboma of the optic disk
Fig.15.29: Left: Immersion Bscan shows a total cataract with intact posterior capsule. Right: Immersion B-scan showing partially absorbed cataractous lens. Note the thickness of the lens and increased reflectivity of the posterior capsule
258
References
1. Mundt GH, Huges WF. Ultrasonic in ocular diagnosis. Am J Ophthalmol 1956;41:488-98. 2. Das T, Namperumalsamy P: Ocular ultrasound in preoperative evaluation of posterior segment of the eye. Indian J Ophthalmol 1983;31:1022-24. 3. Das T, Namperumalsamy P. Ultrasonographic characterisation of vitreous hemorrhage and retinal detachment. Afro-Asian J Ophthalmol 1985;4:10-16. 4. The Retina Society Terminology Committee. The classification of retinal detachment with proliferative vitreoretinopathy. Ophthalmology 1983;90:121-25. 5. Das T, Namperumalsamy P. Ultrasonic characterisation of proliferative vitreoretinopathy. Afro-Asian J Ophthalmol 1987;5:180-85.
6. Das T, Namperumalsamy P. Ultrasonography in ocular trauma. Indian J Ophthalmol 1987;35: 121-25. 7. Das T, Namperumalsamy P. Ultrasonic evaluation of retinoblastoma. Afro-Asian J Ophthalmol 1986;5:4-10.
Bibliography
1. Coleman DJ, Lizzi FL, Jack RL (Eds). Ultrasonography of the eye and orbit. Philadelphia, Lea and Febiger, 1977. 2. Shammas HJ. Atlas of Ophthalmic Ultrasonography and Biometry. St Louis: CV Mosby Co, 1984.
259
16
Ultrasound biomicroscopy (UBM) uses high frequency sound waves to provide noninvasive in vivo imaging of the anterior segment with microscopic resolution. It acts on a principle similar to that of the B-scan; sound waves in the ultrasonic range are reflected off the structure of interest, and the reflected waves form images. However, frequency of the waves used in the UBM range between 35 and 50 MHz, while the ophthalmic B-scan probes generate sound waves of 10 MHz frequency. The B-scan, with a lower frequency, has better penetration, and can image structures of the posterior segment well. Anterior segment structures can be visualized only by the immersion technique, the resolution being poor compared to the UBM. The UBM, with higher frequency sound waves, can penetrate only about 5 mm into the eye; however, it can form images of the anterior segment with a much better resolution than the B-scan. UBM can be used to image and assess the morphology of structures easily seen on conventional examination (with slit-lamp) such as cornea, iris and sclera, as well as structures hidden from clinical observation, including the ciliary body and zonule. The normal anatomical relations and pathophysiologic changes in the anterior segment structures can be examined both
260
Fig.16.1: Schematic diagram of the ultrasound biomicroscope. TGC, time gain compensation
signal. This signal is displayed as B-scan data on a video monitor as real time images, the whole process being controlled and synchronized by a computer. B-mode imaging is currently performed at 8 frames/second (Fig. 16.1). By increasing the frequency in an ultrasound biomicroscope, microscopic resolution is attained over a limited depth. The units operating at 50 MHz provide a lateral and an axial resolution of 50 m and 25 m, respectively. In contrast, the axial resolution of a typical 10 MHz system is 190 m. Tissue penetration of the UBM is approximately 4-5 mm.
the ultrasound beam strikes the targeted surface perpendicularly. In the UBM manufactured by Paradigm Instruments, the probe is suspended from a gantry arm to minimize motion artifacts, and lateral distortion is minimized by a linear scan format. In the OTI instrument, the probe is small eliminating the need for a suspension system, and a sector scanning method is used (Fig. 16.2).
Procedure
Scanning is performed with the patient in supine position. A flared plastic eyecup of the appropriate size is inserted between the lids, holding methylcellulose or normal saline, which acts as a coupling medium. The reflected signal is best detected when the transducer is oriented so that
261
The ultrasound biomicroscopy provides precise and reliable measurements and relationships of the anterior segment structures. The UBM measurement software measures distance by counting the number of pixels along the measured line, and multiply it by the theoretical size of the pixel. The theoretical precision of measurement of the lateral and axial distances in the commercially available machines is 6 and 12 m, respectively, while the resolutions of the two are 50 and 25 m. The UBM cannot distinguish between two points along an axial line which are less than 25 m apart, but if the points are more than 25 m apart, the distance between them can be measured with 6 m precision. The axial and lateral measurements of the UBM are accurate and reliable, as compared to histologic sections and ultrasound pachymetry. The reproducibility is good in intra-observer UBM measurements, but not in the inter-observer values. Both image acquisition differences and measurement process contribute to the variability. A semiautomated software that calculates the parameters after a single user input of a reference location has improved the reproducibility. Multiple parameters have been proposed to facilitate the quantitative study of UBM measurements (Table 16.1).
262
of the anterior chamber prior to keratoplasty (Fig. 16. 4). In corneal transplant cases, the graft-host junction can be defined. Posterior wound gape and the Descemets stripping can also be imaged.
Limbal Dermoid
Limbal dermoid can be well-delineated with the help of UBM. The extent of the dermoid into the cornea or intraocularly may be demonstrated, and the surgical approach for removal can be planned (Fig. 16.5). The UBM is capable of
Fig.16.4: UBM of an eye with adherent leukoma: visualization of anterior chamber and other structure helps planning of management
Fig.16.5: UBM of a limbal dermoid showing extension into the layers of the cornea, but no intraocular extension
263
Glaucoma
The ability of ultrasound biomicroscopy, to image various angle structures and the ciliary body, has helped to define mechanisms in various types of glaucoma (Fig. 16.7).
Refractive Surgery
Excimer laser keratoablation results in a loss of Bowmans membrane and double lines of the normal corneal surface are converted into a single line.
Intraocular Lenses
The location of optic and haptic of an intraocular lens can be assessed accurately by looking for a strong echo at their interface plane (Fig. 16.6). The technique is used to study different types of intraocular lenses including accommodating intraocular lenses. Studies have been conducted on angle-fixated, iris-fixated (Artisan) and posterior chamber phakic intraocular lenses using the UBM. It is possible to assess distance of phakic intraocular lenses from the corneal endothelium, iris, and the surface of the
Fig.16.7: Iris bomb in uveitic glaucoma: Accumulation of aqueous behind the iris balloons the iris forward
264
Fig.16.9A: UBM of an eye with plateau iris configuration showing narrow-angle due to anterior location of ciliary processes
Fig.16.8B: UBM of the same eye after laser iridotomy, demonstrating opening of the angle
Fig. 16.9C: UBM of the eye (shown in Fig. 16.9B) showing open-angle after laser iridoplasty Fig.16.8C: Eye with angle-closure, UBM showing peripheral anterior synechiae, iridotomy is unlikely to be effective in opening the angle
processes. The ciliary processes provide structural support behind the peripheral iris that prevents it from falling away from the trabecular meshwork following iridectomy. Peripheral iridoplasty can produce thinning of the iris in this region improving angle opening (Figs 16.9A to C).
Supraciliary effusion can produce angleclosure by anterior rotation of the ciliary processes producing direct angle-closure and pupil block secondary to the anterior position of the lens. Supraciliary fluid that is undetectable by other means can be detected by the UBM.
265
Fig. 16.11A: UBM of eye after trabeculectomy showing a filtering bleb (white arrow)
Fig.16.10: UBM showing irido-zonular contact due to posterior bowing of the iris in an eye with pigmentary glaucoma
Fig. 16.11B: UBM showing scarred bleb (black arrow) in failed trabeculectomy
266
Ocular Trauma
Ocular trauma may result in hyphema, cyclodialysis, angle-recession and iridodialysis. UBM can be used in the detection of these conditions, especially in the presence of hazy media. It can be used to locate a foreign body in the angle or the iris (Fig. 16.12). Persistent hypotony after ocular trauma may be due to cyclodialyisis (Fig. 16.13), or cyclitic membrane (Fig. 16.14). The diagnosis may be elucidated by the UBM.
Tumors of Uvea
Tumors of the iris, ciliary body and peripheral choroid lie within the penetration limit of the
Fig.16.14: UBM demonstrating a cyclitic membrane in an eye with persistent hypotony
ultrasound biomicroscope. This imaging method is valuable in measuring tumor thickness, defining tumor extent and differential diagnosis.
Iris Nevi
Iris nevi are benign tumors which do not require any intervention. UBM is useful in measuring the thickness and extent of nevus.
UBM is valuable in measuring the stromal thickness in leukemic infiltration (Fig. 16.15A). It can also be used to assess the effect of radiotherapy (Fig. 16.15B), and follow-up.
Iris Melanomas
Iris melanomas have varied clinical presentations, and differentiation between melanomas and nevi can be difficult, requiring serial observations. UBM is useful in defining the tumor boundaries and also detecting a change in its characteristics.
Fig.16.13: UBM showing cyclodialysis cleft in an eye after blunt trauma (white arrow)
267
Fig.16.17: UBM of ciliary body tumor extending through the angle into the anterior chamber and iris
Iris Cyst
The iridociliary junction is a common location for iris cysts. UBM is useful in differentiating cysts from solid masses. The ultrasound appearance consists of a thin-walled cyst with no internal reflectivity (Fig. 16.16). peripheral choroidal tumors. The anterior borders can be frequently detected and this information can be helpful if radioactive plaque therapy is contemplated.
Scleral Diseases
UBM can differentiate between the diseases of sclera proper and diseases of episclera.
Nodular Scleritis
The involvement of the sclera can be detected by a change in the reflectivity of the scleral tissue. The edematous scleral tissue becomes weakly reflective.
268
Scleral Staphyloma
The UBM can detect the thinning that occurs in a scleral staphyloma and also the changes in the underlying ciliary body.
Episcleritis
Episcleritis appears as a thickening of the episcleral layer without involvement of the sclera itself.
Conclusion
The strength of UBM lies in its ability to produce cross-sections of the living eye at microscopic resolution without affecting the relationships of the structures imaged. It is a tool for qualitative and quantitative assessment of the anterior segment. It has already contributed considerably to our understanding of ocular pathophysiology. The scope of applications of UBM is increasing in the diagnosis and management of various eye diseases.
Bibliography
1. Buchwald HJ, Muller A, Spraul CW, Lang GK. Ultrasound biomicroscopy of conjunctival lesions. Klin Monatsbl Augenheilkd 2003;220(1-2): 29-34. 2. Hoops JP, Ludwig K, Boergen KP, Kampik A. Preoperative evaluation of limbal dermoids using high-resolution biomicroscopy. Graefes Arch Clin Exp Ophthalmol 2001;239(6):459-61. 3. Iishikawa H, Schuman JS. Anterior segment imaging: ultrasound biomicroscopy. Ophthal-
269
TOMOHIRO OTANI
17
Optical coherence tomography (OCT) is a diagnostic technology, which provides a crosssectional image of the anterior eye and the retina in vivo with a high resolution similar to a histological section by light microscopy.1-3 OCT has demonstrated the intraretinal structure of fundus diseases including macular hole, 4 macular edema,5, 6 highly myopic eye.7 It also enables us to evaluate the surgical outcome of macular diseases on the histopathologic level. A third-generation OCT (OCT3), with less than 10-m axial resolution, provides more detailed imaging of the retinal structures than the former one. In this chapter, the principle of OCT, procedures, limitations and the cross-sectional images of various macular diseases using OCT conducted in our institution are being described.
scattering from intraretinal microstructures (Fig. 17.2). These images are similar to those provided by B-mode ultrasound. Low coherence light from a super luminescent diode source connects with a Michelson interferometer. Infrared light from the source is divided at an optical beam-splitter into reference beam and measurement beam. The measurement beam is directed onto the patients eye and is reflected from intraocular structures at different distances. The reflected light (reflected measurement beam) is composed of multiple echoes which include information about the range or distance and thickness of different intraocular structures. The reference beam is
270
Fig. 17.2: The optical interferometer (Courtesy from: Schuman JS, Puliafito CA, Fujimoto JG. Principle of Optical Coherence Tomography. In Optical Coherence Tomography of Ocular Diseases (2nd edn). New Jersey, SLACK Incorporated, 2004)
reflected from a reference mirror. The reflected reference beam returns to the beam-splitter where it combines with the reflected measurement beam. Time delay information between the two light pathways is then determined by a photo diode, which detects back-scattered light along a reference optical delay path. Once the light is detected, a signal is sent which is processed electronically and used within the OCT internal computer data acquisition bank for analysis and storage. Measuring the interferometric signal creates A-mode type scans. Cross sectional images are constructed from a sequence of single longitudinal A-mode type scan. There is no contact between the OCT scanner and the eye. Slit-lamp biomicroscopy of the retina may be performed simultaneously with the image acquisition. The obtained OCT images are displayed in a false color representation. The intensity of the reflected optical signal is represented on a logarithmic scale with varying degrees of brightness. The maximum optical reflection and back-scattering are represented by red-white colors, while the minimum signals are represented by blue-black colors.
Macular Hole
Kishi and Takahashi evaluated the threedimensional structure of idiopathic macular hole (Fig. 17.4) in 89 affected eyes using OCT and scanning laser ophthalmoscopy (SLO).4 In stage 1 hole, OCT revealed retinal split or cystic changes at the fovea in 11 of 15 eyes (73%) and foveal retinal detachment in 4 eyes (27%). Intraretinal splitting involving the perifoveal area was present in 16 eyes with stage 2 hole. A break was present in the anterior cyst wall. The outer retina could not be identified at the fovea by OCT. A full thickness hole surrounded by intraretinal split or cystoid edema was present in all of 50 eyes with stage 3 hole. Opercula were seen in 32 of the 50 eyes. A detached vitreous
271
Fig. 17.3: Normal macula. Fundus photograph (top) and OCT3 (bottom). OCT3 shows a physiologic foveal depression with an intraretinal layered structure. The boundary between the photoreceptor inner segments and outer segments is also seen as a highly reflective band (arrows).
cortex could be observed in 24 of the 32 eyes. Intraretinal split seen by OCT appeared as radiating striae of elevated Henles fiber layer by SLO. The findings show that idiopathic
macular hole initiates as intraretinal split or cysts at the fovea and that a full-thickness macular hole forms when the anterior cyst wall is operculated.
272
C Figs 17.4A to C: Macular hole. A Stage 1 macular hole. OCT3 demonstrates a foveal cyst. B Stage 2 macular hole. OCT3 shows a flap consists of retinal tissue extending from the perifoveal retina. The perifoveal retina has cystic changes. C Stage 3 macular hole. The perifoveal retina is elevated and has cystic changes. An operculum is seen above the hole
273
Fig. 17.6: Preretinal macular fibrosis with pseudohole. Fundus photograph (top) and OCT3 (bottom). The foveal structure showed sharp columnar depression (arrows) surrounded by thickened perifoveal retina Fig. 17.5: Preretinal macular fibrosis. Fundus photograph (top) and OCT3 (bottom). Contraction of preretinal membrane (arrows) caused retinal thickening with fluid accumulation in the outer layer of the retina
on slit-lamp examination, optical coherence tomography disclosed a foveal retinal detachment with retinoschisis in 8 eyes and a foveal retinal detachment in 1 eye. Two of the remaining 23 eyes had retinoschisis. Foveal retinal detachment and retinoschisis are common features in severely myopic eyes with posterior staphyloma. Retinal detachment may precede the formation of a macular hole in severely myopic eyes.
274
Fig. 17.10: Diabetic macular edema with hard exudates. Fundus photograph (top) and OCT3 (bottom). In OCT3 image, hard exudates are seen as highly reflective areas located in the outer retinal layers (arrows)
Fig. 17.8: Diabetic retinopathy with cystoid macular edema. Fluorescein angiography (top) and OCT3 (bottom). In the late phase of angiogram, hyperfluorescent cystoid spaces occupy most of the macula. OCT3 shows round cysts mainly in the outer retina that caused the fovea to protrude
Fig.17.11: Diabetic macular edema with subretinal hard exudates. Fundus photograph (top) and OCT3 (bottom). Fundus photograph shows hard exudates at the fovea. In OCT3 image, subretinal hard exudates (arrows) are observed as highly reflective plaques, which are slightly elevated from the retinal pigment epithelium
Fig. 17.9: Diabetic retinopathy with serous retinal detachment. Fundus photograph (top) and OCT3 (bottom). OCT3 reveals a serous retinal detachment at the fovea (arrows)
retinal swelling (88%), cystoid macular edema (47%), and serous retinal detachment (15%). Some eyes had more than one pathologic change. Retinal swelling was more pronounced in the outer than in the inner retinal layers. Cystoid macular edema was located mainly in the outer retinal layers. In eyes with long-standing cystoid macular edema, cystoid spaces had fused, resulting in a large cystoid cavity involving almost the entire retinal layer. Hard exudates are seen as highly reflective areas located in the
275
C Figs 17.12A to D: Diabetic macular edema. A Before vitrectomy, the retina is thickened with an area of low intraretinal reflectivity (yellow arrows) and cystoid cavities are seen in the retina. The fovea protrudes. A serous retinal detachment is seen at the fovea (white arrows); the foveal thickness is 780 m. The visual acuity is 20/500. B Two months after vitrectomy, a serous retinal detachment (white arrows) is enlarged in diameter. The visual acuity is 20/300. C Four months after vitrectomy, an intraretinal area of low reflectivity is diminished and the serous retinal detachment has resolved; the foveal thickness decreased to 400 m. The visual acuity is 20/200. D Ten months after vitrectomy, the foveal pit is restored. The visual acuity is 20/70
outer retinal layers. In eyes with a serous retinal detachment, hard exudates tend to deposit not only in the retina but also in the subretinal space.12 Otani and Kishi also evaluated the retinal structure before and after vitrectomy for diabetic macular edema13 (Figs 17. 8 and 17. 9). The foveal thickness (the distance between the inner retinal surface and the retinal pigment epithelium) and the retinal thickness (thickness of the neurosensory retina) were measured by OCT preoperatively and postoperatively. All 13 eyes had retinal swelling with a low intraretinal reflectivity. In addition to retinal swelling, there were cystoid spaces in 5 (38%) of 13 eyes, a serous retinal detachment in 3 (23%), and both cystoid spaces and serous detachment in 3 (23%). Six months postoperatively, the mean foveal thickness significantly decreased from 630 to 350 m (P <.01, paired t-test) and the mean thickness of neurosensory retina decreased from 540 to
320 m (P <.01, paired t-test). A serous retinal detachment occurred transiently in 3 eyes. Compared with the preoperative level, the postoperative visual acuity level improved by more than 2 lines in 5 of the 13 eyes (38%), remained the same in 7 eyes (54%), and decreased in 1 eye (8%). Vitrectomy was generally effective in treatment of diabetic macular edema. OCT demonstrated the intraretinal changes of macular edema and the process of edema absorption.
276
Fig. 17.13: Central serous chorioretinopathy. Fundus photograph (top) and OCT (bottom). A fundus photograph shows a serous retinal detachment. In OCT image through the fovea, the detached retina is swollen, with intraretinal areas of low reflectivity
retinal detachment in all 23 eyes. The detached retina was thicker than the reattached retina after resolution of the retinal detachment in all eyes. The retinal thickness at the center of the fovea during the acute phase (range 157 to 236 m; mean SD 196.9 22.6 m) was significantly thicker compared with that after resolution (range, 105 to 152 m; mean SD, 124.8 10.7 m; P<.0001, Wilcoxon test). In the acute phase, areas of low reflectivity localized within the detached retina were observed in 18 of the 23 eyes. In the area of a grayish-white lesion, OCT showed a moderately reflective mass bridging the detached neurosensory retina and retinal pigment epithelium in all 4 eyes; the outer layer of the detached retina was more highly reflective in these eyes. The retinal pigment epithelium was focally detached beneath the subretinal reflective mass in 3 of the 4 studied eyes. In all eyes studied, neurosensory retina was thickened within the area of serous retinal detachment in
Fig. 17.14: Rhegmatogenous retinal detachment. Fundus photograph (top) and OCT (bottom) show the detached retina with intraretinal separation (arrows)
277
Fig. 17.16: Vitelliform macular dystrophy (Vitelliform stage). Fundus photograph (top) and OCT (bottom): OCT shows a highly reflective fusiform thickening of the layer (white arrows) at the level of retinal pigment epithelium and choriocapillaris
Juvenile Retinoschisis
Ikeda et al reported a cross-sectional image of juvenile retinoschisis16(Fig. 17.15). The retina was split into two layers in the central fovea which extended into the perifoveal area. The inner retina contained two highly reflective zones corresponding to the nerve fiber and inner plexiform
layers. Columnar-shaped structures, presumably Meller cells, bridged the separated two layers. Scanning laser ophthalmoscope showed elevation of the Henles fiber layer. These findings seemed to show that the retinal splitting occurs at the outer plexiform layer.
Fig. 17.15: Juvenile retinoschisis. OCT3 shows columnar-shaped structures bridging the separated two layers
278
Conclusion
Examination of ocular fundus is a routine examination in the clinical practice of ophthalmology. Ophthalmologists can observe ocular fundus at 10 m of resolution using a direct ophthalmoscope or a biomicroscope. Because biopsy of the retina is impossible, histopathologic information of retinal disorders has not been well known. OCT allows us to investigate the clinicopathologic correlation of fundus diseases in vivo. As described in this review, OCT has made a great contribution to our understanding of chorioretinal diseases.
References
1. Haung D, Swanson EA, Lin CP, et al. Optical coherence tomography. Science 1991;254:1178-81. 2. Puliafito CA, Hee MR, Schuman JS, Fujimoto JG. Macular diseases. In Optical Coherence Tomography of Ocular Diseases. New Jersey, SLACK Incorporated, 1996. 3. Hee MR, Izatt JA, Swanson EA, et al. Optical coherence tomography of the human retina. Arch Ophthalmol 1995;113:325-32. 4. Kishi S, Takahashi H. Three-dimensional observation of developing macular holes. Am J Ophthalmol 2000;130:65-75. 5. Hee MR, Puliafito CA, Wong C, et al. Quantitative assessment of macular edema with optical coherence tomography. Arch Ophthalmol 1995;113:1019-29.
279
18
History
To understand how visual electrophysiological tests reached its present status, some of the milestones are described here. DuBois-Reymond
280
Electrooculogram
Electrooculogram (EOG) examines the function of the retinal pigment epithelium (RPE) and the interaction between the RPE and the rod photoreceptors.1All vertebrate eyes are like a dipole, with a resting potential in which the cornea is positive with respect to the back of the eye. This creates a standing or resting potential of about 6 millivolts. This standing potential rises when the retina is illuminated to a steady light. EOG measures changes in the standing potential to light and dark conditions. Clinically, EOG measures the standing potential indirectly using the fact that the spatial orientation of a polarized eye is detected by skin electrodes placed nasal and temporal to the eye. Saccadic eye movements result in flow of current around orbit proportional to the magnitude of standing potential of each eye. Skin electrodes record these voltage changes.
Clinical Measurement
Geoffrey Arden and colleagues2,3described the indirect method of recording of clinical EOG.
281
Figs 18.1A to C: EOG recording procedure. A Sites of skin electrode placement. B Ganzfeld fixating lights (LED) 15 degrees apart, with 30 excursion from right to left. C 16 to 20 sweeps per minute following a baseline recording of 6 minutes in white light. Recording is for 15 minutes in dark and 15 minutes in light
282
Fig. 18.2: Showing raw waveforms of the saccades (left) and the final EOG graph (right). Note the light rise and normal Arden ratio of >200% in each eye
the dark trough as a percentage, the Arden index.3A normal index would be > 185% (Fig. 18.2).
Clinical Uses
A normal ERG and abnormal EOG are classically seen in Bests vitelliform macular dystrophy5 (Fig. 18.3) even in very early stages of the disease with minimal fundus changes and in asymptomatic carriers. EOG abnormality is also seen in a variety of RPE and rod-photoreceptor disorders such as retinitis pigmentosa, choroideremia and age-related macular degeneration. EOG is also abnormal in choroidal melanomas and could be an adjunct tool to differentiate melanoma from nevi.6 EOG is normal in isolated inner retinal cell dysfunction such as in congenital stationary night blindness (CSNB) where RPE and photoreceptors are normal. EOG can be used to study drug toxicity against RPE. One must remember that because light is used to provoke the voltage change in EOG, this test cannot separate the photoreceptor and RPE dysfunction. In recent
years, Arden et al.7 have shown that after intake of low doses of ethanol an EOG peak similar to the light-induced EOG peak can be recorded. This could test RPE layer function independent of its interaction with the photoreceptors.7
283
Fig. 18.3: Shows poor light rise on EOG in a patient with subnormal vision and bilateral macular lesions. ERG recordings including macular photoreceptors (PERG) are normal as shown in ERG results
stimulation were altered. They found the slow oscillations were greatest with repeated light and dark periods of 12.5 minutes each, whereas, the greatest amplitude of fast oscillations of EOG were seen when the light and dark cycles were of 1.1 minute each. The amplitude of fast oscillations increased in dark phase and reduced in light phase. The clinical value of these fast oscillations needs further study.
Electroretinogram (ERG)
Due to selective transport of ions, the inside of the photoreceptor cells is more negative than the outside resulting in a standing membrane potential in the dark. Once light falls on the retina, it induces a change in the transmembrane
movement of especially sodium and potassium ions, making the cells hyperpolarized, that is, they become more negative to the extra cellular space than in the dark. These voltage changes are reflected in various ERG components. Various techniques are in clinical use to assess the electrical response of retinal cells to light. The most common of these is the Full-field Flash ERG. Others are Pattern ERG, Focal ERG and Multifocal ERG (Table 18.1). The Flash ERG is the mass response of the neural and nonneural retinal cells to a full field luminance stimulation. The test reflects the function of the photoreceptors and inner nuclear layers of the retina in response to light stimulation. It is recorded by using stimuli delivered by an integrating sphere, called Ganzfeld, which provides a uniform whole field illumination to
284
procedures that allow reproducible ERGs to be recorded under a few defined conditions, from patients of all ages including infants.9,10 Details of the equipment standardization is beyond the scope of this chapter but is available in literature.11
Recording Electrode
The ERG is recorded using corneal or non-corneal electrodes (Fig. 18.5). The closer the electrode is to the cornea, the higher the amplitude one gets, though latency will not change. Prototypes of corneal electrode are Burian-Allen and Jet electrodes. The corneal electrodes can be unipolar like the Jet-electrode or bipolar like the BurianAllen electrode. The Burian-Allen electrode is centrally transparent with a large optical opening and incorporates a device to hold the lids apart. Topical anesthesia and a nonviscous solution like 0.5% methylcellulose are needed. More viscous solutions can attenuate signal amplitude. Corneal electrodes may be difficult to maintain due to a silver coating that needs resurfacing periodically, and are expensive and cause some
the retinal spherical surface.9 The Ganzfeld provides both flash stimulation and a diffuse background for photopic adaptation besides fixation lights (Fig. 18.4) By varying the background illumination, the light or dark-adapted state of the eye and the intensity of the stimulus flash, one can elicit and isolate response from different retinal cells. The ISCEV standard describes simple technical
Fig. 18.4: An integrated sphere called Ganzfeld provides a uniform, whole field illumination to the retinal spherical surface. It provides both flash stimulation and a diffuse background light for photopic adaptation. The inside surface has three light emitting diodes as fixation targets for the eye and also for excursion of the eyes during EOG recordings. A chin rest allows proper positioning of the subject. Two prototypes are shown
285
Fig. 18.5: Electrodes used in visual electrophysiology. Gold-foil and H-K loop electrodes (Courtesy: Dr. G. Holder, London)
discomfort besides rare possibility of corneal abrasion. The advantage, however, is that higher amplitudes are recordable due to proximity to the cornea. All reusable electrodes should be cleaned and sterilized after each use to prevent disease transmission. The non-corneal electrodes include gold foil, the DTL-fiber (Dawson-Trick-Litzkow) and our own devised LVP-Zari electrode.12-14 The LVPZari electrode is disposable, inexpensive, rigid and reliable and made from locally available Zari-embroidery thread. It has a core of nylon (traditionally had cotton thread core) covered with layers of silver, copper and gold, making it a good conductor of electric currents. Due to its nylon core, and multiple metallic coatings, the movement of the fiber across the limbus is minimal, making the recordings very reliable.
The recording electrodes, bipolar or nonbipolar are placed on the cornea. Topical anesthesia is necessary for contact lens electrodes but may not be required for other types of corneal and conjunctival electrodes. It is important to learn the technical requirements of a chosen electrode, to ensure good ocular contact, to ensure proper electrode impedance, to ensure that waveforms are comparable to standard responses, and to define both normal values and variability (which may be different with different electrodes) for their own laboratory.9,10 Skin electrodes are in general not recommended as active ERG recording electrodes. Reference electrodes: Reference electrodes may be incorporated into the contact lens-speculum assembly as in Burian-Allen (Fig. 18.5) or can be placed near each ipsilateral outer canthus
286
Electrode Placement
After topical anesthesia, corneal electrodes are filled with a mild viscous coupling solution such as 0.5% methylcellulose and inserted gently like a contact lens in the center of the cornea, with the lid speculum holding the lids apart simultaneously. The non-corneal electrode is placed in the lower fornix as close to the inferior limbus as possible. It should be stable, non-mobile and not injure the cornea. The reference electrode is placed at the outer canthus. An ear-clip electrode serves as a ground electrode. For all skinelectrodes, good contact is essential with low impedance. To achieve this grease and dead cells on the skin are removed by rubbing with an abrasive and an alcohol pad. Figure 18.6 (left) shows a subject with the LVP Zari electrode in place, held across the fornix with a crocodile clip (red color) and the reference electrode (blue color) at the outer canthus. The ear-clip ground electrode is also seen. All the electrodes are then connected to a junction box (middle) which sends the signals through an interface box into the
Technical Requirements
The system should be capable of attenuating the flash strength from standard flash over a range of at least 3 log units, either continuously or
Fig. 18.6: LVP electrode placement (left) and connections (middle) to junction box (arrow). ERG in progress (right)
287
Clinical Protocol9,10
ERG is recorded after full pupillary dilatation so that all parts of retina get illuminated. Avoid any extra illumination (as in fluorescein angiography or fundus photography) but if these examinations have been performed, a period of dark adaptation of at least one hour is needed before scotopic recording. The subject is placed in a completely dark room for 30 minutes. Next, the subject with electrodes in place is seated comfortably with the chin on the chin rest and eyes open with the face inside the Ganzfeld bowl (Fig. 18.6). The height of patient should be adjusted so that the neck and back muscles are not in a tensed-up position as this can induce muscle-generated artifacts. The cable from junction box is fixed to the shoulder at the subjects end and plugged
288
Fig. 18.7: Normal Flash ERG waveforms from a normal fundus. Under scotopic conditions, we can record the isolated rod response (IRR), the maximal retinal response (MCR), and the scotopic oscillatory potentials (OPs). The photopic responses include the single flash for cones (PSF) and the 30-Hertz flicker responses (30 Hz)
Oscillatory Potentials
The oscillatory potentials (Ops pronounced as opees) are small but high frequency oscillations
on the ascending limb of the b-wave of the maximal combined response. These are extracted and amplified to present the oscillatory potentials as seen in Figure 18.7. They are generated in relation to amacrine cell activity in the middle and inner retinal cell layers. Under scotopic condition and using standard flash intensity as a stimulus, other wavelets are removed by resetting of the filters. The high-pass filter must be reset from the usual 0.3 Hz to 75 Hz, so that an overall bandpass of 75 at high end and 300 Hz at low end is achieved. The response varies with stimulus repetition rate and changes after the first stimulus. Flashes should be given 15 seconds apart to the dark-adapted eyes (1.5 seconds apart to light-adapted eyes), and only the second or subsequent responses should be retained or averaged.9,10 Normal response is characterized by 3 major peaks followed by 1-2 smaller peaks. Comparison with normal individual laboratory values is often adequate to assess any abnormality.
289
290
Limitations of ERG
ERG has following limitations: 1. Flash ERG is affected only if the retinal dysfunction is widespread. In localized conditions, even if they involve high-cell density area say of the macula, the flash ERG can be normal. This is seen in conditions like Stargardts heredomacular degeneration and early stages of cone dystrophy or localized RP. Ganglion cell function is not reflected in flash ERG. Flash ERG does not correlate with visual acuity. 2. Diurnal variation exists in rod-ERG b-wave amplitudes, therefore, it should be accounted in serial measurements or research protocols. 3. A number of artifacts such as a blink reflex, muscular tension artifacts (photomyoclonic response) or improper electrode placement and contact can lead to erroneous results. The electrophysiologist should be aware of these and know how to get valid recordings. 4. ERG recordings require a certain level of cooperation from the patient. Fixation is not critical in ERG recording but photophobia, claustrophobia and excessive blinking and anxiety are known to alter the response. 5. Hazy media and miotic pupils can cause erroneous results, as sufficient light does not reach the photoreceptors. Appropriate adjustments would be required to get meaningful data. 6. Adjustments are also needed for age and high refractive error as these affect the ERG responses.
Normal Values
Due to multiple variables that can affect the ERG waveforms, it is recommend that each laboratory should confirm normal values for its own equipment and patient population taking an appropriate sample size. All ERG reporting should include normal values and the limits of normal.
Pattern Electroretinogram
Some of the limitations of flash ERG can be overcome by more recent techniques of pattern
291
Fig. 18.9: PERG measurements (Top). Bottom left shows PERG stimulus and bottom right shows actual recording of PERG from two eyes
292
Clinical Uses
Pattern ERG is most useful in assessing the visual loss of unknown etiology. It helps in differentiating visual loss due to macular photoreceptors/ macular inner retinal cells from diseases of ganglion cell and optic nerves. PERG also helps to monitor early drug toxicity.21 Primary evaluation of macular function: In macular disorders, the P50 component of the PERG is abnormal, often with preservation of the N95:P50 ratio. P50 amplitude is usually affected, with latency changes only, occasionally being seen, particularly in association with macular edema or serous detachment at the macula.19 Primary macular dysfunction such as Stargardt-fundus flavimaculatus, will usually have a normal (rarely subnormal) flash ERG and an abnormal PERG. In generalized retinal dysfunction with macular involvement (cone-rod dystrophy) both ERG and PERG are abnormal. In patients with rod-cone dystrophy, but normal central retinal function, the PERG may be normal even when the Flash ERG is almost extinguished. Ganglion cell dysfunction: Primary ganglion cell dysfunction is associated with marked N95 component loss, particularly in Lebers hereditary optic atrophy and advanced dominant optic atrophy.19 Very severe optic nerve disease will also reduce P50 amplitude, and P50 latency. Complete extinction of the PERG in relation to optic nerve disease rarely if ever occurs, providing at least one eye has enough vision to maintain fixation for binocular PERG recording. The PERG may still readily be detectable in an eye with no light perception.19 It must be remembered that though pattern VEP is primarily used to detect
293
Limitations of PERG
1. The PERG amplitudes are very small and due to technical demands, not all laboratories record PERG as a routine. Stringent controls are required to avoid artifacts. The ISCEV standards are available for PERG recordings.20 2. Patient cooperation is essential in recording the PERG. 3. All equipments for ocular electrophysiology do not have the capability to perform PERG. 4. In eyes with hazy media where the pattern stimulus cannot be projected on the macula, results can be erroneous.
294
Fig. 18.10: The international 10/20 system of electrode placement for midline single channel VEP. Inset shows Pattern VEP recording in progress
Fig. 18.11: Normal pattern-reversal to three different check sizes (top-15, 30 and 60 minutes), Pattern-onset (bottom left) and Flash (bottom right) VEP
295
Normal Waveforms22
1. Flash VEP: It consists of a series of positive and negative peaks that are designated in numerical sequence. Commonest components recorded are N2 and P2 at 90 and 120 msec, respectively (Fig. 18.11). 2. Pattern-reversal VEP: The peaks are named as negative or positive followed by the latency. Commonest wave used for clinical cases is the P100 component, (positive peak at 100 msec) since it is a very robust measure with minimal interocular and inter-subject measurement variation (Fig. 18.11). 3. Pattern-onset/offset VEP: Three components described are C1 (positive at 75 msec), C2 (negative at 125 msec) and C3 (positive at 150 msec). With a stimulated hemifield, the response will appear contralateral to the hemifield stimulated.
Limitations of VEP
VEP has following limitations: 1. Age, refractive error, inattention and conscious defocusing of the pattern affect the VEP latency. 2. Stimulus parameters such as contrast, luminance, check size and field size are important determinants of the waveform (Fig. 18.11) and it is essential for each laboratory to establish their own normal controls. 3. Since the amplitudes of VEP are very small, surrounding noise can easily contaminate them and, therefore, strict vigil has to be kept on the recording equipment, recording technique and the stimulus parameters used. 4. Numerous specialized types of VEP22 are being assessed and these are still used as
Photoreceptor Dysfunction
In widespread genetic retinal photoreceptor disorders like retinitis pigmentosa (RP) or choroideremia, a profound reduction of ERG is seen even when retina looks apparently normal. The diagnosis of RP is often obvious in patients with history of night blindness, progressive peripheral field constriction and typical retinal changes including equatorial pigment migration, arterial attenuation, RPE atrophy and disk pallor as seen in a 40 years male with visual acuity of 20/50 and residual visual fields of 10 degrees centrally (Fig. 18.12A, top). ERG has a limited role in diagnosis but helps to assess residual
296
macular photoreceptor function. In the test ERG may not be recordable with routine testing using standard flash. With extensive filtering and averaging (Fig. 18.12B, bottom), response (arrow) can be elicited identifying residual cone function. PERG is a more reliable method of eliciting residual central macular function (Fig. 18.13). Fields are also important in such cases to define legal blindness and functional disability in the patient. ERG, however, is essential in research studies to demonstrate diffuse, severe photoreceptor dysfunction that characterizes even early stages of RP. A normal ERG recorded beyond 6 years of age practically rules out possibility of developing RP in future. ERG helps to diagnose patients with atypical findings and also in carrier detection. Flash ERG in RP (Figs 18.12 to 18.14) can be either extinguished, or show a rod-cone or rarely a cone-rod or even a negative type of ERG dysfunction. All such types usually point to a progressive disease especially if implicit time abnormalities are present. True sector or localized central (restricted) disease (Fig. 18.15) may give amplitude reduction with no implicit time
change, whereas diffuse or generalized disease is usually associated with abnormal implicit time.24,25
297
298
Fig. 18.12: Unrecordable PERG and flash ERG in advanced retinitis pigmentosa depicting macular involvement VA 20/80 OU, Fields central 10 degrees, night blindness present (Top row). Extensive filtering and averaging of the maximal combined response to elicit a microvolt ERG (arrow, outside ISCEV standard) showing residual retinal function in patient of RP with visual acuity of 20/800 and macular atrophy (Bottom row)
Fig. 18.13: Preserved PERG in a patient of RP with extinguished flash ERG responses showing macular sparing. Visual acuity of a 25-year male was 20/25 and visual fields showed central island of 10 degrees
299
Fig. 18.14: Cone-rod dystrophy: Retinal dystrophy with Bulls eye macular lesion, arterial narrowing, peripheral RPE degeneration and disk pallor. ERG showed absent cone functions with subnormal but recordable isolated rod response suggestive of cone-rod dystrophy in a 29 years patient with VA 20/80. Note large blink artifacts towards end of recordings (arrows) that are not uncommon due to photophobia in these subjects
Fig. 18.15: Central RP: Fundus photograph showing central location of pigmentary retinopathy with normal periphery. ERG shows subnormal rod and cone functions and ERG is not extinguished. The disease is likely to remain localized and minimally progressive. Visual acuity of patient 20/80, central scotoma on fields but with no night blindness
300
Cone Dystrophies
Cone dystrophies (Fig. 18.16) have normal rod responses, but subnormal, though not extinguished, cone responses.27 The 30 Hz flicker response usually shows both amplitude reduction and delayed implicit time. In early stages, the patient may present with normal macula and mild temporal disc pallor and be misdiagnosed as optic nerve dysfunction if abnormal VEP is demonstrated, without recording the ERG. In later years such patients develop typical Bulls eye lesion. Some patients can have supernormal rod responses. One common presentation of cone
Fig. 18.16: Cone dystrophy: Male 36 year with VA 20/200, color vision loss and central scotoma. Localized cone dystrophy involving only macular photoreceptors, it shows severely reduced and delayed P50 in PERG. Other flash ERG responses are normal including photopic responses as the peripheral cones (that are more in numbers than macular cones) are uninvolved
301
Fig. 18.17: One of the commonest indications for ERG testing in a patient with a visual loss of unknown etiology. This 42-year-old female had history of mild visual loss since 4-5 years. The best corrected visual acuity was 20/ 40 in each eye. Clinically, ocular examinations including detailed anterior and posterior segment evaluation were normal. Visual fields showed no abnormality. ERG showed markedly subnormal, but not absent, cone flicker response (arrow) with normal rod response suggestive of an early adult-onset cone dystrophy. The photopic single flash is not depicted
Causes of negative ERG28 include congenital stationary night blindness (CSNB, complete and incomplete), fundus albipunctatus, Oguchi's disease (Figs 18.18 to 18.20),29 X-linked retinoschisis,30 quinine toxicity, melanoma associated retinopathy (MAR),31 Battens disease, and occasionally in cone-rod dystrophy (Table 18.5). Carcinoma associated retinopathy (CAR) does not usually give a negative ERG but profound global ERG reduction in keeping with dysfunction at the level of the photoreceptor.31 It occurs due to damage from circulating antibodies. Central retinal artery obstruction (CRAO) also has a negative ERG (vide infra). In patient of Oguchis disease an increased amplitudes of responses in PERG and single flash cone ERG (Fig. 18.19) may occur after prolonged dark adaptation that also changes the golden metallic color of retina to a relatively normal color.
TABLE 18.5: CONDITIONS ASSOCIATED WITH ELECTRONEGATIVE ERG (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (v) (vi) (vii) (viii) CSNB/Oguchi Juvenile retinoschisis CRAO, CRVO Familial optic atrophy Siderosis bulbi Quinine Some forms of RP and cone-rod dystrophy Melanoma associated retinopathy, CAR
angiography or fundus appearance may not detect the true extent of retinal ischemia.32,33 ERG is an indispensable and extremely powerful but unfortunately underutilized tool to differentiate ischemic from non-ischemic obstruction of the central retinal vein (Figs 18.21 and 18.22). Reduced b-wave amplitude has 80-90% sensitivity and 70-80% specificity to detect inner retinal ischemia. An absolute increase of more than 37 msec in latency of the flicker ERG responses or a difference of more than 7 msec between affected and normal eye are almost pathognomic of ischemic type of CRVO in a given
302
A1 Figs 18.18A and B: Oguchi's disease. A & A1 Fundus appearance before and B & B1 2 hours after dark adaptation. Corresponding ERG are shown in Figure 18.19
B1
clinical setting. Reliable information from FFA may be available only in 50-60% cases of CRVO due to media haze, extensive hemorrhages, poor quality photographs and inability to visualize peripheral retina. ERG circumvents all these limitations as it is a global response from the whole retina and is not too much affected by media haze. Other conditions like ocular ischemic syndrome34 (Fig. 18.23), central retinal artery occlusion (Fig. 18.24) and ophthalmic artery occlusion (extinguished ERG) 35 are also very well detected on ERG. The negative ERG in central retinal artery occlusion (CRAO) 35 occurs due to
the double blood supply of the retina. The RPE/ photoreceptors (a wave) are spared as they are supplied via choroidal circulation, but bipolar cells and amacrine cells (b-wave and oscillatory potentials) are affected as they are supplied via central retinal artery. In ophthalmic artery obstruction where both retinal and choroidal circulation are affected, the ERG is unrecordable as all retinal cell layers are involved.35 In ocular ischemic syndrome ERG is extremely useful since clinical presentation of this under diagnosed clinical entity is variable.36 In diabetic retinopathy37progressive abnormalities in ERG are seen with progression of the
303
Fig. 18.19: Oguchi's disease: ERG findings after 20 minutes and after 2 hours of dark adaptation in Oguchi's disease. In each case the left graph is before and right graph is after the prolonged dark adaptation. The OPs and on-off responses were recorded only once before prolonged dark adaptation and show absence of off-response. Baseline findings are similar to those seen in complete form of CSNB with normal fundus with the exception of a much smaller or nearly absent MCR b-wave in classical complete CSNB
Fig. 18.20: Oguchi's disease: Negative ERG with preserved isolated rod responses and photopic flash and flicker ERG suggestive of incomplete CSNB
304
Fig. 18.21: Non-ischemic CRVO: A 28-year male had mild blurring of vision since 5 days due to CRVO with mild macular edema. The full field ERG of right eye is very much comparable to the left eye; both of which are within normal limits suggestive of non-ischemic CRVO. Note the PERG is showing reduced P50 amplitude in the right eye compared to left eye. Although the vision is same (20/20) in both eyes but the macular function of the right eye is not same as the left eye possibly due to macular edema leading to symptomatic reduced contrast sensitivity in the patient
retinopathy. The oscillatory potentials show profound reduction in case of disk new vessels (NVD). The ERG can be subnormal even before clinical retinopathy, possibly due to metabolic effects on the retinal cells. ERG, however, cannot predict accurately the presence of PDR and is, therefore, not used clinically for monitoring diabetic retinopathy.
are markedly affected and white flecks may be seen in the retina. Visual acuity is unaffected. Similarly, ERG abnormalities can be seen in drug toxicity especially with hydroxychloroquine,38 chloroquine, quinine and thioridazine. VEP is useful to detect ethambutol toxicity (Fig. 18.25). ERG can detect and prognosticate siderotic changes in eyes with retained iron IOFB.31 Initially ERG has a subnormal b-wave on maximal combined scotopic response that can progress to a negative ERG with time and ultimately become extinguished. Removal of IOFB in eyes with recordable ERG, may lead to improvement in ERG changes and a stable outcome. In advanced siderosis, removal of IOFB will not stop progressive visual loss and sometimes phthisis bulbi develops.
305
Fig. 18.22: Ischemic CRVO in right eye and non-ischemic in left eye. Right eye has reduced b/a wave ratio and increased latency of b-wave in MCR; reduced amplitudes and delayed stimulus-to-peak time of 30 Hz flicker with absence of PERG, isolated rod response and oscillatory potentials. Left eye has no delays in responses but reduced amplitudes of all waveforms
fication of an underlying systemic disease such as abetalipoproteinemia, neuronal ceroid lipofuscinosis, mucopolysccharidoses and cystinosis.
306
Fig. 18.23: Ocular ischemic syndrome: A 68-year female with VA 20/50 and early cataract in each eye. Fundus had features of NPDR, dilated veins and minimal disk pallor. ERG showed reduced amplitude of rod mediated inner retinal responses (IRR), and reduced b/a wave ratio in maximal combined response (MCR).The inner retinal ischemia was depicted by reduced amplitudes and poorly recordable oscillatory potentials, with delayed stimulus-to-peak time of 30-Hz flicker ERG. Carotid artery doppler (not shown) showed moderate atheromatous changes. Patient developed neovascular glaucoma six months later without worsening of retinopathy in the right eye
3. Anterior ischemic optic neuropathy: In anterior ischemic optic neuropathy (AION) the PERG shows normal P50 amplitude and latency, elevation of N95, normal flash ERG and reduced amplitude with normal P100 latency in VEP (Fig. 18.27). Using multichannel VEP recordings, the chiasmal lesions, such as pituitary tumors, show a crossed asymmetry where there is an abnormal distribution over the two hemispheres which is in an opposite direction for the two eyes.45 Stimulus parameters are crucial for accurate localization. In general, use of a large field, large check stimulus gives paradoxical lateralization 45 whereas a small field, small check stimulus gives anatomical lateralization. Retrochiasmal lesions give an
307
Fig. 18.24: CRAO: Left eye with CRAO shows preserved a-wave and absent b-wave (negative ERG) in maximal combined response depicting preservation of outer retinal cell layers supplied by choroidal vasculature and ischemia in inner retinal layers supplied by central retinal artery. Right eye responses are normal
uncrossed asymmetry where there is an abnormal distribution that is the same for the two eyes. Serial VEP recordings can help detect recurrences or non-responsiveness to medical therapy as VEP abnormalities can occur before visual fields or visual acuity become abnormal. 4. Ocular albinism: In some cases of ocular albinism, the condition may not be apparent in the absence of typical phenotypic expression of skin or iris, but child can have nystagmus and poor vision due to an albino genotype. All albinos, irrespective of genotype or phenotype exhibit misrouting. Heterozygote carriers do not demonstrate misrouting. The diagnosis of the intracranial misrouting
of albinism, where the majority of optic nerve fibers from each eye do not decussate to the contralateral hemisphere, is readily demonstrated by multichannel VEP. Abnormalities may occur in response to either pattern appearance or diffuse flash stimulation, but the flash VEP appears to be more effective in infants and the pattern appearance VEP in adults. 5. Visual acuity assessment: Objective assessment of visual acuity is performed with pattern appearance stimulation using a very brief appearance time in order to minimize the possibility of voluntary closure or defocusing. 6. Other optic nerve diseases: Lebers hereditary optic neuropathy (LHON), toxic and nutri-
308
Fig. 18.25: Ethambutol toxicity: This 18-years male has rapidly progressive, bilateral sequential loss of vision from 4 months (20/400). There was bilateral optic disk pallor with ill-sustained pupillary reactions but no RAPD. The pattern VEP was unrecordable. Flash ERG was normal. In PERG, the N95 was absent (arrow) and P50 was preserved confirming the patient to have bilateral optic neuropathy. Visual fields showed central 7 degrees of scotoma in both eyes. History of antitubercular treatment in the past pointed to a diagnosis of possible ethambutol toxicity
tional optic neuropathies and traumatic optic neuropathy show variable changes in amplitude and latency of VEP depending on extent of involvement. 7. Visual loss assessment in infants and children: VEP is a useful tool along with ERG and other clinical assessments to differentiate various conditions such as cortical visual impairment, delayed visual maturation, and amblyopia. 8. Malingering: Along with other tests, VEP helps to differentiate malingering from visual pathway lesions. Pattern onset is a useful
309
Fig. 18.26: Rod monochromatism: Showing poorly recordable PERG (due to nystagmus), and absent cone-mediated responses (PSF, 30 Hz) with normal scotopic rod-mediated responses (IRR, MCR). This child of 8 years had VA of 20/400, congenital nystagmus that had reduced with time and photophobia with complete achromatopsia
Responses are recorded to a scaled hexagonal pattern-reversal stimulus in photopic conditions (Fig. 18.28) although some laboratories are attempting to record scotopic mfERG also. MfERG helps to distinguish between diseases of the outer retina and ganglion cells or optic nerves. Along with multifocal VEP (mfVEP),48 the mfERG helps to differentiate organic and non-organic causes of visual loss. There are some limitations of these techniques. Since it is an evolving technology the recording parameters and interpretation are still not standardized, though guidelines have been formulated.49 The techniques are still not widely available. Full field ERG helps to evaluate the function of the retina as a whole. However, it cannot detect focal areas of abnormal function. Multifocal ERG is a new technique. It allows analysis of local ERG responses to assess focal retinal function. Basic technology is similar to full-field ERG in some
aspects. In mfERG the recording, ground and reference electrodes and their placement close to or on the cornea, lateral canthus and ear lobe are similar to the routine ERG. Recording is done with dilated pupils with subject placed in ordinary room light for 15 minutes before testing.
46,47
Stimulus can be delivered by a cathode ray tube (CRT), i.e. monitor LCD projectors, LED arrays or scanning laser ophthalmoscope. The commonest frame frequency of the CRT is 75 Hz and should never be 50 or 60 Hz as this is similar to the line current frequency which interferes as noise with the recordings. Stable fixation is essential to get reliable mfERG recordings and various fixation targets and monitoring devices may be used that do not interfere with the recordings.
310
Fig. 18.27: Anterior ischemic optic neuropathy: A 48-year-old male had one month reduction of vision in the left eye. VA was 6/6 and 6/60 in the right and left eyes respectively. Left eye showed diffuse field loss (not shown). Right eye color fundus (Top left) and red free photograph (Middle left) showed normal color of the disk with few RPE changes at macula. Color fundus photograph of the left eye (Top right) showed small disk with no cup and diffuse pallor. Red free photograph of left eye (Middle right) showed 3 quadrants disk pallor with sparing of inferotemporal segment. Pattern ERG showed normal P50 and N95 responses in right eye. Left eye showed reduced amplitude and delayed latency of P50, with secondary elevation of N95 component (arrow) (Extreme top right). The pattern VEP had normal amplitude and latency in right eye (Bottom right) but was poorly recordable in the left eye (Bottom left)
The retina is stimulated with a black and white pattern of hexagonal elements each of which has a 50% chance of being illuminated every time the frame changes. The hexagonal pattern was designed to compensate for the local differences in signal density (cone density) across
the posterior retina. Thus the central hexagons are smaller than the peripheral ones (Fig. 18.28). Each hexagon element follows a fixed predetermined sequence called m-sequence that controls the order of flicker of the stimulus elements between light and dark. This sequence
311
Fig. 18.28: Normal multifocal ERG stimulus and variety of output display
is designed in such a way that the overall luminance of the screen over the time of recording is relatively stable, i.e. equiluminant. The overall stimulus pattern should subtend a visual angle of 20-30 degrees on either side of fixation. The stimulus region can be divided into different numbers of hexagons such as 61, 103 or 241. Duration of recording varies from 4-8 minutes depending on whether 61 or 103 elements are used. Various artifacts in mfERG recordings include electrical noise, movement errors due to fixation losses, eccentric fixation, shadowing errors due to edge of refraction lenses, and errors due to too much averaging.
the focal ERG signal associated with each element is calculated. The data obtained can be displayed in various ways; commonly as a topographic array, a three-dimensional plot or as group averages (Fig. 18.28). The trace arrays are essential to display as they not only show the topographical variations due to focal pathology but also demonstrate the quality of the records. It is important to remember that the tracings of mfERG are not responses in the sense of direct electrical signals from a local region of the retina. The mfERG waveforms are a mathematical extraction of signals that correlate with the time that one portion of the screen is illuminated. The signals are hence influenced by adaptation effects from previous stimuli and by scattered light from other fundus areas. The typical waveform of the primary mfERG (first order or first order kernel K1) is a biphasic
312
Conclusion
The objective information provided by electrophysiological examination of the visual
Fig. 18.29: Central areolar atrophy: It shows subnormal PERG, normal full-field ERG and reduced multifocal ERG. Right bottom shows clinical fundus picture
313
Fig. 18.30: Multifocal ERG in Stargardt's heredomacular degeneration showing reduced central cone function
system is important in the diagnosis and management of diseases of visual pathway. The clinician recording the waveforms and the one interpreting the test results should be thoroughly conversant with the pitfalls and interrelation of various tests ordered. The electrophysiology results must always be
interpreted and correlated to the clinical and other test parameters to avoid misdiagnosis. Newer techniques in this field such as multifocal ERG, multifocal VEP, focal macular ERG and motion VEP are constantly evolving to improve our diagnostic ability and understanding of the visual pathway.
TABLE 18.6: NORMAL VALUES IN THE LVPEI LABORATORY USING THE METROVISION SYSTEM (FIG. 18.7) Response a-wave Amplitude Latency (microvolts) (milliseconds) 105-130 20.0-22.0 b-wave Amplitude Latency (microvolts) (milliseconds) 130-160 350-450 120-180 100-150 90-110 45.004 27-31 33-35
314
References
1. Welber RG, Eisner A. Retinal function and physiological studies. In: Retinal Dystrophies and Degenerations. Newsome DA (Ed). New York, Raven Press 1988;44-69. 2. Arden GB, Barrada A, Kelsey JH. New clinical test of retinal function based on the standing potential of the eye. Br J Ophthalmol 1962;46: 449-67. 3. Arden GB, Fojas MR. Electrophysiological abnormalities in pigmentary degenerations of the retina. Arch Ophthalmol 1962;68:369-89. 4. Marmor MF, Zrenner E (for the International Society for Clinical Electrophysiology of Vision): Standard for Clinical Electrooculography. Doc Ophthalmol 1993;85:115-24. 5. Krill AE, Morse PA, Potts AM, Klein BA. Hereditary vitelliruptive macular degeneration. Am J Ophthalmol 1966;61:1405-15. 6. Brink HM, Pinckers AJ, Verbeek AM. The electrooculogram in uveal melanoma: A prospective study. Doc Ophthalmologica 1990;75:329-34. 7. Arden GB, Wolf JE. The human electrooculogram: interaction of light and alcohol. Invest Ophth Vis Sci 2000;41:2722-29. 8. Kolder H, Brecher GA. Fast oscillations of the corneoretinal potential in man. Arch Ophthalmol 1966;75:232-37. 9. Marmor MF, Zrenner E (for the International Society for Clinical Electrophysiology of Vision): Standard for Clinical Electroretinography (1994 Update). Doc Ophthalmol 1995;89:199-210.
315
316
19
Microbial keratitis may be caused by bacteria, fungi, parasites or viruses and each of these may produce a spectrum of disease which may or may not have distinctive clinical appearance. Many a time it may not be possible to discriminate between infected or non-infected corneas. To minimize morbidity that may occur secondary to delay in diagnosis and to achieve favorable outcome within a reasonable cost and time, laboratory investigations are indicated in patients with suspected microbial keratitis. Two entirely different protocols are required to be followed while investigating viral and nonviral corneal ulcers, so determined on the basis of clinical features. A combination of the two protocols may be called for when a distinction of viral versus non-viral is not obvious clinically. In the interest of clarity, this chapter is divided in two parts to describe microbiologic procedures required for work-up of clinically non-viral and viral corneal ulcers. Familiarity of ophthalmologists to the functions, limitations, and scopes of microbiology laboratory is important for proper and meaningful interpretation of results. A well equipped ocular microbiology laboratory with well trained technical personnel has great advantages over a general microbiology laboratory, in handling
Collection of Samples
Prior to the collection of sample from the corneal ulcer itself, it is generally recommended to obtain a culture from the lids and conjunctiva of both the infected and the uninfected eye.2 This procedure is supposed to help in two ways: firstly, the organism(s) grown from the uninvolved
317
318
Media
Fig. 19.1: Corneal scraping collection tray containing culture media, blades, glass slides marker pen, reagents and coverslips
scrapings are plated directly onto culture media or smeared onto clean glass slides by the side of the patient in the clinic or operating room. It would help to maintain a corneal collection kit in the clinic or operating room containing a set of media, sterile slides (wrapped in foil), spatula/blades, glass marking pencil and swabs (Fig. 19.1) in case the microbiology laboratory cannot be reached and requested to provide the materials whenever required. Corneal biopsy tissue can be transported to the microbiology laboratory in a sterile dry Petri dish or in a sterile bottle with sterile saline. Aqueous fluid is usually collected and transported in a tuberculin syringe. Exudates from the anterior chamber may also be directly plated on culture media and smeared on slides.
smears. Preferred media may be selectively included based on clinical impression, for example, non-nutrient agar for a suspected Acanthamoeba keratitis patient. A schematic diagram to guide non-viral corneal ulcer workup is shown in Figure 19.2.
319
suffices in most instances for the examination of the smears except when fluorescent stains (calcofluor white or acridine orange) are used which require a fluorescence microscope.
Culture Methods
Inoculation: Agar plates such as blood agar (BA), chocolate agar (CA), are inoculated by lightly streaking both sides of the blade/spatula over a surface in a row of separate C-shaped marks without penetrating the agar. This procedure helps distinguish valid growth from plate contaminants (Fig. 19.3). Slopes of Sabouraud dextrose agar (SDA) or potato dextrose agar (PDA) in bottles are similarly inoculated by making a row of streaks from below upwards. Liquid media such as brain heart infusion broth
Fig. 19.3: Blood agar inoculated with corneal scraping and incubated at 35C for 48 hours showing confluent gray, moist colonies (Pseudomonas aeruginosa) on the inoculum (C streaks) and a contaminant colony away from the inoculum
(BHI) is inoculated by agitating the blade/spatula directly in the broth. To facilitate this procedure
320
321
Fig. 19.5: Antibiotic susceptibility test for Pseudomonas aeruginosa isolated from corneal ulcer. The diameter of zone of inhibition around antibiotic discs is measured and reported as sensitive, intermediate, or resistant (Disk diffusion test)
Fig. 19.4: Acanthamoeba trophozoites (irregular, vacuolated) on the surface of NNA with E. coli (original magnification 500)
bacteria are used to determine sensitivity by diskdiffusion method. In this method (Kirby-Bauer) the bacteria is cultured on Mueller-Hinton agar, and antibiotic impregnated disks are applied. After incubation, the diameter of the zone of inhibition around each disk gives an approximation of susceptibility or resistance of the organism (Fig. 19.5). Commercially available kits provide a zone size interpretative chart to facilitate interpretation. Slow-growing bacteria and anaerobes cannot be reliably tested with diskdiffusion method. Estimating the minimal inhibitory concentrations (MIC) of antibiotics may provide a more useful information than labeling organisms as sensitive or resistant,4 especially because the results of disk-diffusion tests relate to levels of drug achievable in serum and do not relate directly to concentration of drug produced in the preocular tear film and ocular tissues by standard routes of administration. The MIC of a drug can be tested by broth dilution or agar dilution method. The antibiotic is serially diluted and added to tubes with broth or wells of a microtiter plate or incorporated into agar plates. A standard suspension of the organism is then inoculated. The MIC is recorded as the lowest concentration with no visible
322
Figs 19.6A and B: Corneal scrapings stained with KOH + CFW showing A Septate fungal filaments, and B Acanthamoeba cysts under fluorescence microscope (original magnification 500)
Though reported to be useful in the detection of bacteria in corneal scrapings,20 we do not have much experience with acridine orange. However, we have used calcofluor white (CFW) for several years and find the stain very useful in the detection of fungi and Acanthamoeba in corneal scrapings (Figs 19.6A and B). The Gram-stain is useful in identifying bacteria, fungi, as well as Acanthamoeba cysts (Figs 19.7A to D). Precipitated stain, carbon, salt crystals, and necrotic debris can lead to troublesome artefacts in Gram-stained smears. It is easier to detect Gram-positive bacteria (especially S. pneumoniae) than Gram-negative bacteria. Gram-variable bacteria may sometimes be seen.21 Fungal hyphae and Acanthamoeba cysts stain variably since their cell walls do not stain well and may often be
323
1. Flood with Giemsa solution for 45-60 minutes 2. Rinse in 95% ethanol 1. Add one drop of 10% KOH with 10% glycerol 2. Place a coverslip 3. Apply nail polish around the coverslip edges to prevent drying 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Add one drop of 10% KOH Add one drop of 0.1% calcofluor white with 0.1% Evans blue solution Place a coverslip Examine under UV light Flood fixed smear with hot (steaming) strong carbol fuchsin and leave for 5 minutes Rinse with water Decolorize with 20% H2SO4 for 1-2 minutes Rinse with water Flood with methylene blue counter stain for 2 minutes Rinse with water and allow to dry Flood fixed smear with strong carbol fuchsin for 2 minutes Rinse with water Decolorize with 1% H 2SO4 Rinse with water Flood with methylene blue counter stain for 2 minutes Rinse with water and allow to dry
1. Mix specimen colony in a drop of LPCB 2. Apply coverslip 3. Apply nail polish around edges of coverslip to prevent drying 1. Mix specimen in 0.01% of acridine orange 2. Apply coverslip 3. Examine under UV light
seen as negative outlines (Fig. 19.7). Trophozoites of Acanthamoeba are difficult to recognize owing to their irregular morphology and similarity to macrophages.22 Giemsa-stained smear serves as a supportive smear. Cytological details are seen well and bacteria, fungi as well as Acanthamoeba cysts can be seen.
Arbitrary quantification of bacteria per high power field may help determine the significance as bacteria comprising the indigenous microflora of the conjunctiva and tear film may be detected in small numbers. Smears with more than ten organisms are more determine. However, detection of bacteria in smears often needs to
324
Fig. 19.7D: Corneal scrapings stained with Gram stain showing Acanthamoeba cysts (original magnification 500)
Presence of partially stained or unstained bacilli in Gram or Giemsa-stained smears has often indicated possibility of atypical mycobacteria (Fig. 19.8) and successful diagnosis of the same.23 Thin, branching and beaded filaments in these smears are indicative of Nocardia sp. To confirm the diagnosis, acid fast stains using 20% H2SO4 (Ziehl-Neelsen technique) in the former and 1% H2SO4 (Kinyoun method) in the latter (Fig. 19.9) are very rewarding.
Cultures
While smear examination provides preliminary evidence, culture isolation gives diagnostic
Figs 19.7A to C: Corneal scrapings stained with Gram stain showing A Gram-positive cocci in pairs, B Gramnegative bacilli (arrow), C Septate fungal filaments
be correlated with corresponding bacterial growth in culture for determining significance. Failure of an organism, seen in smears, to grow in culture would indicate either non-viable organism or sample variation. Sampling error must always be ruled out in case of discrepant results.
Fig. 19.8: Corneal scraping from a case of Mycobacterium chelonae keratitis (post-LASIK surgery) showing acid fast bacilli by Ziehl-Neelsen staining (20%H2SO4) (original magnification 500)
325
Antibiotic Susceptibility
Interpretation of agar disk diffusion test (for bacterial susceptibility) that relates to levels of drug in serum is often controversial. However, since higher antibiotic concentrations can be achieved in the cornea by topical administration of antibiotics, an organism labeled as resistant or intermediate in sensitivity by this test may respond to the drug in vivo. The reverse is unlikely to be the case. The quantitative MIC can be compared to the antibiotic concentration expected at the site of infection. However, resistance breakpoints for ocular isolates have not been determined and there are no generally accepted cut off points.
Figs 17.9A and B: Corneal scraping from a case of Nocardia keratitis showing A Gram-positive, thin, beaded, branching filaments in Gram stained smear, and B Acid fast, thin, beaded, branching filaments in the same smear stained by Kinyoun method (1% H2SO4) after decolorization (original magnification 500)
326
Transport of Samples
Unlike the banishment for transport of corneal scrapings (in a transport medium to the laboratory) in the protocol for non-viral corneal ulcer diagnosis, the sample for viral diagnosis always needs to be collected in an appropriate transport medium (except the smears) and sent to the laboratory. Methods of transport would vary according to the type of sample collected. Table 19.3 outlines the methods of transportation of samples to the virology laboratory.
Processing of Samples
Samples received in a virology laboratory may be processed using a variety of techniques. The choice of technique would depend on the type of sample and the specific virus that is being looked for. Most of the procedures can be performed in a moderately equipped laboratory. The procedures standardized and adopted by us for the diagnosis of Herpes simplex virus (HSV) keratitis are outlined in Table 19.4. Of all available laboratory techniques for diagnosis of viral infections only a few can be adopted in a particular laboratory. The choice is made based on the advantages, disadvantages and cost effectiveness of the techniques and their overall utility.
Collection of Samples
A variety of samples including corneal scrapings, corneal swabs, corneal impression smear, and corneal button may be submitted for viral diagnosis. In addition or instead of corneal samples, conjunctival scrapings/swabs or aqueous fluid may also be helpful in some situations. As is true for most diseases, collection of clinical sample early in the disease prior to administration of antimicrobial agents, is most useful for laboratory diagnosis.
327
are predominantly lymphocytes. Koilocytic changes are characteristic perinuclear clearing (halo) with increase in density of surrounding rim of cytoplasm, classically described in human papilloma virus infected squamous epithelial cells of the cervix. Intranuclear inclusions are more efficiently seen in Papanicolaou stain than Giemsa-stained smears, however, Giemsa stain is good for enumerating cell types. Though these staining techniques have the advantage of being rapid and inexpensive, they are often non-specific and offer low sensitivity in the diagnosis of viral infection. For example, these stains cannot
TABLE 19.4: METHODS FOR LABORATORY DIAGNOSIS OF VIRAL KERATITIS FOLLOWED AT LV PRASAD EYE INSTITUTE 1. Non-specific smear examination (cytology) methods: Papanicolaou stain Giemsa stain 2. Cell-associated antigen detection methods Direct/indirect immunofluorescence assay (IF) Indirect immunoperoxidase assay (IP) 3. Virus isolation (tissue culture) methods Conventional tissue culture Shell-vial technique 4. Molecular virology method Polymerase chain reaction
Figs 17.10A and B: Corneal scrapings from a case of HSV keratitis showing. A Multinucleated giant cell (arrow) and koilocytic changes (arrowhead), and B Intranuclear inclusion, in an epithelial cell (Papanicolaou stain, original magnification 500)
328
Fig. 19.11: Corneal scraping from a case of HSV keratitis showing presence of HSV-1 antigen in the epithelial cells (indirect immunofluorescence assay, original magnification 250)
Fig. 19.12: Corneal scraping from the same patient of HSV keratitis (Fig. 19.11) showing presence of HSV-1 antigen (stained brown) in epithelial cells (indirect immunoperoxidase assay, original magnification 500)
329
Growth of virus in the cell lines can be determined either by characteristic cellular changes or cytopathic effect (CPE) as shown in Figure 19.13 or by IF or IP technique, which detect viral antigens in the infected cell lines. Appearance of CPE may take several days but antigens can be detected even before CPE occurs, therefore, IF or IP is a more rapid method. Viruses may be cultured in cell lines maintained in tubes (tube culture) or on cover-slips in vials (shell vial) as shown in Figure 19.14. Shell vial technique is a modification of conventional tissue culture technique wherein entry of virus into the monolayer of susceptible cells (on a cover-slip in a vial) is facilitated by centrifugation of the
vial containing cells and the clinical sample (spin amplification).29 The virus growth occurs in a shorter period (18-72 hours) by this method and additionally, both IF and IP techniques can be performed easily on the cover-slips retrieved from the vials for antigen detection. Both these factors are responsible for increased sensitivity of shell vial technique in isolation of viruses.
Fig. 19.13: Monolayer of vero cell line showing cytopathic effect caused by HSV-1 indicating growth of the virus in the cells (tube culture, phase contrast, original magnification 200)
330
Figs 19.14 A to C: Virus cultures using cell lines. A Tube culture, B Shell vial culture, C Containing cover-slip
PCR has been reported.31,32 A variety of primers for PCR diagnosis of HSV type 1 and 2 and VZV infections of the eye (other than keratitis) has been described and can be adapted for the diagnosis of keratitis.33,34 A nested PCR for stromal
Fig. 19.15: Detection of HSV 1 and 2 by PCR in a corneal scraping from a case of HSV keratitis. Agarose gel electrophoresis (Ethidium bromide stained) showing positive control (lane 1), negative control (lane 2), test sample (lane 3), and molecular weight marker (lane 4). Note the band of 179 bp size (DNA polymerase gene specific) in lane 3 corresponding to positive control
331
References
1. Agarwal V, Biswas J, Madhavan HN, et al. Current perspectives in infectious keratitis. Ind J Ophthalmol 1994;42:171-92. 2. Burd EM. Bacterial keratitis and conjunctivitis. In: Smolin G, Thoft RA (Eds). The Cornea: Scientific Foundations and Clinical Practice. Boston: Little Brown and Co, 1994. 3. Sharma S, Sankaridurg PR, Ramachandran L, et al. Is the conjunctival flora a reflection of the pathogenic bacteria causing corneal ulceration? Invest Ophthalmol Vis Sci 1994;35(Suppl): S1947. 4. Wilhelmus KR, Liesegang TJ, Osato MS, et al. Cumitech 13A, Laboratory Diagnosis of Ocular Infections. Coordinating (Ed). Specter SC, American Society for Microbiology, Washington, DC 15, 1994.
332
24.
25.
26. 27.
28.
333
20
Clinical and Laboratory Diagnosis of Uveitis
In recent years, there have been remarkable advances in the diagnosis and management of uveitis/intraocular inflammation. The advances are in part, from the progress noted in the arena of ocular immunology, immunopharmacology, vitreoretinal surgical techniques and laboratory investigations. This chapter on diagnostic procedures in uveitis provides an overview of the advances in the field of clinical and laboratory diagnosis of uveitis, indications and surgical techniques of chorioretinal biopsy.
Fifty percent of cases of uveitis are considered idiopathic. Many others are associated with, or form a part of, other systemic immune-mediated disease. Diagnostic laboratory based immunological tests often provide not only the differential diagnosis of uveitis but also aid in the management of these patients. Moreover, in combination with other serologic, laboratory-based investigations, these assays assist in defining a noninfectious entity.
Antinuclear Antibody
Antinuclear antibody (ANA) is elevated in a number of diseases such as: AS, JRA, dermatomyositis, systemic lupus erythematosus (SLE), scleroderma, Sjogrens syndrome, chronic hepatitis, apical pneumonia and lymphoma. ANA testing, therefore, gathers more relevance when limited to patients with a
Basic Investigations
Total and differential white blood cell counts
334
335
Diagnostic Biopsies
Diagnosis of isolated intraocular inflammatory process (without accompanying systemic manifestations) is characteristically based on observation of clinical signs, the evolution of affection and the final outcome. Laboratory tests based on findings in the serum are of some value, especially when the intraocular inflammation is associated with disease involving other organs. When, however, the affection involves the eye only, these tests are of little value. Sampling of the ocular tissue may be more revealing. Following improvement in instrumentation and aseptic microsurgical techniques, intraocular material for diagnostic purpose and testing is more commonly being utilized by ophthalmologists. Histopathology is a part of the ophthalmologists armamentarium that is useful in the diagnosis and management of intraocular
inflammation/uveitis. Initially, uveitis is broadly classified based on a thorough history and physical examination. Once classified, the ophthalmologist can efficiently use special tests and procedures to aid in the diagnosis and management of uveitis.
336
lens implantation. Furthermore, any elderly patient who presents with deteriorating vision (usually with vitritis as predominant feature) of undetermined etiology, should undergo vitreous biopsy to rule out reticulum cell sarcoma (Table 20.3).. The biopsy is also indicated in a malignant neoplasm that involves the eye, the central nervous system or the visceral organs. In one series, the diagnosis of ocular reticulum cell sarcoma was made by vitreous biopsy in 56% of the eyes.13 In cases diagnosed by vitreous biopsy, the average interval from onset of symptoms to the diagnosis was 13 months, as
TABLE 20.2: INDICATIONS AND FINDINGS ON DIAGNOSTIC PARACENTESIS Indications Endophthalmitis Retinoblastoma, malignant melanoma, reticulum cell sarcoma, leukemia metastatic tumor Toxocara canis Toxoplasma gondii, T. canis, Reticulum cell sarcoma, syphilis, Behets disease Sarcoidosis Retinoblastoma Phacolytic glaucoma Hemorrhagic glaucoma Epithelial ingrowth Persistent hyperplastic primary vitreous Amyloidosis Findings Bacteria, fungi Tumor cells Eosinophils Antibodies (ELISA) ACE LD isoenzymes Macrophages/lens matter Ghost erythrocytes Epithelial cells Mesenchymal fibrous cells Amyloid
337
Tumor cells Eosinophils Antibodies Macrophages PCR of virus DNA Monoclonal antibodies Calcium soaps Amyloid
opposed to 21 months in patients where the diagnosis was made by histology of any other sites.13 Ocular reticulum cell sarcoma often responds to radiation and chemotherapy. Therefore, an early diagnosis with prompt therapeutic intervention may contribute to the preservation of visual function and prolongation of life. Similarly, any patient suspected of being an intravenous drug abuser presenting with endogenous endophthalmitis-like picture should undergo diagnostic anterior chamber paracentesis and vitreous biopsy.14
anesthetic is instilled. One may also use sterile cotton tipped applicator soaked in antibiotic and applied at the planned site of needle insertion. 2. A tuberculin or 2 ml syringe with a 27 to 30 gauge needle is used (Fig. 20. 2). However, in case of granulomatous uveitis, it is preferable to use a large bore 25-26 gauge needle. Conjunctival toothed forceps may be used to stabilize the globe. 3. The needle entry into the anterior chamber is oblique through the stroma via the lower limbus. This acts as a valvular self-sealing paracentesis wound on withdrawal of the needle. One should avoid touching the corneal endothelium and particularly the lens in phakic patients and should stay over the peripheral iris at all times. The needle should not be aimed towards the center of the pupil and the beveled end should face upwards throughout the procedure. 4. Obtain a 0.1 to 0.3 ml yield of aqueous, and on withdrawal external pressure is applied to the entrance with sterile cotton tipped applicator. A drop of antibiotic is instilled in the conjunctival sac and the eye is patched
Fig. 20.2: Shows the technique of anterior chamber paracentesis using limbal approach with a 30 gauge needle, in a patient suspected to have postoperative endophthalmitis
338
339
Microbiology
Direct smears are prepared for Gram stain, Giemsa stain, Gomoris methanamine silver and calcofluor white stain.The samples should also be immediately inoculated onto blood agar, chocolate agar, brain-heart-infusion-broth (BHIB), thioglycolate fluid (maintained at body temperature), Sabourauds agar, Brucella agar and BHIB with gentamicin (maintained at room temperature for fungal isolation).
includes cytocentrifuge by cytospin method (about 1000 revolutions for 5 minutes). 2. Antibodies: The supernatant obtained after spinning down the cellular components within the aqueous humor should be subjected to ELISA. The local production of specific antibodies within the ocular fluids is an important indication for the possible etiology especially when Toxocara or Toxoplasma is suspected.20 3. Flow cytometric analysis: 21 Flow cytometry (FCM) measures the physical and chemical properties of individual particles or cells moving in a single file in a fluid stream. Constituent cells must be dispersed in a fluid medium before a specimen can be analyzed by FCM. Intact tissue specimens (for example, solid tumors) must first undergo disintegration by mechanical, chemical, or enzymatic methods. Some of these methods allow the cytoplasm to remain intact, thereby permitting analysis of cytoplasm or cell surface membrane properties. The most clearly defined application of FCM is in diagnostic surgical pathology. It is an adjunct to histologic examination in the diagnosis of lymphoproliferative and leukemic processes. FCM is applied to the study of uveal melanomas, retinoblastomas and ocular lymphoid proliferations, especially masquerade syndrome. It is now also being used to provide valuable information regarding the ratio between the cytotoxic and helper T-cells, an indication for the immunologic events taking place during the course of the ocular disease.
Biopsy
Iris and Ciliary body Biopsy
Biopsy of iris and ciliary body are usually performed in suspected tumors in these regions.
340
341
Approach 22,36,37
Limbal, pars plana, corneolimbal-zonule and subretinal approaches are used for taking FNAB. Limbal approach: This approach is used for iris lesions (Fig. 20.3) or posterior ciliary body lesions in aphakia. Pars plana approach: In this approach, the needle is passed from the pars plana region (3.5 mm from the limbus) in the quadrant opposite the lesion, through the vitreous gel (Fig. 20.4). For some of the eyes with tumors located posteriorly, a vitrectomy has to be performed
Fig. 20.3: Shows the technique of FNAB of an iris mass lesion using a limbal approach
342
Complications of FNAB22,36,37
The most common complication of FNAB is bleeding from the site of the needle track. Virtually all intraocular FNABs are associated with a small degree of hemorrhage, which can be subretinal, retinal or intravitreal. Orbital dissemination of tumor cells and distant metastatic spread caused by tumor implantation along the needle track has been reported. It is reduced with the use of smaller 25-gauge needle. Theoretically, the procedure can also disseminate a subretinal focus of infection.38 Iatrogenic retinal perforations are unavoidable by the indirect needle approach to the choroidal lesions and may cause a retinal detachment after FNAB. The number of cases developing the retinal detachment following FNAB is few, possibly because the blood clot closes the site of perforation.
Fig. 20.4: Technique of FNAB of a subretinal mass lesion using a pars plana approach
before aspiration. The purpose of vitrectomy is to maintain the clear visualization of the lesions and the needle path, to remove the vitreous that could potentially adhere to the needle (reducing unnecessary retinal traction), to eliminate adherence of the vitreous to the tumor cells in the needle as the needle is withdrawn (mitigate potential of tumor cells tracking in the wound), and to control bleeding after aspiration. Corneolimbal-zonular approach: It prevents dissemination of the tumor mass through the needle track. This approach is used in patients with retinoblastoma, a highly friable tumor, as the chance of needle track dissemination is extremely high. Through a corneolimbal approach the needle passes through multiple planes, thus wiping out the tumor cells as the needle is removed from the eye. In addition the absence of blood vessels theoretically decreases the chances of dissemination. Subretinal approach: It is adopted in cases of subretinal abscess and tuberculoma, considering the site is approachable. Most surgeons prefer to use a 25-gauge needle with a flexible connector to a 2 ml syringe to minimize the movement and surgical trauma during biopsy. Others prefer a spinal needle with
343
Immunohistochemistry
The material should be snap frozen. Frozen sections can be studied with appropriate antibody to identify infectious agents like viruses and autoimmune diseases. Immunohistochemistry can also be done from sections of formalin fixed tissues.
Fig. 20.5: Photograph of the PCR machine
In situ Hybridization39
In situ hybridization test can be done in cryo preserved tissue as well as sections from formalin or glutaraldehyde fixed tissues. Radiolabelled probes are used specially for infectious organisms like viruses. Localization of such infectious agents within a cell is possible.40
clinical medicine. Its application in ophthalmology and medical sciences as a whole has increased exponentially over the last few years.41,42 The ocular tissues which can be submitted for PCR include: intraocular fluid (aqueous and vitreous), fresh retinal and choroidal tissues, formalin fixed or paraffin embedded tissues, and DNA material extracted from a stained or unstained cytology slide. PCR is a reliable test for detection of adenoviruses from the conjunctiva and Propionibacterium acne and other bacterial endophthalmitis.43 It is also employed in the diagnosis of tuberculous uveitis,44 presumed ocular tuberculosis45 and also to emphasize the role of tuberculosis in the etiology of Eales disease46,47 and toxoplasmosis. Some general precautions are needed to minimize the risk of contamination, which include performing the initial processing in a biologic safety hood not used for any other PCR related procedure. All reagents should be prepared in another biologic safety cabinet using materials dedicated solely to the PCR and should be aliquoted in sterile tubes.
344
Fig. 20.6: Diagrammatic representation of the three steps of PCR: Denaturation, Annealing and Amplification
Lastly, PCR can detect agents for which the primers exist. There are limited numbers of primers available. It also does not provide cellular morphology. In contrast, the in situ DNA hybridization can show the hybridized DNA within the infected cell. PCR detects only the amplified DNA and not necessarily reflect the etiological agents.
syphilis and coccidiomycosis.22 Stains used include hematoxylin and eosin supplemented by Gomoris methamine silver, Warthin-Starry stain and acid-fast stains, as well as immunohistochemical stains using antibodies. Occasionally, a gallium scan will demonstrate lacrimal gland uptake and support the need for lacrimal gland biopsy.
Mucosal Biopsy
The commonest indication of oral mucosal biopsy in a uveitic scenario is for the diagnosis of Behets syndrome, which shows evidence of an occlusive vasculitis. Similarly, characteristic inflammation of one of the minor salivary glands
345
Ancillary Tests
Fundus Fluorescein Angiography
Fundus fluorescein angiography (FFA) is a helpful adjunct test in inflammatory diseases involving the fundus of the eye. The main advantage of this technique is its ability to better visualize the retinal vessels and delineate their walls. FFA is most often used to diagnose cystoid macular edema, retinal or choroidal neovascularization, areas of retinal non-perfusion and active retinal vasculitis. FFA is also useful in patients with neurosensory retinal detachment and other outer retinal inflammations, particularly those involving the RPE. The major drawback of FFA is its inability to image the choroid and to detect inflammatory events affecting the choroid and choriocapillaris especially in areas where the lesion is deep.20 Furthermore, one has to remember that although FFA findings are helpful in illustrating the inflammatory processes and anatomic changes within the retina and the vessels, generally the FFA patterns are not diagnostic or pathognomonic for any particular intraocular inflammatory disease. Posterior uveitic entities where FFA is particularly indicated are birdshot retinochoroidopathy, geographic helicoid peripapillary choroiditis, acute posterior multifocal placoid
346
Ultrasound Biomicroscopy51,52
Conventional ultrasound use frequencies in 10 MHz range. The use of ultrasound frequencies in the 50-100 MHz range is a relatively new development in the ultrasound imaging of the eye. Ultrasound biomicroscopy (UBM) is a new tool available for evaluation inflammation in areas, which are not visualized clinically. It can be used to study up to the anterior 4-mm of the globe. In conditions like small undilating pupil due to posterior synechiae with or without complicated cataract this modality is extremely useful in identifying the presence of inflammation in the area of the pars plana (Fig. 20.8). It has also been used in ciliary body metastatic tumors, which can masquerade as uveitic entities,12 (Figs. 20.9 and 20.10) and for the diagnosis and management of pars planitis caused by caterpillar hair.53
Ultrasound
B-scan ultrasonography is used most commonly in patients with uveitis to investigate inflammatory choroidal and scleral thickening that can occur with VKH syndrome (Fig. 20.7), posterior scleritis and sympathetic ophthalmia20and to evaluate the posterior segment in patients with dense cataracts or other media opacities. It is also useful in detecting exudative retinal detachment, detachment of choroid, evaluation of the ONH and thickening of macula (edema). It is useful in detection of panophthalmitis and scleritis where classically T-sign is present. Ultrasound has a very important role in the management of endophthalmitis to determine its severity and extent of infection. USG is also useful in diagnosis of granuloma and abscess in tuberculosis, cysts with scolex in cysticercosis and nematode infection.
Fig. 20.7: Ultrasound B-scan with vector A-scan showing gross choroidal thickening in a patient with VKH syndrome
Fig. 20.8: UBM photograph showing a membrane (m) over the pars plana region (arrows denoting the extent of membrane) with vitreous exudates suggestive of pars planitis in a patient with complicated cataract obscuring retinal view
347
Fig. 20.9: Metastatic Lesion: Slit-lamp photograph showing anterior chamber reaction and fluffy exudates on the superior iris
Fig. 20.10: UBM image showing cystic metastatic lesions in the ciliary body region
images of the retina. It is analogous to ultrasound B-scan imaging except that light rather than sound waves are used in order to obtain a much higher longitudinal resolution of approximately 10 m (axial) and 20 microns (transverse) in the retina.54 Its resolution is 8-25 times greater than
348
A A
B B Figs 20.11A and B: A Pretreatment OCT picture showing large cystoid spaces at the macula. B Posttreatment OCT picture of the same patient showing resolution of macular edema with restoration of foveal contour Figs 20.12A and B: A OCT picture showing neurosensory detachment at the macula, B OCT picture showing posttreatment resolution
of defective vision due to various uveitic conditions especially intermediate uveitis. Early detection and treatment is important (Figs 20.11A and B) because it can lead to complications and vision loss. We have found intermediate uveitis to be the commonest cause of macular edema. OCT is extremely sensitive in identifying neurosensory retinal elevation because of the distinct difference in optical reflectivity between photoreceptors and underlying RPE/choriocapillaris. It can detect the presence of shallow subretinal fluid or macula involvement in retinal detachment. OCT is helpful in the early diagnosis as well as resolution of shallow retinal detachment (Figs 20.12A and B). It can also be used to distinguish true retinal detachment from retinoschisis. OCT appearance of CNVM is described as a bump with moderate slope extending upward or as a fusiform thickening with disruption of the reflective band. OCT is useful before planning
macular surgery for removal of subfoveal CNV especially in patients with presumed ocular histoplasmosis syndrome and multi-focal choroiditis. Following patterns of subfoveal CNVM can be made out with the help of OCT: Reflective band anterior to and clearly separated from the RPE. Highly reflective red band anterior to and adherent to the RPE, similar to the bump Highly reflective band indistinguishable from the RPE. Submacular surgery results have shown that eyes for which OCT reveals the triad of hyperreflective tissue with anterior location, a separation zone and an underlying optically clear zone, surgical removal may represent a reasonable alternative.
349
Lumbar Puncture
Lumbar puncture (LP) is most often used in patients with suspected intraocular lymphoma. LP should be done after a complete neurological evaluation and imaging procedure like CT and/ or MRI-scan to avoid unexpected shifting of intracranial contents. LP is also used in selected cases to test suspected meningitis due to syphilis, tuberculosis, toxoplasmosis, cryptococcal infection and coccidiomycosis.
Skin Testing
Purified protein derivative of tuberculin (Mantoux test): Mantoux test is a non-specific test. Skin testing involves intradermal injection of 0.1 ml of antigen to elicit a delayed type hypersensitivity response indicative of prior exposure. Normally all patients with panuveitis are tested for tuberculosis (TB) with 0.1 ml of 5 units of purified protein derivative (PPD). This includes patient with a prior Bacillus CalmetteGuerin (BCG) vaccination or a distant history of tuberculosis. Although a positive test does not reflect tubercular activity, a negative test often rules out a tubercular focus in the body. Due to the prior exposure to TB, a large number (60 to 90%) of healthy adults have a positive PPD skin test in India. Therefore, there are high possibilities of false positive results. Hence, all patients of suspected ocular tuberculosis should be evaluated by associated findings like X-ray chest showing pulmonary tuberculosis. A positive Mantoux test in a case of granulomatous
Audiometry
Audiometry can record the extent of hearing loss seen in VKH syndrome and syphilis.
Radiological Studies
The sacroiliac joint is inflamed in 60% to 90% of patients with HLA-B27 related uveitis. Plain radiographs are quite useful in demonstrating the inflammatory narrowing of the sacroiliac joint. CT-scan and MRI offer increased sensitivity for documenting sacroiliitis, but are more expensive and indicated in selected cases. Chest X-ray is indicated in sarcoidosis and tuberculosis while cases with ankylosing spondylitis need radiograph of sacroiliac joint.
Radionucleotide Studies
Intravenously injected gallium-67 localizes to normal liver, spleen and bone, as well as areas
350
References
1. Baarsma GS, La Hey E, Glasius E, et al. The predictive value of serum-angiotensin converting enzyme and lysozyme levels in the diagnosis of ocular sarcoidosis. Am J Ophthalmol 1987;104:211-17. 2. Power WJ, Rodriquez A, Perroze-Seres M, et al. The value of combined serum-angiotensin converting enzyme and gallium scan in diagnosing ocular sarcoidosis. Ophthalmology 1995;101:2007-11. 3. Weinreb RN, Sandman R, Ryder MI, et al. Serum-angiotensin converting enzyme activity in human aqueous humor. Arch Ophthalmol 1985;103:34-36. 4. Allansmith MR, Skaggs C, Kimmuras SJ. Anterior chamber paracentesis: Diagnostic value in postoperative endophthalmitis. Arch Ophthalmol 1970;84:745-48. 5. Foster RK. Etiology and diagnosis of bacterial postoperative endophthalmitis. Ophthalmology 1978;85:320-24. 6. Witmer R. Clinical implications of aqueous humor studies in uveitis. Am J Ophthalmol 1978;86:39-42. 7. Benitez del Castillo JM, Herreros G, Guillen JL et al. Bilateral ocular toxocariasis demonstrated by aqueous humor enzyme linked immunosorbent assay. Am J Ophthalmol 1996;119:51-54. 8. OConnor GR. Precipitating antibody to toxoplasmosis in blood and aqueous humor. Am J Ophthalmol 1957;75:44-48. 9. Michelson JB, Chisari FV, Kansu J. Antibodies to oral mucosa in patients with ocular Behcets disease. Ophthalmology 1985;92:1277-34.
351
352
353
YOG RAJ SHARMA, DEEPENDRA VIKRAM SINGH, NIKHIL PAL, RAJANI SHARMA
21
The improved survival rate of extremely premature infants has indirectly led to increase in the incidence of retinopathy of prematurity. Ophthalmologists are now being required to examine these premature babies with greater frequency. The understanding of pathogenesis, screening and management of retinopathy of prematurity (ROP) has markedly changed since Terry first described it.1 The Multicenter Trial of Cryotherapy for Retinopathy of Prematurity (Cryo-ROP) 2-5 and lately, Early Treatment Retinopathy of Prematurity (ETROP) study6 have influenced the management of ROP.
Risk Factors
The multiple factors that are associated with the severity of ROP are: low birth weight, young gestational age, non-black race, multiple birth, prolonged elevation of arterial oxygen levels, hypoxemia, hypercarbia, hypocarbia, respiratory distress syndrome, apnea, erythrocyte transfusions, sepsis, intraventricular hemorrhage (IVH), prolonged parentral nutrition, methylxanthine administration, and treatment with indomethacin.7-12
Etiology
Retinopathy of Prematurity is the result of abnormal development of immature retinal vessels capable of progressing to a vasoproliferative retinal disorder. ROP can result in severe visual impairment and has been reported to attribute to as much as 40% of the perinatal blindness.
Arrested Vasculogenesis
During normal retinal development, the vessels start at optic disk at approximately 16 weeks of gestation and migrate towards ora serrata. They
354
Fig. 21.1: Standardized zones of retina used for classification and documentation of ROP
Documentation
International Classification of ROP The International Classification of Retinopathy of Prematurity (ICROP) was a consensus statement of an international group of retinopathy of prematurity experts.13 The original classification has facilitated the development of large multicenter clinical treatment trials and furthered our understanding of this potentially blinding disorder. The different stages described by ICROP are as follows:
Fig. 21.2: Stage 3 ROP: 6 clock hours of extraretinal neovascularization with demarcation ridge inferiorly
Stage 4: Partial retinal detachment With progressive growth into the vitreous, contraction of the fibrovascular proliferation exerts traction on the retina, leading to partial retinal detachment (Stage 4 ROP), either without foveal involvement (Stage 4A) (Figs 21.3 and 21.4) or with foveal involvement (Stage 4B). Stage 5: Total retinal detachment These retinal detachments are always funnelshaped and their configuration can further be described as open and closed anteriorly and open or closed posteriorly (Fig. 21.5).
355
Fig. 21.3: Early Stage 4A ROP: Traction along the ridge with peripheral retinal detachment
Fig. 21.4: Stage 4A ROP: Tractional retinal detachment not involving macula
Threshold ROP is defined as Stage 3 + ROP in zone-I or -II occupying at least 5 contiguous clock
356
hours or 8 noncontiguous clock hours of retina. The Cryo-ROP trial found that 62% of the untreated eyes as compared to 44% of the treated eyes with threshold ROP progressed to unfavorable outcome5 (Table 21.1).
Prethreshold ROP
Prethreshold ROP is defined as any stage of ROP in zone-I with plus disease and ROP stage 3 plus with 3 contiguous or 5 noncontiguous clock
hours of involvement of retina in zone-II, but less than threshold stage. ROP may not progress through all these stages sequentially. ROP in zone-I frequently progresses to stage 3 without an intervening demarcation line or ridge. With advancements in neonatal support and intensive care units and increasing availability of screening modules more and more prematures are being diagnosed ROP in zone-I, which progresses at a faster rate and almost always to threshold stage. Therefore,
TABLE 21.1: CATEGORIES OF STRUCTURAL OUTCOME5 Favorable (1) Essentially normal posterior pole (near periphery and zone-I), including angle of vessels (2) Abnormal angle of major temporal vascular arcade in the posterior pole (3) Macular ectopia (4A) Stage 4A partial retinal detachment, also including retinoschisis, or fold in the posterior pole (fovea spared) Unfavorable (4B) Stage 4B partial retinal detachment, also including retinoschisis, or fold, all with foveal involvement (4C) View of macula (and presumably patients central vision) blocked owing to partial cataract, partial retrolental membrane, or partial corneal opacity due to retinopathy of prematurity (ROP) (5) Stage 5 total retinal detachment, or total retinoschisis, or retrolental membrane (blocking all view of fundus) (5A) Entire view of posterior pole and near periphery blocked by total cataract or total corneal opacity from ROP. (6) Enucleation for any reason
Unable to grade (UG) Unable to determine (e.g. view impossible because of corneal opacity unrelated to ROP or because of miotic pupil) None of the above (e.g. extreme vascular attenuation and optic atrophy)
357
Screening Procedure
Screening is best done at Neonatal ICU along with trained neonatology staff to monitor vital parameters during examination. Mydriasis can be achieved by 2.5% phenylephrine and 0.5% tropicamide instilled thrice at an interval of 15 mins. Instruments required include: 28 D/20 D lens, pediatric scleral depressor, pediatric lid speculum (Fig. 21.8) and indirect ophthalmoscope. Since examination with lid speculum and scleral depressor is often distressing to the infant, presence of a pediatrician is extremely useful. Examination should be carried out with utmost gentleness and minimal possible illumination. A quick examination of the posterior pole gives impression whether the plus disease is present or not. Screening all along the 4 major blood vessels in four quadrants up to the retinal periphery should be carried out.
TABLE 21.2: GUIDELINES FOR SCREENING AND FOLLOW-UP EXAMINATION Screening criterion All infants with a birth weight < 1500 gm All infants born at postmenstrual age of 32 weeks or earlier All infants weighing between 1500 and 2000 gm requiring supplemental oxygen, or with an unstable clinical course
By 32 weeks postmenstrual age or 4 weeks chronological age whichever is earlier (a) After treating threshold ROP (b) High risk prethreshold ROP (consider treatment if in zone-I) (a) Retinal vessels immaturity with vessels ending in zone-I but no ROP in that zone (b) Low risk prethreshold ROP (a) Retinal vessels immaturity with vessels zone-III but no ROP in that zone (b) Less than prethreshold ROP in zone-I ending in zone-II or
Fortnightly
Final examination
(a) Attainment of 45 weeks post-menstrual age without development of ROP (b) Progression of retinal vascularization into zone-II without previous zone-II ROP (c) Full vascularization within 1 disk diameter of the ora serrata on two occasions
358
A C B Figs 21.8A to C: The instruments required for screening: A scleral depressor, B speculum, C condensing lens for indirect ophthalmoscope
Retcam
The Retcam (Fig. 21.9) is a real time wide-angle (120-130 degrees) digital imaging system for
viewing pediatric eyes manufactured by Massie Research Laboratories, Dublin CA. Retcam fills the need for wide-field imaging and is fully digital enabling efficient assessment and monitoring. Nearly the entire retina is documented with only five images. Real-time imaging display provides immediate feedback. Inexpensive digital image storage eliminates film. One is able to retrieve and manage patient information with built-in image database and also transmit images to colleagues. Retcam II is the latest addition to the series with newer benefits like flat LCD color display, frame by frame video review and 20 second video capture especially useful for fluorescein angiography.
359
Vitrectomy
Pars plana vitrectomy is being increasingly utilized to manage advanced ROP cases.27-31 Although recent reports describe encouraging anatomical results, the functional results have been disappointing so far.28, 30 The vitrectomy is usually performed for stage 5 ROP.27 The lens sparing vitrectomy for stage 4a and 4b has also
360
References
1. Terry TL. Extreme prematurity and fibroblastic overgrowth of persistent vascular sheath behind each crystalline lens. Am J Ophthalmol 1942;25:20304. 2. Cryotherapy for Retinopathy of Prematurity Cooperative Group. Multicenter Trial of Cryotherapy for Retinopathy of Prematurity: preliminary results. Arch Ophthalmol 1988; 106:471-79. 3. Cryotherapy for Retinopathy of Prematurity Cooperative Group. Multicenter Trial of Cryotherapy for Retinopathy of Prematurity: one-year outcomestructure and function. Arch Ophthalmol 1990;108:1408-16. 4. Cryotherapy for Retinopathy of Prematurity Cooperative Group. Multicenter Trial of Cryotherapy for Retinopathy of Prematurity: Snellen visual acuity and structural outcome at 5 years after randomization. Arch Ophthalmol 1996;114:417-24. 5. Cryotherapy for Retinopathy of Prematurity Cooperative Group. Ophthalmological outcomes at 10 years. Arch Ophthalmol 2001; 119:1110-18. 6. Early Treatment for Retinopathy of Prematurity Cooperative Group. Revised indications for the treatment of retinopathy of prematurity: results of the Early Treatment for Retinopathy of Prematurity Randomized Trial. Arch Ophthalmol 121:1684-96. 7. Darlow BA, Horwood LJ. Retinopathy of prematurity: risk factors in a prospective population-based study. Paediatr Perinat Epidemiol 1992,6:62-80.
Conclusion
ROP is becoming a major cause of blindness among children worldwide because of the introduction of the neonatal intensive care
361
362
22
Intraocular foreign body (IOFB) is defined as an intraocular retained unintentional projectile. Of all open globe injuries, 18-41% harbor IOFB.1 Most of such injuries occur in the 20-40 years age group. 2 This being the most productive age, the effect on the economy is significant. The most common type of injury associated with IOFB is metal on metal injury exemplified by hammering activity (60-80%). 3-5 Power machine tools contribute to 18-25% of IOFBs and weapon related injuries contribute to about 19%.3-5 Seventy to 90% of IOFBs are metallic and 80% of these are magnetic which has a significant bearing on the management and the ease with which the FB can be extracted from the eye.
History of Injury
History can guide the clinician as to the possibility of the IOFB being present in a given eye and as well as the type of IOFB. From the management perspective, it is important to note the type of instrument or tool being used at time of the injury. In cases of metal on metal, the identity of the IOFB is fairly certain. Injuries in a rural set up are likely to be due to thorn and plant twigs and could be associated with high incidence of fungal infection. The findings of the surgeon who examines the patient immediately after the injury would be very important because subsequently visualization of the fundus becomes difficult due to hazy media.
Slit-lamp Examination
Thorough slit-lamp examination can provide very useful information.
363
Caveats
1. Glass IOFB in anterior chamber can be particularly difficult to see even on slit-lamp examination. 2. Gonioscopy may be the only way to identify a small foreign body in the angle. 3. Foreign body located in the ciliary body area is difficult to identify by both slit-lamp evaluation and fundus examination.
Iris
Presence of iris hole is a very important clue to the presence of the IOFB. The relationship between the location of the iris hole and the corneal scar also indicates the direction in which the foreign body was traveling. Iris hole can be hidden under a dense arcus senilis. Presence of siderosis bulbi may be evident on slit-lamp examination of the iris and lens. The rusty brownish hue is striking.
Fundus Examination
Evaluation of fundus using indirect ophthalmoscopy cannot be over emphasized. Since the injury is likely to produce vitreous hemorrhage and vitritis, the visualization of fundus details may deteriorate very rapidly. Therefore, the initial fundus examination should be as thorough as possible. The documentation of fundus findings made by the first examiner is often valuable for the subsequent ophthalmologist who may be called upon to manage the case. Binocular indirect ophthalmoscopy with scleral indentation may detect IOFB (Fig. 22.1),
Lens
Presence of a track of foreign body in the lens can be seen occasionally. However, in most cases lens opacity rapidly becomes total. Intactness of posterior capsule can be assessed sometime clinically and if not possible by slit-lamp examination, then the ultrasound evaluation is recommended. If the vitreous is perceived to be clear and posterior capsule is intact despite lens injury, one can presume that the FB is located in the anterior segment. On occasions, foreign body can traverse across the zonule of the lens without disrupting the lens. Hence corneal wound with presence of intact posterior capsule does not necessarily exclude the possibility of posterior segment foreign body. Intralenticular foreign body can be obvious on slit-lamp examination.
364
Ultrasonography
A combined B- and vector A-scan is the easiest way of evaluating the eye for presence of IOFB7 (Figs 22.2 and 22.3). A 10 Mega hertz (MHz) probe is routinely employed. A 20 MHz probe
Fig. 22.2: Ultrasound B-scan showing metallic IOFB near the retinal surface
Fig. 22.3: Ultrasound B-Scan showing large piece of metallic IOFB with orbital shadowing
365
Features
Foreign bodies are characterized by a high echogenecity. They are seen as dense white spots on gray scale display and persist even at low gain. Depending on the size, reverberating echoes may also be seen. Metal and stone have a high echogenecity, more than any other normal structure except bone. Wood and vegetable matters reflect only intermediate amplitude echoes. Glass gives a high amplitude echoes only when the ultrasound beam strikes the surface of the glass with perpendicular incidence.
Ultrasound Biomicroscopy
Ultrasound biomicroscopy (UBM) is a relatively new investigational modality. Using a 50 MHz probe, the resolution is increased multifold at the expense of penetrance. Foreign bodies located in the anterior segment can be well imaged with this modality. Foreign bodies located beyond the posterior capsule of the lens cannot be reached because of the low penetrance. Since the investigation can only be done in contact with the globe, it is obviously contraindicated in eyes with open globes or precariously approximated wounds. IOFB such as caterpillar hair can only be picked up with UBM.8
Caveats
Very large foreign bodies can cause shadowing. Linear glass foreign bodies can sometimes produce misleadingly low amplitude echoes due to the ultrasound beam not being perpendicular to the surface of the foreign body. With regards to foreign bodies in the eye wall, it may be difficult to be certain whether the foreign body is closer to the vitreous cavity or scleral surface. The shadowing caused by the foreign body will make it difficult to assess the integrity of the coats of eyeball. Very anteriorly located foreign bodies and small foreign bodies entrapped in dense vitreous hemorrhage can be missed by routine ultrasonography. Air bubble in the vitreous cavity can mimic IOFB due to the high reflectivity. However, air tends to float in the vitreous cavity and hence is located in the nondependent position irrespective of the position of the head.
Radiological Methods
Computerized tomography has replaced most of the other radiological methods in the investigation of injured eye with suspected IOFB. However, from the historical perspective, these methods are reviewed.9
Direct Methods
a. Plain X-ray, true lateral view: The affected side is towards the film with infraorbital line at right angles to the film.
366
367
to the orbital bones and brain can also be evaluated. Multiple foreign bodies can be easily identified. For foreign bodies of more than 0.06 cu mm in size, the sensitivity is 100%.10 However, soft tissue details inside the eye cannot be seen well. For detecting small IOFBs, high-resolution scans with overlapping slices are needed. Wooden foreign bodies are not easily imaged by CT scan.
In general, magnetic resonance imaging (MRI) is not indicated in detection of IOFBs. In the presence of magnetic IOFB it can be positively harmful. The application of powerful magnetic field can move the magnetic IOFB and damage the intraocular structures.11 However, wooden IOFBs are best picked up on MRI.
References
1. Shock JP, Adams D. Long-term visual acuity results after penetrating and perforating injuries. Am J Ophthalmol 1985;100:714-18. 2. Punnonen E, Laatikainen L. Prognosis of perforating eye injuries with foreign bodies. Acta Ophthalmol 1989;66:483-91. 3. Roper-Hall MJ. Review of 555 cases of intraocular foreign bodies with special reference to the prognosis. Br J Ophthalmol 1954;38:65-99.
Fig. 22.5: CT-scan showing metallic IOFB within mid vitreous cavity
368
369
23
Introduction
Incidence
A strabismus or squint is a misalignment of the two eyes when they do not point together towards the same object. This may take the form of one or other eye turning in (convergent strabismus) or out (divergent strabismus). Occasionally, one eye may be higher than the other (vertical strabismus). The strabismus may be constant (present at all times) or occur only intermittently. In a comitant strabismus there is a full range of movement of each eye.
Comitant Strabismus
Comitant strabismus is usually congenital. It is not associated with diplopia. Extra-ocular muscles and nerves are often normal. The angle between the longitudinal axes of the eyes remains constant on testing eye movements. Both eyes have full movement if tested separately. There is excess tone in one muscle compared with its antagonist resulting in deviation of the eye.
It is estimated that a strabismus occurs in about 5% of the population. Most strabismus develops in the first few years of life with the majority appearing either in the first or the third year of life.
Etiology
Both eyes are moved by six muscles and the movements of the two eyes are linked by reflexes which are normally fully developed within six months of birth. A strabismus occurs because of the failure of these reflexes to develop fully in early life. In most cases the reason for this failure of the reflexes to develop is unclear. In some cases the development of the strabismus
370
Head Posture
Observation of head posture starts at the first glance of the patient, as he enters the clinic. He must not be made conscious of keen observation. Much of information is lost after the patient becomes conscious of being examined. Head posture has three components: (a) Chin elevation or depression (vertical), (b) Face turn to right or left side (horizontal) and (c) Head tilt to right or left shoulder (torsional). These three components at three different joints between head and neck may correct the motility disturbances in the three directions. The patient prefers a head posture at which the ocular deviation is the least, and image can be fused. Rarely, a head posture which causes the maximal deviation is chosen so that the peripheral image can be easily suppressed or ignored.
Ocular torticollis is a classic example of an abnormal head posture seen in a patient with congenital superior oblique palsy who maintains a binocular vision in spite of the congenital defect. Such cases may present later with their head posture forcibly corrected. An old photograph of the patient helps in diagnosing the condition and rule out a supposedly acute onset. The head posture in a case of left superior oblique (LSO) palsy will present chin depression, face turn to the right, and head tilt to the right shoulder. For comprehension it is told that LSO being a depressor, chin depression occurs, it being an intorter, a head tilt towards the opposite shoulder
371
Ocular Deviation
The examination of ocular deviation is the most important aspect of strabismus examination as
372
Pseudostrabismus
A true strabismus is a misalignment of the two visual axes, so that both do not meet at the point of regard. An apparent strabismus is just an appearance of strabismus in spite of the alignment of the two visual axes. Apparent strabismus or pseudostrabismus can be due to an abnormality of adnexal structures like the lids, canthi or orbits, or due to abnormal relationship between the visual axis and optical axis of the eyes. A telecanthus or a broad nasal bridge covers the nasal bulbar conjunctiva and gives the appearance of a convergent strabismus (pseudoesotropia). This becomes more prominent whenever a lateral gaze is attempted, the adducting eye getting covered by the telecanthal fold. Similarly the epicanthus covers the nasal bulbar conjunctiva to cause a pseudoesotropia. Neonates and young infants are commonly suspected to have such a strabismus. A proper examination can exclude this and reassure the mothers. A greater interorbital separation (hypertelorism) gives the appearance of a divergent strabismus (pseudoexotropia). On the other hand, euryblepharon, a condition with horizontally large palpebral apertures gives a look of pseudoesotropia. Similarly, a ptosis or lid retraction can masquerade as a pseudohypotropia and hypertropia, respectively. A ptosis may mask an existing hypotropia or aggravate hypertropia. And a telecanthus may mask an exotropia and highlight an esotropia. These appearances, therefore, assume importance even in a case of strabismus posted for surgery. The patient should be explained
Cover Test
It is important to have a proper fixation target. It should be a figure or letter of size 6/9 of Snellen chart. This is to control the accommodation. A
373
fixation achieved by a torch light is not desirable. Lang fixation stick which has very small figures is very useful for young children and reduced Snellen letters or numbers are ideal for the adults and older children. The fixation distance should be 33 cm for near and 6 meters for distance. It is important that target for near should be held slightly below eye level and for distance it should be at eye level to avoid a false impression of strabismus. Thirdly an occluder is required and in case of children it is the hand or a thumb which can be used to avoid scarring him. The subject is asked to fixate on the target at the requisite distance and an observation is made whether both eyes appear to fixate (no apparent strabismus) and one appears to fixate as the other deviates (apparent strabismus). Cover test (Observation made during cover test) The next step is to cover the apparently fixating eye and observe what happens to the other (apparently deviating) eye. If that moves to take up fixation, it confirms the presence of a manifest or true squint (heterotropia). If one had used a Spielmann translucent occluder (Fig. 23.2) one would have observed the eye behind the cover, deviating. However, if both the eyes appear to fixate in the first instance, the examiner attempts to cover either of the eyes to observe the behavior
of the eyes. If it moves to confirm a heterotropia it would imply a true squint masked by appearance. Uncover test (Observations made during uncovering) The second part, uncover test is helpful in unmasking the latent strabismus (heterophoria) which presents with both eyes appearing to fixate the target. One of the eyes is covered, which breaks the fusion, and if there is any heterophoria (tendency for strabismus) the eye behind cover deviates (in/out/up/down). The examiner then observes the behavior of this eye as he removes the cover. If it remains deviated it confirms a latent strabismus with poor fusion (poor recovery) and if it recovers, the examiner observes the speed of recovery. The speed of recovery indicates the
374
375
that apex of the prism should point towards deviation. Therefore, in a vertical deviation, base up prism is used in front of right eye if there is right hypotropia and base down if there is hypertropia. If there is combination of horizontal and vertical deviations, the prisms are placed horizontally in front of one eye and vertically in front of the other eye. For large deviations, a combination of loose prism of 30 or 45 prism diopter in front of one eye and prism bar in front of the other eye is used. The plastic prisms are placed in the frontal position, that is, parallel to the infraorbital margin. But the glass prisms are placed in the Prentice position, that is, the posterior face of the prism is perpendicular to the line of sight. It may be reiterated that the fixation distance (both for near and distance), fixation targets (Fig. 23.6) and proper dissociation of the two eyes should be ensured. A hurriedly done test can be fallacious. An accommodative or fusional convergence should be relaxed. The latter by making the subject wear occlusion for at least 4 hours (even extended up to 24 hours in cases of intermittent exotropia of simulated divergence excess type). The accommodative convergence should be controlled by making the subject wear his proper refractive correction for the test
376
distance. For near fixation additional reading correction may have to be added in cases of accommodative esotropia of convergence excess type. Following precautions should be taken for prism bar cover test: a. It is essential to prevent fusion by continuous use of alternate cover test. b. It is essential to control accommodation by use of an accommodating target. c. Since a high powered prism reduces the clarity of vision, often impairs fixation if placed in front of an ambylopic eye, therefore, it should preferably be placed in front of better eye. d. Children can cooperate for short time only so it is preferable to start with approximately the correct prism rather than to work up from lower strength. e. In cases with combined vertical and horizontal strabismus, it is preferable to use square prisms as they can be easily held together between thumb and the finger. It is important to understand that the deviation to be measured is to be static deviation and should be free of the aforementioned dynamic factors of accommodation and fusion. It is the static angle which requires surgical correction whereas the dynamic deviation of accommodation should be corrected by glasses.
377
can be used. For distance measurements one may use multiple fixed points on the opposite wall. Alternatively a single fixed target may be used with the head being turned to bring the eyes in the desired positions. The deviation of head can be read on a protactor along with scale. A cephalodeviometer, a calibrated mirror can also be used.
Synoptophore
Synoptophore (Fig. 23.8) is a basic orthoptic instrument based on the haploscopic principle. It is also known as amblyoscope (Major, CurpaxMajor types), and troposcope. It consists of a chin rest and forehead rest with two tubes carrying the targets seen through an angled eye piece. The tubes are placed horizontally and are movable in the horizontal and vertical planes. The distance between the two tubes can also be adjusted with the subjects interpupillary distance (IPD). The targets in the tubes are illuminated slides which can be raised up or down and also be tilted to test for vertical and torsional deviations. All these adjustments can be read on the scales in degrees and prism diopters. The tube can be locked individually
378
or both with respect to each other. The illumination of each target can be increased or decreased and flashes can be given if desired. Additional devices like Haidinger brushes can be attached. The targets are placed at a fixed distance from the eye piece which are of + 6.0 D or +6.5 D, so that the targets are at optical infinity. This should theoretically not stimulate accommodation. However, in reality proximal convergence does come into play distorting the deviations. This factor has significantly reduced the applicability of the synoptophore as a reliable instrument to measure deviations, especially horizontal ones. Uses of Synoptophore In cyclovertical strabismus the synoptophore is a useful instrument to measure torsion. It is also useful for studying accommodative convergence and for imparting orthoptic exercises. The synoptiscope of Curpax-Major is a modification which uses semi-transparent mirrors in place of opaque mirrors in front of eyes. This
379
380
degree eye movements from the primary position. The outer square (each side is curved inwards) represents 30 degree excursion for the fixing eye. The outer square is usually charted to mild underaction. The Hess chart is a very good test which can document the under or over action of the extraocular muscles. Measurement of cyclodeviations: While the objective tests are difficult, the subjective tests are very good for measuring cyclodeviations. Diplopia charting with a slit target is used to make the patient appreciate the tilt. A horizontal slit appears to be tilted in the opposite direction to the cyclodeviation in the eye. In case of excyclodeviation of the right eye, the tilt is anticlock-wise and in case of incyclodeviation it will be clock-wise. By using two Maddox rods (Fig. 23.10), preferably one white and the other red, the tilt is neutralized by rotating the Maddox rods in the requisite direction. The change of axis on the trial frame can be read to give the actual cyclodeviation. It is known as the double Maddox rod test. A vertical prism of 5 prism diopter can be added to create a separation between the two horizontal lines seen through the Maddox rods. The synoptophore is a good instrument to measure cyclodeviations, the slides can be tilted to make the patient appreciate straightening of
the torsion in the slides. The slides used should have vertical features or one can use the after image slides. For objective evaluation of the cyclodeviations, the indirect ophthalmoscopy and fundus photography are useful methods. These are good to semi-quantify the cyclodeviations. Normally the fovea is located between the two horizontal lines, one passing through the center of the disk and the other cutting the lower pole of the disk tangentially. The usual location is in the middle of these two horizontal lines, that is, 0.3 disk diameters below the horizontal line through the center of the disk. A difference of 0.25 disk diameter or more between the two eyes is considered abnormal. Limitations of movements: In addition to measuring the ocular deviations, it is valuable to note the limitations of movements. In restrictive strabismus, the limitation of movements is marked compared to the ocular deviation which is small. In contrast, in the incomitant strabismus the limitation of movement and ocular deviation collaborate each other. Both the ductions and the versions should be noted and documented. Usually a subjective assessment is made on a scale of 7 points (+3 to -3) or 9 points (+4 to -4). This is usually helpful in follow-up of cases
381
Measurement of Vergences
In actual practice the manifestation of a strabismus (heterotropia) only occurs if the latent tendency for the strabismus (heterophoria) is not overcome by the fusional vergences. The measurement of vergences is very important, as it determines the capability of the motor system to cope with an induced misalignment of visual axes. If these vergence amplitudes are large, even a large angle strabismus remains asymptomatic, and if they are small, or intermittent, even a small angle strabismus manifests remains symptomatic. Vergences are usually tested in the three planes: (a) Horizontal vergences: convergence and divergence (b) Vertical vergences: sursumvergence and deorsumvergence and (c) Torsional vergences: incyclovergence and excyclovergence. In principle, to measure the vergences, the axes are misaligned artificially; and this may be done with prisms or on the synoptophore. The horizontal and vertical vergences can be measured only by prisms in this manner, as the prisms cannot induce a torsional misalignment.
TABLE 23.3: GRADING OF OBLIQUE OVERACTIONS Inferior oblique overaction Grade 1+* Grade 2+ Grade 3+ Grade 4+ Up to 20 degree angle with the horizontal line Up to 30 degree angle with the horizontal line Up to 60 degree angle with the horizontal line Up to 90 degree angle with the horizontal line Superior oblique overaction Grade 1+ Grade 2+ Grade 3+ Grade 4+ Up to 15 degree angle with the horizontal line Up to 30 degree angle with the horizontal line Up to 60 degree angle with the horizontal line Up to 90 degree angle with the horizontal line
* Grade 1 + inferior oblique overaction may not be easily detectable on lateral version and is better appreciated by only in tertiary position, e.g. levoelevation for right inferior oblique
382
*Though cyclovergences (in degrees) are as good as above on synoptophore the tolerance in practice is up to 4 only.
383
Suppression
Suppression is a sensory adaptation to strabismus in children, which only occurs when the eyes are open. It is a temporary phenomenon. As soon as the fixating eye is covered, deviated eye takes up the fixation. It occurs from the active cortical inhibition of disparate and confusing retinal images originating from the retina of the deviating eye. The stimulus for suppression is diplopia, confusion or a blurred image resulting from astigmatism or anisometropia. Clinically, suppression can be classified into three types: 1. Central or peripheral: In central suppression the image from the fovea of the deviating eye is inhibited to avoid confusion, while in peripheral suppression image forming on the peripheral retina is inhibited.
384
Fig. 23.12: Bagolini glasses test: A Crossed response (NRC with no strabismus or harmonious ARC with strabismus), B Left suppression, C Right suppression, D Crossed response with central scotoma in Right eye E Esotropic diplopia, F Exotropic diplopia (With right and left eye lenses at 135 and 45 degrees, respectively)
Fig. 23.13: Worth four dot test: A Four dots: NRC with no strabismus or ARC with strabismus, B Left suppression, C Right suppression, D Binocular diplopia (With red and green glasses in front of right and left eye)
b. Cross response with central gap in one: It is suggestive of central suppression scotoma in that line, i.e. eye. Interpretation of responses: 1. Symmetrical cross response: If the patient has no strabismus, it is suggestive of normal bifoveal correspondence. But if a manifest strabismus is present, it is indicative of harmonious anomalous retinal correspondence. 2. Asymmetrical cross response: Two lines intersecting each others at some other point than midline, indicates an incomitant strabismus with normal retinal correspondence, i.e. diplopia response. Worth four dot test: In the Worth four dot test (WFDT) eyes are dissociated with red-green goggles. It is more dissociating and hence less physiological as compared to Bagolini glass. This test is performed with patient wearing red lens in front of right eye which filters all color except red, and green lens in front of left eye which filters all colors except green. The patient then views a box with four lights which has one red, two green and one white light (Fig. 23.13). The result is interpreted as follows: 1. Four dots are suggestive of normal retinal correspondence (NRC) if manifest strabismus is not present. In presence of manifest deviation it suggests harmonious anomalous retinal correspondence.
2. Five dots (2 vertical red, 3 green in inverted triangle form) are suggestive of normal retinal correspondence with manifest deviation. These five dots are separated differently depending on the type of deviation. The uncrossed pattern with red on right is suggestive of esodeviation, crossed pattern, i.e. red on left side is suggestive of exodeviation and if they are vertically displaced, it is suggestive of vertical anomalous retinal correspondence. 3. Three dots (green) indicate right suppression. 4. Two dots (red) indicate left suppression. It is performed at 6 meter distance and it subtends an angle of 1.2 degree. In case of central scotoma larger than this size, WFDT will not be visualized. The patient can be brought nearer to WFDT test to increase angle subtended by it. Synoptophore: The suppression scotoma can be mapped with synoptophore, at least in the horizontal meridian. One arm is rotated, and the points are noted at which the target carried by the moving arm disappears and reappear. Slides which present paramacular targets are used. After image test: After image test demonstrates the visual direction of the fovea or eccentric fixation point. It is highly dissociating orthoptic test. The right eye is flashed with a vertical bright flash of light and left by a horizontal flash. As each eye is stimulated separately, fovea of each eye or fixation point in eccentric fixation are at
385
Fig. 23.14: After image test: A Crossed response (NRC with no strabismus), B Asymmetric cross (ARC with strabismus, left suppression), C Esotropia, D Exotropia, E Right suppression, F Left suppression diplopia (With vertical and horizontal flash before right and left eyes, respectively)
the center of the after images. The patient is then asked to draw the relative positions of the after images (Fig. 23.14). Interpretation of the test is as follows: a. Cross response: If the two after images are seen as a cross, the patient has normal retinal correspondence. This is irrespective of the deviation of two eyes. b. Asymmetrical crossing: In this vertical and horizontal lines have their centers separated. The amount of separation is proportional to angle of anomaly. In case of esotropia with ARC, vertical after image (belonging to right eye) will be seen to the left of the horizontal after image. These findings are reversed in exotropia. A single vertical after image is suggestive of left suppression and a horizontal after image is suggestive of right suppression.
Depth of Scotoma
Depth of scotoma is measured by using differential stimulation of the two eyes. This can be done with red filters of increasing density arranged in ladder pattern (Bagolinis graded density filter bar). The patient fixates a small target and filters of increasing density are placed in front of the fixating eye until patient perceives diplopia. Greater the density of filter required to induce diplopia, greater the depth of suppression.
386
Retinal Correspondence
Investigation of state of retinal correspondence is indicated in all cases of constant strabismus. A bifoveal correspondence is called normal retinal correspondence (NRC). A correspondence between fovea of one eye and extrafoveal point of the other eye (deviating eye) is called anomalous retinal correspondence (ARC). It is an acquired binocular functional sensory adaptation to strabismus at the cortical level. Suppression precedes the development of ARC. At the cortical level there is a change in synoptic connections from the foveo-foveal to the foveo-extrafoveal. The extrafoveal point should have good visual potential in order to have an association with the fovea of the fixing eye. Following conditions facilitate the development of ARC: 1. Early onset strabismus: a good neural plasticity is required for the new connections, 2. Constant angle of deviation: Constancy of the stimuli favors development of new connections and 3. Small angle of deviation especially esodeviations and rarely exodeviations: It is rarely found in exotropias as they are generally intermittent or variable due to good fusional vergence. ARC allows some binocular vision with limited fusion to be maintained in the presence of heterotropia.
zero but less than the objective angle of deviation, it is unharmonious ARC. The difference between objective and subjective angle is the angle of anomaly. Hence in harmonious ARC, subjective angle is zero and objective angle is equal to angle of anomaly. In unharmonious ARC, objective angle is greater than subjective angle and hence angle of anomaly. In NRC, objective and subjective angles are same and angle of anomaly is zero. The objective angle of deviation can be measured by prism bar cover test (PBCT) or by cover-uncover test, and on the synoptophore with alternate on-off method. The subjective angle of deviation can be measured by following methods: 1. After image test 2. Synoptophore 3. Worth four dot test 4. Maddox rod or red filter test 5. Polaroid dissociation 6. Phase difference haploscope and 7. Bagolinis striated glasses.
Diagnosis of ARC
It is necessary to measure the angle of deviation by subjective and objective methods to diagnose ARC. ARC is present when there is difference in the subjective and objective deviations. In NRC objective and subjective angles are equal. If the subjective angle is zero, there is no subjective strabismus. In the presence of objective angle showing a strabismus, ARC is termed as harmonious ARC. If the subjective angle is not
387
Amblyopia
Amblyopia is a condition with unilateral or bilateral decrease of visual functions caused by form vision deprivation and/or abnormal binocular interaction. It cannot be explained by a disorder of ocular media or visual pathway. It is a condition caused by abnormal visual experience during early childhood, the critical period of visual development. In appropriate cases it is reversible by therapeutic measures.
Synoptophore
The objective angle is measured by patient alternately fixing till there is no movement of eyes on alternate on-off. The subjective angle is measured by the patient aligning the two images by his perception of simultaneous perception slides.
Classification of Amblyopia
1. Strabismic amblyopia 2. Anisometropic amblyopia (unilateral or asymmetric) a. Anisohyperopic b. Anisomyopic 3. Form vision deprivation amblyopia (unilateral or bilateral) a. Stimulus deprivation amblyopia or amblyopia ex-anopsia, ptosis (covering pupil), opacities in cornea, lens or vitreous, unilateral occlusion or penalization b. Ametropic amblyopia (uncorrected bilateral high refractive error) i. Hyperopia ii. Myopia iii. Astigmatism (meridional amblyopia) 4. Nystagmus related amblyopia 5. Organic amblyopia a. Subclinical macular damage b. Malorientation of cones c. Cone deficiency syndrome Amblyopia is a disorder of visual perception, only one of which is the visual acuity on the
388
Diagnosis of Amblyopia
For diagnosis of unilateral amblyopia difference of vision between two eyes or in case bilateral amblyopia , difference from the age-related norm is taken into consideration. Clinically, a difference of two-line on Snellen chart (one octave difference) is considered significant. Yet another well recognized feature of strabismic amblyopic vision is that it is not degraded by neutral density filters, it may even show some improvement. However, in anisometropic amblyopes, an equal deterioration is seen in amblyopic and normal eyes. Other organic retinal pathologies causing diminution of vision are susceptible to deterioration by neutral density filters. This test can thus distinguish functional amblyopia from organic ones. Abnormal contour interaction is seen in the form of degradation of visual acuity for objects placed in a row or line (linear acuity), compared to the acuity of the same object viewed separately (single letter acuity). This phenomenon has been described as the crowding phenomenon. Crowding phenomenon is present to some extent even in normal subjects (critical area of separation=1.9 to 3.8 min of arc). In amblyopes this is more pronounced, similar to the critical area of separation of peripheral retina of normal human subjects (8.4 to 23.3 min of arc).The crowding phenomenon has also been attributed to the poor visual acuity present in amblyopes. But its importance in prognosticating progress in amblyopia therapy should be remembered. The single letter acuity improves more rapidly during
389
Stereoacuity
Stereopsis refers to our ability to appreciate depth that is the ability to distinguish the relative
390
vectographic technique (Fricke and Siderov). Examples of random-dot stereotests used in the clinic are Frisby stereotest, Randot stereotest, Random-dot E stereotest and Lang stereotest. Stereopsis can be tested by following methods: (i) Synoptophore with stereopsis slides (ii) Titmus fly stereotest with polaroid spectacles (Figs 23.16). (iii) Randot stereotest (iv) TNO test with red-green goggles (v) Frisby and Lang stereotest without using glasses (vi) Special 3-D pictures. The last two are examples in which the dissociation is not achieved by glasses which are not liked by children. The Lang test is based on the principle of panography where two images are printed on the same card each interrupting the other with regular linear interruptions. A prismatic film laminated over the picture ensures that one image is visible to right eye only and the other to the left eye only. The two, when fused in spite of the disparity, create a 3-D vision (Fig. 23.17). The newer special 3-D pictures, much in fashion; recently have two pictures specially merged in such a manner that if the two eyes are artificially diverged but controlling accommodation (as if looking for distance through the print), each
Randot Stereotest
Randot stereotest (Fig. 23.18) is the most popular clinical test and has replaced the earlier popular Titmus fly test. It uses Julesz random dot background to mask the monocular clues which are there with the animal tests and Wirts circle test. Geometric figures like square circle, triangle and star are also presented devoid of any monocular clues. But the letter type figures, though a better test, are usually not appreciated by small children. The test requires polaroid glasses to be worn by the patient. It is used at a distance of 40 cm
391
and thus tests near binocular vision, therefore, the myopes up to 3 diopters can be missed in the screening test. The Wirt circles (1-10) test has the stereoacuity from 400 arc seconds to 20 arc seconds.
TNO Test
TNO test (Fig. 23.19) is also based on the randomdot background but uses red-green glasses for dissociation of the two images. It tests stereoacuity from 480 arc seconds to 15 arc seconds.
of the plate is closest to the observer. By altering the thickness of the plate and the distance from the subject different stereoacuities can be assessed. For 30 cm viewing distance, the 6 mm, 3 mm and 1.5 mm plates represent 600, 300 and 150 arc seconds of stereoacuity, respectively. This assumes the interpupillary distance of 60 mm, but no significant change is caused by different IPD.
Frisby Test
The Frisby stereotest (Fig. 23.20) consists of three perspex plates of different thickness: 6 mm, 3 mm and 1.5 mm. On one face of each plate are found squares, three of which are filled with a random pattern of blue triangles of various sizes and the fourth of which has a central circular area that is not patterned. On the opposite side of the plate coincident with this area is a circular pattern of similar blue triangles. The plate is held in front of a white board and when viewed directly, the squares are all filled with random patterns although in one square a binocular viewer will see a circle standing up from the plate (crossed disparity) or lying below the rest of the design (uncrossed disparity) depending on which side
Normal Stereoacuity
The adult individuals are capable of appreciating stereopsis with disparities as fine as 1520 arc seconds. The adult norm is 40 arc seconds. For children, 3-5 years old the norm is 70 arc seconds, and for 5-7 years it is 50 arc seconds. Children above 8 years have the adult norm.
392
Fixation Disparity
The concept of fixation disparity is important to understand the relationship of binocularity and heterophoria. Ogle et al described the fusion disparity as a physiological sensory phenomenon occurring in heterophoria, in which a deviation of the visual axes of 6-10 minutes of arc is compatible with bifoveal binocular single vision The phoria that is measured after disrupting fusion by cover- uncover test or similar methods is dissociated phoria. Fixation disparity is dependent upon the Panums fusional area. Under binocular conditions there may be a misalignment of the fixation points in the two eyes within the limits of the Panums area of fusion, which is fused and is seen as one. This
fusible misalignment is fixation disparity (Fig. 23.21A). This is quantified in minutes of arc. Under binocular conditions of viewing a vertical line is shown such that the upper half is seen by right eye and the lower half by the left eye, each viewed through polaroid dissociation. If there is a misalignment, prisms are used to align the two halves. This is called associated phoria. The rest of the picture shown apart from the vertical lines is seen by the two eyes and function as a fusion lock. The associated phoria is different from the phoria seen under dissociation and is, therefore, named differently. Fixation disparity curves: Under forced vergence situations, using 3, 6, 9, 12 pd prisms base-in, and base-out alternatively, the fixation disparity and the associated phoria can be charted and plotted. These plots are called fixation disparity curves. There are four common types of fixation disparity curves (Fig. 23.21B). Individuals with Type I curves are frequently asymptomatic. Those individuals having a steep slope, greater than 0.77 minute/prism diopter in esophoria and 1.06 minutes/prism diopter in exophoria are usually symptomatic. Type II curves do not intersect the
393
Fig. 23.21B: The four fixation disparity curve types developed by Ogle et al. The type of curve depends upon the curve shape and not on the vertical or horizontal position of the curve on the graph
Wesson Card
X-axis. Type IV curve is associated with unstable binocularity. The individuals with types II, III and IV are usually symptomatic. The flatter portion of the curve represents the condition of rapid adaptation to the vergence stimuli. Vision therapy may be considered to successfully flatten these curves and make the patient asymptomatic. Forced fixation disparity curves can also be plotted using different spherical lenses (in prepresbyopes) using lens power + 2.0 D to - 3.0 D in 0.5 D or 1.0 D steps. These forced fixation disparity curves are also used to measure AC/A ratio. Fixation disparity can be measured by Sheedy disparometer, Mallet unit and Wesson card. Wesson card has to be viewed through polaroid glasses (Fig. 23.23). It has vertical lines in the upper half (seen by one eye) and an arrow in the lower half (seen by the other eye). The rest of the card is viewed binocularly.
Disparometer
A close-up view of the fixation disparity targets on the disparometer is shown in the Figure 23.22. The fine reading print shown adjacent to the
Fig. 23.22: Disparometer for measuring angular amount of fixation disparity, A Front or patient side, B Back or clinician side
394
10. 11.
12. 13.
14.
Bibliography
1. Adelstein FE, Cuppers C. Analysis of the motor situation in strabismus. In: Arruga A (Ed). International strabismus symposium (university of Giessen, 1966) New York, S. Karger A.G. 1968; 139-48. 2. Bagolini B. Tecnica par Lesame della visione binoculare sensa introduzone di elimenti dissicianti test del vetro striato. Boll Ocul 1958;37:195. 3. Bielschowsky A. Lectures on motor anomalies, Hanover NH. 1943. (reprinted 1956) Dartmouth College Publications. 4. Bixenmann WW, Noorden GK von. Apparent foveal displacement in normal subjects and in cyclotropia. Ophthalmologica 1982;89:58. 5. Brodie SE. Photographic calibration of the Hirschberg test. Invest Ophthalmol Vis Sci 1987;28: 736. 6. Broniarczyk-Loba A, Nowakowska O, Laudanska-Olszewska I, Omulecki W. Advancements in diagnosis and surgical treatment of strabismus in adolescent and adults. Klin Oczna 2003;105(6):410-3. 7. Bruckner R. Exakte strabismus diagnostik bei Yz -3 jahrigen, Kindem mit einem einfachen Durch leuch tungs test Ophthalmologica 1962;144:184. 8. Burian HM. Normal and anomalous correspondence in Allen JH (Ed). Strabismus Ophthalmic symposium II. St. Louis, Mosby,1958. 9. Capobianco NM. The subjective measurement of the near point of convergence and its significance 15. 16.
Incomitant Strabismus
395
S MEENAKSHI, T SURENDRAN
24
Incomitant Strabismus
(b) Previous surgery such as cataract, glaucoma implant and scleral buckle (c) Treatment for thyroid eye disease. Due to the incomitant nature of the strabismus patient may adopt an anomalous head posture for fusion. During duction and version testing, one must be aware of restrictive and paretic muscles giving the impression of an overacting yoke muscle. Primary and secondary deviations should be measured meticulously. Primary deviation is measured with the prism in front of the affected eye and secondary deviation, with the prism in front of the normal eye. Alternate prism cover testing should be done in all cardinal positions of gaze. Ability of the patient to proper fusion should be ascertained with neutralizing prisms or Fresnel prisms for both Snellen and free space. It is important to ascertain fusion for both primary and down gaze as these are the important functional gazes for activities of daily living. Head tilt measurements are important to assess cyclovertical muscle involvement.
Incomitant strabismus comprises a large group of disorders in which the amount of deviation is different in different gaze positions. Broadly these can be categorized in paralytic and restrictive or mechanical. Paralytic strabismus includes: 1. Third cranial nerve (Oculomotor nerve) palsy 2. Fourth cranial nerve (Trochlear nerve) palsy 3. Sixth cranial nerve (Abducens nerve) palsy 4. Paralysis of nerve supplying single muscle 5. Monocular elevation deficiency 6. Monocular depression deficiency and 7. Mbius syndrome. Restrictive strabismus includes: 1. Duanes retraction syndrome 2. Orbital blow-out fractures with muscle entrapment 3. Thyroid related strabismus 4. Congenital fibrosis and 5. Browns syndrome. Following important points must be considered while examining a case of incomitant strabismus: 1. As most of the incomitant strabismus are acquired a detailed history should be obtained about: (a) Trauma to the head and orbit
2.
3.
4.
5. 6.
7.
396
Paralytic Strabismus
Third Cranial Nerve Palsy
The third cranial nerve supplies the levator palpebrae superioris, superior rectus, medial rectus, inferior rectus, and inferior oblique. Therefore, the patient with third nerve palsy may present with a combination of the following symptoms and signs: 1. Diplopia: horizontal and vertical 2. Ptosis 3. Exotropia and hypotropia 4. Limited ocular motility in the direction of action of affected muscles (Fig. 24.1), a partial paresis involving only the superior or inferior divisions or isolated muscle palsy may also be a presentation.
Incomitant Strabismus
5. Paralysis of the pupillary sphincter with resultant mydriasis or pupil sparing type 6. Long-standing palsy may have aberrant regeneration in the form of ipsilateral retraction of the upper lid on attempted adduction and/or attempted infraduction, as well as pupillary constriction. If the pupil is spared the cause is most likely vascular. When the pupil is involved, the cause is likely to be an aneurysm. Patients with vasculopathy and pupil sparing third nerve palsy should be observed daily for one week, then weekly for one month, and finally monthly for six months. To rule out concurrent superior oblique palsy, patient is asked to attempt adduction and one looks for incyclotorsion by observing the conjunctival blood vessels. 1. Head tilt in both congenital and acquired palsy 2. Facial asymmetry: The side of the face on the side of the tilt is often less developed in the congenital variety. This may be easily evaluated by looking at old photographs. 3. Torsional diplopia can be assessed subjectively and objectively. 4. The three-step test is the key to making the diagnosis of isolated cyclovertical muscle palsy. The test requires motility measurements first in the primary position. This step incriminates the depressors of the hypertropic eye and the elevators of the hypotropic eye. Next measurements are performed in the side gazes and an increase in hypertropia is noted (Fig. 24.2). This step eliminates the two muscles that do not act in the field of gaze showing the increased hypertropia. The third step, which is the head tilt to either side, exposes the weakened muscle that is unable to elevate the eye. 5. Version testing may reveal an ipsilateral inferior oblique overaction, ipsilateral superior oblique underaction and contralateral superior oblique overaction due to failure of the paretic eye to infraduct well in abduction giving the impression of overaction. 6. Bilateral superior oblique palsy has some unique features. These include history of closed head trauma, subjective torsion, objective torsion more than 10 degrees, alternating hypertropia on head tilts, Vpattern esotropia and a chin-down posture.
397
Etiology
The etiology of third cranial nerve palsy differs in pediatric and adult groups. Causes of pediatric onset third nerve palsy are: 1. Congenital due to birth trauma 2. Trauma 3. Inflammation 4. Neoplasm and 5. Aneurysm. Causes of adult onset third nerve palsy are: 1. Aneurysms 2. Vascular disease 3. Trauma 4. Neoplasm 5. Ideopathic.
Etiology
The etiology of fourth cranial nerve palsy may be congenital and acquired. 1. Congenital is the commonest cause of fourth cranial nerve palsy in many series. 2. Acquired fourth cranial nerve palsy may be due to trauma, tumor, aneurysm and iatrogenic.
398
Etiology
The sixth cranial nerve palsy occurs due to infection, trauma, neoplasm, systemic vascular disorders, systemic hematological disorders, intracranial hypertension, raised intracranial pressure, inflammatory disorders and idiopathic.
Principles of Management
1. If the cause is vascular or postinfectious, many patients improve with time. It is prudent to wait 3 to 6 months for recovery before contemplating surgical intervention. 2. Conservative management options are available to tide over during the waiting period. Options include monocular occlusion, prisms either ground in or Fresnel to help patient fuse and carry on with activities of daily living.
Incomitant Strabismus
This can be achieved by: a. Weakening the overacting antagonist b. Strengthening the paretic muscle after ascertaining the residual muscle function. This may be obtained by shortening of lateral rectus muscle in the sixth nerve palsy, or tuck of the superior oblique. c. If muscle function is very poor one must consider transposition procedures such as Jensens or Hummelsheims procedure. Full tendon transposition for the lateral rectus palsy and superior oblique transposition procedures for the third nerve palsy are recommended.
399
3. Some patients are able to manage with a small head posture especially patients with mild sixth nerve palsy. 4. Botulinum toxin A injection into the antagonist muscle may prevent contracture and help with the recovery of the paretic muscle. 5. Pre-surgical in-office testing includes: a. To assess the amount of residual muscle function in the paretic muscle. This is done by assessment of saccades clinically or through saccadic velocity testing. This can also be done by the force generation test. b. To assess the presence of contracture of the antagonist muscle. This is done by the force duction test. 6. Surgical goals include fusion in primary gaze or with a minimal head posture and cosmesis.
Etiology
Etiology may be congenital or acquired. Congenital causes include supranuclear defects, primary superior rectus paresis, primary inferior rectus restriction and inferior rectus restriction secondary to superior rectus paresis. Acquired deficiency may occur due to cerebrovascular disease, tumors, sarcoidosis and infectious diseases. Monocular elevation deficiency has following clinical presentations: 1. Unilateral limitation of up gaze above midline with accompanying ptosis 2. Hypotropia 3. Limitation of elevation in both abduction and adduction 4. Abnormal head posture in the form of chin elevation for fusion
400
Systemic Findings
Mbius syndrome is associated with congenital deformities. The most common deformity is clubfoot. Brachial deformities and pectoral muscle hypoplasia (Poland anomaly) are common. Brachydactyly and syndactyly are also described. CT or MRI shows calcification in the region of VI nerve. Management involves a multidisciplinary approach and is primarily cosmetic.
Restrictive Strabismus
Duanes Retraction Syndrome
Duanes retraction syndrome (DRS) is a congenital ocular motility disorder characterized by limitation of abduction or/and adduction, palpebral fissure narrowing on attempted adduction (Fig. 24.4) due to retraction of globe and upshoot or downshoot on adduction due to leash effect of tight lateral rectus. It is postulated that a disturbance in normal embryogenic development causes Duane syndrome. It is further substantiated by the frequent associations of the syndrome with ocular anomalies and congenital abnormalities of the facial, skeletal, and CNS. Agenesis of the sixth nerve or nucleus and innervation of the lateral rectus muscle by the inferior division of third nerve nucleus cause simultaneous cocontracture
Mbius Syndrome
A child with Mbius syndrome usually presents in infancy. The child is brought by the caregiver for the lack of facial movements while crying and inability to smile. The child may be unable to close his mouth, may have a prominent upper lip and indistinct speech. No racial, sex predilection has been described, and the inheritance pattern is variable.
Clinical Features
The clinical features include congenital facial diplegia, bilateral abducens nerve palsies and congenital bilateral incomplete facial palsy resulting in a mask-like face. Nerve, brainstem,
Incomitant Strabismus
Type 1: Duane is the most frequent classical form. Apart from the defective abduction, retraction of the globe, and palpebral fissure narrowing on adduction, additional abnormalities like A or V phenomenon, up drift or down drift of the affected eye on adduction, or attempted abduction may be present. Type 2: Duane is characterized by limitation or complete palsy of adduction with exotropia of the paretic eye, abduction appears to be normal or only slightly limited. As in Duane 1, distinct narrowing of the palpebral fissure and retraction of the globe on attempted adduction are also present. Type 3: Duane is a combination of limitation or absence of both abduction and adduction of the affected eye. In this form, adduction and abduction may be defective in the equal degree (affected eye in parallel position), or adduction more defective than abduction (affected eye in divergent position). Globe retraction and narrowing of the palpebral fissure on attempted adduction are also present. Duane' syndrome is associated with ocular and systemic anomalies. Ocular anomalies include optic nerve hypoplasia, morning glory syndrome, congenital ptosis, dysplasia of the iris stroma, cataracts, heterochromia, Marcus Gunn jaw-winking, choroidal coloboma, crocodile tears, and microphthalmos. Goldenhar syndrome, Klippel-Feil anomaly and congenital labyrinthine deafness are systemic anomalies.
401
of lateral rectus and medial rectus resulting in globe retraction on attempted adduction. DRS is more common in female, often unilateral and left eye is more affected (75%). Both sporadic and autosomal dominant inheritance have been reported. Duane' syndrome is traditionally classified into 3 types:
Management
Usually surgical results in Duanes retraction syndrome are disappointing. Surgery is done for abnormal head posture, up shoot or down shoot and enophthalmos. The most common indication for surgical treatment is an unacceptable face turn to permit fusion. Patients who have Duane's syndrome with exotropia in primary position
402
Browns Syndrome
Browns syndrome is a restrictive strabismus marked by limitation of elevation that is worse when the eye is in adduction (Fig. 24.5). It is characterized by following features: 1. Limitation of elevation in adduction. There is some limitation of elevation in abduction but the limitation is more marked in adduction. 2. Minimal or no hypotropia in primary gaze 3. Minimal or no over action of ipsilateral superior oblique 4. Divergence in upgaze causing Y-pattern 5. Limited elevation in abduction can produce pseudo inferior oblique over action of the fellow eye 6. Intorsion on attempted up gaze 7. Compensatory head posture chin elevation and face turn to keep the affected eye in abduction 8. Good fusion and stereopsis 9. In adduction, palpebral fissure widens and there is a down shoot of the involved eye. 10. Forced duction test is positive
Incomitant Strabismus
status should be closely monitored in young children. Spontaneous resolution may occur in some cases. Corticosteroids may be beneficial. In the severe form of the syndrome with hypotropia in primary gaze, surgery is indicated. Other indications for surgery include anomalous head posture, loss of binocularity in a child and cosmetically unacceptable down shoot in adduction. The surgery is based on the principle of lengthening the superior oblique tendon. Procedures such as tenotomy and tenectomy are not controlled to achieve a controlled elongation of superior oblique tendon a Wright superior oblique tendon expander can be used.
403
Eustin and colleagues graded Browns syndrome into 3 types: 1. Mild: Restriction of elevation in adduction, no hypotropia in primary gaze and no down shoot in adduction 2. Moderate: No hypotropia in primary gaze and down shoot on adduction 3. Severe: Hyportropia in primary gaze, marked down shoot on adduction and amblyopia, usually patients develop compensatory head posture and have fusion. If the patient presents with a manifest hypotropia and no compensatory head posture or have associated horizontal strabismus, there is increased risk of amblyopia. Brown's syndrome is classified into congenital and acquired forms. The congenital form is subdivided into true and pseudo. Cysticercosis is an important cause of acquired Browns syndrome. Differential diagnosis of the syndrome include double elevator palsy, blow-out fracture, inferior oblique palsy, superior oblique palsy and Duanes retraction syndrome.
Treatment
The mild and moderate form of the syndrome without strabismus in primary position should be left untreated. Visual acuity and binocular
404
Management
In initial phase of injury, surgery should be withheld until two weeks till edema subsides. Patient should be followed-up closely with serial diplopia and Hess charting. Surgery should be deferred if sufficient diplopia-free area is present in primary and down gaze. Surgery can be performed for significant enophthalmos. Teflon plate can be placed subperiostially. For troublesome diplopia, Fresnel prisms trial can be considered. Initially inferior rectus recession can be planned for surgical correction.
Management
Goals of management are: (a) clear the visual axis, (b) alleviate chin-up posture, and (c) align eyes in primary position. Large recessions after careful dissection of intermuscular septal attachments, with the use of preplaced sutures, give good results. Frontalis sling is the mainstay of ptosis repair. Absence of Bells phenomenon often necessitates long-term generous use of lubricants in these patients.
Bibliography
1. Ahluwalia BK, Gupta NC, Goel SR, et al. Study of Duanes retraction syndrome. Acta Ophthalmologica (Copen) 1988;66:77. 2. Brown HW. True and simulated superior oblique sheath syndrome. Doc Ophthalmol 1973;34:123. 3. Kraft SP, Jacobson ME. Technique of adjustable suture strabismus surgery. Ophthalmic Surg 1990;21:633. 4. Park MM, Eustis HS. Simultaneous superior tenotomy and inferior oblique recession in Brown syndrome. Ophthalmology 1987;94:1043. 5. Sharma P. Strabismus simplified. New Delhi, Modern Publishers, 1999. 6. Smith RS, Damasat M. Acquired orbital retraction syndrome after 6th nerve paralysis. Neurology 1973;14:147. 7. von Noorden GK. Binocular Vision and Ocular Motility. 4th ed. St Louis, Mosby, 1990. 8. Wilson WE, Eustis HS, Park MM. Brown syndrome. Survey Ophthalmol 1989;34:153.
Clinical Features
Immediately following injury with cricket or tennis ball or road traffic accidents, the patient presents with black eye and restriction of ocular movement in all directions of gaze which usually subsides by end of first week. It presents as specific restrictive strabismus with diplopia in up and down gaze due to entrapment of soft tissue in fractured fragment, hypoesthesia along infraorbital nerve and enophthalmos due to herniation of orbital contents into the maxillary sinus. The presence of muscle entrapment can be confirmed on force duction test (FDT). Saccadic
405
MS SRIDHAR
25
Dry eye (DE) is a disorder of tear film due to tear deficiency or excessive tear evaporation causing damage to the interpalpebral ocular surface and associated with symptoms of ocular discomfort.1 Presently, DE is classified into 2 major groups: Tear deficient DE and evaporative DE. Tear deficient DE (ATDAqueous tear deficiency) is a disorder of lacrimal function causing decreased secretion of aqueous or can result from failure of transfer of lacrimal fluid into the conjunctival sac. In evaporative or tear sufficient DE, lacrimal function is normal and in most cases, the tear abnormality is due to increased tear evaporation. Meibomian gland (MG) dysfunction and blinking disorders are common causes for evaporative DE.
Clinical Features
The usual symptoms of a patient with dry eyes caused by ATD include tearing, redness, burning, blurring of vision, fluctuating vision, itching, irritation, dryness, foreign body sensation, tired eyes and heaviness of lids. Symptoms tend to get aggravated in hot, arid climates and by certain occupations like exposure to chemicals, dust,
406
Diagnostic Procedures in Dry Eyes Syndrome Schirmers Test with Nasal Stimulation
After performing routine Schirmers test, a cotton swab is inserted into the nasal cavity towards the direction of ethmoid sinus. A 75 mm strip of Whatman filter paper #41 is placed in the conjunctival fornix and the length of wetting measured after 5 minutes. Wetting of less than 10 mm is considered abnormal. It is advisable to perform this test on a different occasion. Patients, who do not respond to nasal stimulation by an increase in the lacrimal secretion, are thought to have an invasion of lymphocytes into their lacrimal glands,5 resulting in anatomic destruction of the gland. Such patients do not show any response even on maximal stimulation. Patients who respond, the lacrimal gland is viable. When patient responds to nasal stimulation but is less responsive to conjunctival stimulation, it is postulated that the reflex circuit between the lacrimal gland and the conjunctiva is disturbed.
407
Fig. 25.1: Schirmers test showing the Whatman filter at the junction of medial 2/3rd and lateral 1/3rd of lower lid in the fornix
normally. The test is carried out in dim illumination and under standard conditions of temperature and humidity. The length of wetting is recorded after 5 minutes. Wetting of less than 5 mm is considered abnormal.
408
Fig. 25.2: Diffuse slit-lamp view showing rose bengal staining (arrow) in a patient with aqueous tear deficiency (ATD)
Fig. 25.3: Diffuse slit-lamp view showing fluorescein staining with filaments in a dry eye patient
strips.27 A double vital staining technique was described at the NEI Workshop.1 A 2 l mixture of 1% rose bengal and 1% fluorescein (preservative-free) and non-preserved saline without anesthetic, is instilled into the conjunctiva. The areas of staining are graded on slit-lamp examination. The interpretation of rose bengal staining in dry eyes is based on two factors, intensity and location. Van Bijsterveld 28 reported a grading scale that evaluates the intensity based on a scale of 0 to 3 in three areas: nasal conjunctiva, temporal conjunctiva and cornea, with a maximum possible score of 9. The classic location for rose bengal staining in aqueous tear deficiency is interpalpebral conjunctiva, which appears in the shape of two triangles whose bases are at the limbus. The NEI workshop has recommended division of nasal and temporal conjunctiva into 3 zones, each graded from 0-3, with a maximum possible score of 18. Rose bengal staining is considered more sensitive and more specific in detecting patients with dry eyes than either reduced tear breakup time or a low Schirmers test. Rose bengal staining may help to differentiate between ATD and lipid tear deficiency (LTD) by studying the distribution of stain in the non-exposure zone.
Preferential staining has been observed in nonexposure zones in the LTD, whereas in ATD, the staining is seen in the exposed interpalpebral areas.29 Fluorescein is another diagnostic dye commonly used for diagnosis of dry eye. The dye penetrates intercellular spaces and indicates increased epithelial permeability.26 Fluorescein generally stains the cornea more than the conjunctiva (Fig. 25.3). Lissamine green B has been investigated as a marker for ocular surface disease. It is found to detect dead or degenerated cells and it produces less irritation after topical administration than rose bengal.
409
Visual Scale
This is a safe and inexpensive method that
410
Laboratory Tests
Tear Film Osmolarity
Tear film (TF) osmolarity is said to represent the gold standard in the diagnosis of DE because of its greater sensitivity and specificity as a single test or in combination with other tests. Though, it is unable to distinguish between ATD DE and Evaporative DE. The osmolarity of basal tears is measured and thus reflex tearing has to be avoided. There exists a need for an instrument that is more reliable and freely available for testing TF osmolarity. Technical errors resulting in falsely abnormal values are reported.
Tear Ferning
Conjunctival mucus from a normal eye crystallizes in the form of ferns when placed on a dry glass slide and observed under the microscope. The scrapings are obtained from lower nasal palpebral conjunctiva, 30 immediately following drying; the slide is evaluated under a microscope to find typical mucus arborization or ferning. Ocular ferning test from conjunctival scrapings is considered as a quantitative test for mucin deficiency. The conjunctival mucus may be reduced or absent in those patients with conditions like chemical burns, ocular cicatricial pemphigoid and Stevens-Johnson syndrome.
Serum Autoantibodies
Detection of serum autoantibodies is used to diagnose Sjgrens syndrome ATD. One or more of the following autoantibodies may be found: Antinuclear antibodies (ANA titer 1:160), rheumatoid factors (RF titer 1:160) or Sjgrens syndromespecific antibodies such as anti-Ro (Sjgren-A) or anti-La (Sjgren-B). In one study33 antinuclear antibodies (ANA) were the most frequently detected antibodies in ATD being present in 80%. In contrast, positive RF was found in 65% and positive SS-A in 30% of the same group of patients.34
References
1. Lemp MA. Report of the National Eye Institute/ Industry Workshop on Clinical Trials in Dry Eyes. CLAO 1995;21:221-32. 2. Tabbara KF, Wagoner MD. Diagnosis and management of dry eye syndrome. Int Ophthalmol Clin 1996;36:61-76. 3. Pflugfelder SC, Tseng SCG, Sanabin O, et al. Evaluation of subjective assessment and objective diagnostic tests for diagnosing tear film disorders known to cause ocular irritation. Cornea 1998;17:38-56.
411
412
26
Lacrimal Gland
Evaluation of Epiphora
Nerve Supply
The lacrimal gland has got sensory, secretomotor and, sympathetic supply. Sensory supply comes through the lacrimal branch of the ophthalmic division of the Vth cranial nerve. Secretomotor supply is via the parasympathetic fibers. Parasympathetic preganglionic fibers arise from the lacrimal nucleus in the pons near the glossopharyngeal nucleus. Sympathetic postganglionic fibers come from superior cervical ganglion and reach the lacrimal gland via deep petrosal and also along with the sympathetic fibers around lacrimal artery and nerve.2
Evaluation of Epiphora
(0-5 mm long). It then enters a small diverticulum of the sac, the lacrimal sinus of Maier at a point on the posterolateral surface of the sac about 2.5 mm from the apex of the sac. The common canaliculus is directed anteriorly forming an acute angle of about 45o with the sac before entering it. This acute entry into the lacrimal sac creates a potential mucosal flap or valve across the opening, the valve of Rosenmuller.2,3 The canaliculi are lined by stratified squamous epithelium supported with elastic tissue that can be dilated to three times the normal diameter.2
Fig. 26.1. Lacrimal system
413
is paler than its surrounding, serving as a guide in case of finding a stenosed punctum. The upper punctum is slightly medial relative to the lower but when the eyelids are closed they appose each other. The medial ends of the lower lid retractors also help stabilize the puncta and prevent punctal eversion on blinking. The patency of the puncta is maintained by the surrounding dense fibrous tissue continuous with the adjacent tarsal plate. Canaliculi: The canaliculi are hollow tubes of 0.5 mm diameter connecting the puncta to the lacrimal sac. Each canaliculus has a vertical part, which is 2 mm in length and a horizontal part of 8-10 mm, which follows the eyelid margin converging towards the medial canthus. The canaliculi are enveloped by the orbicularis muscle fibers and elastic tissue, except on the posterior walls, which are covered by conjunctiva through which the probe can be easily seen. The upper is slightly shorter than the lower. There is a dilatation at the junction of these two parts, which is the ampulla. The canaliculi pierce the periorbita of the lacrimal sac separately, uniting at an angle of 25o to form a short common canaliculus
Lacrimal sac: The lacrimal sac lies in the lacrimal fossa formed by the lacrimal bone and the frontal process of the maxilla in the anterior part of the medial wall of the orbit which is continuous below with the nasolacrimal duct. Vertical suture line between the frontal process of the maxilla and the lacrimal bone is slightly medial to the middle of the floor of the fossa. This is of surgical importance because in dacryocystorhinostomy operation, the first bony opening is made through this line. The lacrimal sac is 12-15 mm tall, 4-6 mm anteroposteriorly and 2-3 mm wide. The sac above the junction of the common canalicular duct is known as fundus. An imaginary line drawn from the medial canthus to the first upper molar tooth that slopes downward and backward at 15-25 indicates the long axis of the sac. A portion of the periorbita, which splits at the posterior lacrimal crest, encloses the lacrimal sac and then joins at the anterior lacrimal crest forming the anterior and the posterior lacrimal fascia, respectively. Anterior ethmoidal air cells and vessels are medial to the upper part of the sac, the cribriform plate and the frontal sinus floor lie superior to the sac. Between the posterior surface of the sac and the posterior lacrimal fascia there is a vascular plexus; injury to the plexus cause troublesome bleeding. Anteriorly, the upper
414
Orbicularis Oculi
Orbicularis oculi is the muscle that acts as the protector of the eyes through its blinking action. It has got two main partsthe orbital and the palpebral part. Our main concern here is the latter. The palpebral part is again divided into pretarsalthat part of orbicularis lying over the tarsus and the preseptal part over the orbital septum. The insertions of the orbicularis at the medial canthus around the lacrimal sac are called heads. The preseptal part has its superficial head inserted into the medial canthal tendon and the deep head into the fascia on the dome of the lacrimal sac and into the upper part of the posterior lacrimal crest. The pretarsal part has its circumferential fibers oriented over the superior and inferior tarsal plate. Laterally, it originates from the horizontal raphe and also from the lateral orbital tubercle. Medially, it is inserted into the anterior and posterior lacrimal crest by its two headsthe superficial and the deep head.
Evaluation of Epiphora
Two other muscle strips, the marginal preciliary and the retrociliary (muscle of Riolan) exist that are part of the pretarsal part of the orbicularis oculi. Nerve supply to the orbicularis oculi muscle is by the facial nerve. normal downhill slope of the eyelids but along with a passive reflux into the lacrimal lake. With the start of the blink the tears are propelled towards the puncta. As the process continues the open puncta move towards each other and occlude. Due to the orientation of the superficial and the deep heads of the orbicularis around the canaliculi and their firm attachment to the bone, the eyelid is pulled medially on contraction, the canaliculi are shortened squeezing the tear already in the ampulla and the canaliculi into the sac. The attachment of the deep head of the preseptal part of the orbicularis into the fascia on the dome of the lacrimal sac pulls the sac laterally on contraction enabling the sac filling (negative pressure). The valve of Rosenmuller reduces backflow, once the tears are in the sac. On opening the eyes, the muscle around the canaliculi relaxes leading to the flow of tears into canaliculi again due to the reduced intracanalicular pressure. Tears can also gravitate down the nasolacrimal duct passively. But active drainage into the nose is by the complex action of the Horner muscle.
415
Evaluation of Epiphora
Tearing can broadly be grouped under two main headings: 1. Lacrimation (Hypersecretion of tears) 2. Epiphora (Impairment of drainage) It is essential to differentiate between two in planning the management. Epiphora is a condition where there is excessive tearing due to reduced tear outflow, i.e. defective tear drainage. Obstruction at any point along the lacrimal drainage pathway, from the punctum to the nose can cause epiphora. This can lead to epiphora varying in severity from intermittent epiphora with a partial block to tears
416
Examination
The lacrimal examination can be divided under three heading: 1. Periorbital, lid and lacrimal system assessment General examination of the face, periorbital and medial canthal areas and eyelids is essential. It includes: Slit-lamp examination of the puncta, external eye and tear meniscus, Syringing, Diagnostic probing and Fluorescein dye test. 2. Examination of the nasal cavity 3. Radiological examination 4. Newer modalities
History
A meticulous history taking is vital to the evaluation. Patients symptoms, past ophthalmic, nasal and medical history should be elicited. A history of allergic diathesis and use of drugs should be obtained. In case of congenital tearing, parents may complain of constant tearing with minimal or no mucopurulent discharge suggesting upper
Evaluation of Epiphora
of the lid with utmost care is needed to diagnose the condition. Horizontal laxity of the eyelid can be estimated by Pinch test and snap back test: Pinch test: Using the thumb and the index finger, the lid is pulled firmly away from the globe, the distance between the lid and the eye is measured and the laxity is documented as: None 5 mm Minimal 5-7 mm Mild 8-9 mm Moderate 10-12 mm Severe >12 mm Snap back test: The speed with which the lower lid settles back against the globe after being pulled down and released is to be observed, as well as whether there is a short gap between the lid and globe once settled and before the first blink. Medial canthal tendon laxity: It is always to be assessed while evaluating a case of epiphora. It is graded with the lateral distraction test and by noting the position of the lower punctum in relation to the upper. These tests depend on the fact that the lower puncta normally lies at the plica at rest and also when pulled laterally. The patient is made to sit in front of the examiner at arm length distance with their eyes at the same level. The patient is asked to look at the bridge of the examiners nose and without inducing accommodative convergence by moving too close, the lower punctum position is noted relative to the upper. -1 Punctal medialization 0 Normal +1 Midway between the plica and the medial limbus +2 In line with the medial limbus +3 - +6 Beyond the medial limbus
417
Fig. 26.2: Swelling above the area of the lacrimal sac in a child
Shortening of anterior lamella: Vertical eyelid tightness should be checked by asking the patient to look up at the ceiling. If there is short anterior lamella, the ectropion will be exacerbated. Assessment of puncta: All the four puncta should be looked for the presence of any stenosis or membrane blocking them. They should face towards the lacrimal lake. The relative position of the upper and the lower puncta to each other and to the caruncle should also be assessed. Eyelid laxity: The eyelid can in itself be a cause of epiphora. Involutional ectropion often progresses from punctal eversion to involve the medial third, then the medial half of the lower eyelid and eventually the entire lid. Examination
418
Slit-lamp Examination
The slit-lamp examination is an essential part of evaluation. Punctum should be evaluated for patency, size, position and discharge. Mild degrees of ectropion (Fig. 26.4) and entropion (Fig. 26.5) that are not apparent to gross external examination may be revealed on the slit-lamp biomicroscopy. Small lesions of eyelid margins like papillomas, molluscum contagiosum, chalazia, nevi and carcinoma are best detected with the slit-lamp. Pressure over the lacrimal sac may cause discharge from the punctum, suggesting nasolacrimal duct obstruction. Presence of inflammation on the area overlying the canaliculus and discharge from the punctum on pressure over the area may suggest canaliculitis (Fig. 26.6). Examination for the signs of blepharitis (Fig. 26.7) as well as dry eye syndrome which lead to hypersecretion of tears should be looked for. Conjunctival lesions particularly pinguecula and pterygium may induce tearing. The forniceal and palpebral conjunctiva should be inspected for follicles
and papillae of reactive inflammatory disorders and allergic conjunctivitis. Cornea should be examined for any irregularities, features of dry eye syndrome or epithelial dystrophies. These examinations help to rule out causes of hyperlacrimation. The vertical height of the tear meniscus is to be measured prior to instillation of any eyedrops. Staining the tear film with a small amount of fluorescein aids in assessing the volume of the tear lake.
Evaluation of Epiphora
419
Schirmer Test
Schirmer test (Fig. 26.8) helps us to exclude pseudoepiphora. For this test white filter paper strips (41 Whatman) of 35 mm in length and 5 mm width are used. They are folded 5 mm at one end and inserted into the inferior fornix at the junction of the middle and lateral third of the lid and allowed to remain in this position for 5 minutes with the eyes open. The patient should be comfortably sitting in a dimly lit room away from direct air source as the fan. Moreover there should not be any kind of verbal stimulation. After the end of the 5 minutes, the wetting of the filter paper is measured.
Schirmer test is basically of three types: Schirmer I test, Basic secretion test and Schirmer II test. Schirmer I test is performed without topical anesthetic. Ten mm or more wetting is taken as normal. Excessive wetting can be due to pseudoepiphora or hypersecretion. Basic secretion test is done as the Schirmer I test but after instillation of topical anesthetic into the lower fornix. This anesthesia eliminates the local source of irritation as by the Schirmer test strips and gives an estimate of the basic tear
420
Syringing
Syringing the canalicular system provides information regarding the patency status. One to two drops of topical anesthesia (proparacaine or tetracaine) is instilled into the conjunctival sac. The punctum is dilated gently by advancing the Nettleship dilator (Figs 26.9 and 26.10), first
Evaluation of Epiphora
vertically for about 2 mm and then horizontally with a twisting movement. Simultaneously, lateral traction is applied to the eyelid. With the eyelid stretched, the dilator is withdrawn and the lacrimal cannula attached with syringe filled with normal saline is advanced horizontally through the punctum and the canaliculus (Fig. 26.10). No resistance should be felt in its entire path. Irrigation is then done and the patient is asked to respond if fluid passes into the oropharynx or nose. If there is resistance to irrigation, obstruction is present. Regurgitation of fluid from the same punctum indicates that there is a canalicular block. Regurgitation of fluid from the upper punctum indicates blockage at the level of common canalicular duct, lacrimal sac or nasolacrimal duct. Immediate regurgitation of clear fluid usually suggests a common canalicular obstruction. Relatively delayed regurgitation of fluid mixed with mucus or pus usually indicates NLD blockage. passed until it strikes the floor of the nose in the inferior meatus (Fig. 26.11B). If in between any obstruction is felt, the site of obstruction is noted by grasping the probe with a forceps at its entrance before withdrawing.
421
Diagnostic Probing
Probing the canaliculi provides information regarding the site of obstruction, which is necessary for decision-making. It is performed only after obstruction is demonstrated by other tests. After topical anesthesia of the conjunctival sac, the canaliculi are also irrigated with anesthetics. A probe of appropriate size is inserted into the punctum after dilatation and advanced till it meets obstruction. First it is passed vertically through the punctum, turned medially and advanced until it encounters the lacrimal bone (Fig. 26.11A). Through out the procedure the lid should be firmly pulled laterally so that there is no kinking of the canaliculi. It is then withdrawn a few millimeters and rotated inferiorly and slightly posterolaterally until the proximal part of the nasolacrimal duct is felt. The probe is then
Obstruction can be felt as a soft stop in case of a stenosis of the canaliculus or as a hard stop as the probe hits the bone at the medial wall of the lacrimal sac. Obstruction at less than 8 mm indicates a canalicular block, 8-10 mm indicates a common canalicular obstruction and distal to that if the probe passes more than 10 mm. While probing a child, a few considerations should be noted. Probing is usually recommended through the upper canaliculi as the lower canaliculus carries more tear flow than the upper and it is wise to avoid the possibility of injury to it. Up to 1 year of age, the distance from the punctum to the nasolacrimal duct is approximately 12 mm, whereas, to the floor of the nose, it is approximately 20 mm.11
422
the fluid onto a paper tissue and fluorescein dye is looked for. A positive test is with the presence of the dye on the tissue paper suggesting that the dye had reached the lacrimal sac but in the presence of a narrowed nasolacrimal duct or a nonfunctioning lacrimal pump requiring the syringing pressure to force it down. The test is said to be negative when the tissue is clear of any dye indicating that it did not get into the lacrimal sac with the Jones I test as in eyelid malposition, lacrimal pump failure, punctal or canalicular stenosis. A positive Jones test II confirms anatomical patency with a high-pressure wash out of fluorescein.
Modifications of Tests
Taste test: One drop of saccharin is instilled into the conjunctival sac and one gets the taste of
Evaluation of Epiphora
it after several minutes in case of a patent lacrimal drainage system. Endonasal dye test: This is done as the Jones test I and presence of the dye is seen through an endoscope inserted into the nares. Oropharynx dye appearance test: Fluorescein 2% is instilled into the conjunctival sac of one side at a time and the oropharynx is checked periodically for the appearance of the dye. This test is of particular importance in infants where sedation or anesthesia is otherwise needed.
423
Fig. 26.13: Dacryocystography showing passage of contrast into the nasal cavity
Fig. 26.14: Dacryocystography showing pooling of contrast in the lacrimal sac (NLD obstruction)
continuously during either conventional tomography or CT acquisition. CT dacryocystography is considered superior to conventional one as it provides useful anatomical information about the orbital wall, sinus as well as allowing evaluation of the nasolacrimal duct. MRI dacryocystography provides the same information as the conventional studies, without the use of catheterization and contrast medium. Both the sides are preferably done simultaneously
424
Newer Modalities
Chemiluminescence test 22 : Cyalume, a chemiluminescent material is injected with a sialography catheter to demonstrate the patency of outflow passages. Dacryoscopy: Dacryoscope, a mini rigid endoscope allows the direct visualization of the interior and the lining of the lacrimal passages.23,24
Fig. 26.15: Dacryocystography after digital subtraction
Dacryoscintigraphy18-20 Functional epiphora becomes difficult to differentiate from partial block of the lacrimal drainage system. Dacryoscintigraphy assesses the lacrimal drainage system under physiological condition.Technetium-99, a gamma ray-emitting radionuclide in saline or technetium sulfur colloid are instilled into the conjunctival sac and imaged with a gamma camera at fixed interval. Delay in the passage of the dye may occur at any site as in the region of the conjunctival sac or the canaliculi, which may be due to lid or canalicular diseases. Apart from being a noninvasive technique, radiation exposure to the lens is minimal compared to that of dacryocystography. The disadvantage of dacryoscintigraphy is that it lacks in showing finer anatomical detail. Computer Tomography (CT)21 The role of CT scan comes when anatomical or pathological abnormalities are suspected as the
Standarized echography: Gross anatomical structural defects can be evaluated with the standardized echography.25 Thermography: Thermographic evaluation of the lacrimal passage used in conjunction with routine lacrimal irrigation to visualize the tear ducts in normal subjects and in a patient with obstructive epiphora has been described.26
References
1. Jane Olver J. Colour Atlas of Lacrimal Surgery. London, Butterworth- Heinemann 2002;11-26. 2. Bron AJ, Tripathi RC, Tripathi B. Wolffs Anatomy of the eye and orbit. 8th edn. Edinburgh, Chapman & Hall Medical Publication 1997;72-84. 3. Tucker NA, Tucker SM, Linberg JV. The anatomy of the common canaliculus. Arch Ophthalmol 1996;114:1231-34. 4. William MH Jr. (Ed). Adlers Physiology of the Eye: Clinical Application 9th edn. Harcourt Brace Asia 1992.
Evaluation of Epiphora
5. Doane MG. Blinking and the mechanics of the lacrimal drainage system. Ophthalmology 1981; 88:844-50. 6. Becker BB. Tricompartmental model of the lacrimal pump mechanism. Ophthalmology 1992; 99:1139-45. 7. Basic and clinical science course, American Academy Ophthalmology, 2005; Orbit, eyelids and the lacrimal system. Chapter 14-Evaluation and management of the tearing patient, 272. 8. Conway ST. Evaluation and management of functional nasolacrimal blockage: results of a survey of the American Society of Ophthalmic Plastic and Reconstructive surgery. Ophth Plastic Reconstr Surg 1994;10:185-87. 9. Krupin T, Cross D A, Becker B. Decreased basal tear production associated with general anesthesia. Arch Ophthalmol 1977;95:107. 10. Lamberts DW, Foster CS, Perry HD. Schirmer test after topical anesthesia and the tear meniscus height in normal eye. Arch Ophthalmol 1979;97:1082. 11. Nesi FA, Lisman RD, Levine MR. Smiths Ophthalmic plastic and reconstructive surgery. 2nd edn. St Louis, Mosby 649-60. 12. Flack A. The fluorescein appearance test for lacrimal obstruction. Ann Ophthalmol 1979; 11:237. 13. MacEwen CJ, Young JDH. The effect of fluorescein disappearance test (FDT): an evaluation of its uses in infants. J Paed Ophthal Strab 1991; 28:305. 14. Zappia RJ, Milder B. Lacrimal drainage function.I. The Jones fluorescein test. Am J Ophthalmol 1972; 74:154-59. 15. Zappia RJ, Milder B. Lacrimal drainage function.I. The fluorescein dye disappearance test. Am J Ophthalmol 1972;74:160-62. 16. Galloway JE, Kavic TA, Raflo GT. Digital substraction macrodacryocystography. Ophthalmology 1984;91:956-62. 17. Lloyd GAG, Welham RAN. Substraction macrodacryocystography. Br J Radiol 1972;47: 379-82. 18. Rossomondo RM, Carlton WH, Trueblood JH. A new method of evaluating lacrimal drainage. Arch Ophthalmol 1972;88:523. 19. Hurwitz JJ, Maisey MN, Welham RAN. Quantitative lacrimal scintillography. Br J Ophthalmol 1975;59:308-12. 20. Jedrzynski MS, Bullock JD. Radionuclide dacryocystography. Orbit 1998;17:1-25. 21. Kallman JE, Foster JA, Wulc AE, et al. Computer tomography in lacrimal outflow obstruction. Ophthalmology 1997;104:676-82. 22. Raflo GT. Assessment of efficacy of chemiluminance evaluation of lacrimal drainage system. Ophthalmic Surgery 1982;13:36. 23. Coehn SW, Prescott R, Sherman M. Dacryoscopy. Ophthalmic Surgery 1979;10:57. 24. Tsugihisa Sasaki, Yuuko Nagata, Kazuhisa Sugiyama. Nasolacrimal duct obstruction classified by dacryoendoscopy and treated with inferior meatal dacryorhinostomy. Part I: Positional diagnosis of primary nasolacrimal duct obstruction with dacryoendoscope. Am J Ophthalmol 2005;140:1065-69. 25. Dutton JJ. Standardised echography in the diagnosis of lacrimal drainage dysfunction. Arch Ophthalmol 1989;197:1010. 26. Raflo GT, Chant P, Hurwitz JJ. Thermographic evaluation of lacrimal drainage system. Ophthalmic Surgery 1982;13:119.
425
426
27
Introduction
Proptosis is defined as an anterior displacement of the globe from its normal position in the orbit. The orbit is a unique area packed with numerous vital structures which are delicately poised in a dynamic equilibrium. Even a minute alteration in this balance can lead to clinically significant ramifications. Orbit is a closed cavity which usually does not allow for direct evaluation of any pathological process developing inside, and is often referred to as a Pandora box. It is a watershed area, being the meeting ground of many specialities and, therefore, a collaborative approach is required in the diagnosis and management of orbital disorders. A wide variety of disease processes can involve the orbit such as inflammations, parasitic infestations, metabolic and endocrine disturbances (Fig. 27.1), vascular anomalies, primary and metastatic tumors (Figs 27.2 and 27.3), depending on the age group and other predisposing factors. Common orbital tumors encountered are cavernous hemagioma, lacrimal pleomorphic adenoma, meningioma, dermoid cysts, optic nerve glioma and lymphoma, to name a few. Parasitic involvement of the orbit, especially cysticercosis and occasionally hydatid cyst are
Fig. 27.2: Clinical photograph of a patient showing proptosis of the right eye with marked downward and outward displacement of the globe
427
Diagnostic Techniques
Fig. 27.3: A child with acute onset proptosis of the right eye suggestive of an orbital malignancy
not uncommon in developing countries. Endocrine disturbances, such as thyroid dysfunction, could have some of their earliest manifestations in the orbit and adnexa. In a case of proptosis, as in any other clinical situation, the diagnostic work-up begins with a careful history and clinical examination. The degree of proptosis is quantified by performing an exophthalmometry. The most commonly used instrument is the Hertels exophthalmometer (Fig. 27.4), in which the position of the anterior corneal surface is recorded, taking the lateral orbital rim as a reference point. An absolute reading greater than 21 mm or a relative difference of more than 2 mm between the two eyes is used as a cutoff value for diagnosing proptosis. Some of the
A large number of diagnostic techniques are available for evaluation of a case of proptosis. However, as a general principle, one should follow a graded approach in employing these techniques, starting with the less invasive ones and going on to the more invasive ones, only if indicated. One should also be able to distinguish as to which group of investigations would be relevant in a particular case. The noninvasive techniques include imaging studies, which are the cornerstone in reaching a diagnosis in a case of proptosis. Invasive techniques are aimed mainly on efforts to reach a tissue diagnosis, which entails harvesting of tissue and subjecting it to routine and specialized histopathological tests.
428
Ultrasonography (USG)
Ultrasonography is a rapid noninvasive tool for the evaluation of orbital lesions causing proptosis. As most USG machines are compact and portable, it can be performed in an office setting as well as peroperatively. It gives useful information about the characteristics of the lesion and can even clinch the diagnosis when done by an experienced observer. Despite being inferior to CT-scan and MRI in depicting the bony wall, orbital apex, adjacent sinuses and intracranial compartments, ultrasound is arguably a better imaging modality in the detection of subtle changes of the soft tissues within the orbit, and the differentiation of extraocular muscles and optic nerve lesions. The machine basically consists of a transducer at the tip of a probe which emits ultrasonic waves by the vibration of a piezo-electric crystal inside the probe. These waves are reflected, scattered and absorbed by the medium. The reflected waves are then processed in a computer to generate a single or multidimensional picture on a screen. Ophthalmic USG uses frequencies ranging
429
Fig. 27.5: Ultrasound picture in a case of thyroid ophthalmopathy showing enlargement of the belly of an extraocular muscle with tendon sparing
For example, one can differentiate thyroid orbitopathy from pseudotumor by demonstrating tendon sparing thickening of extraocular muscles in thyroid ophthalmopathy (Fig. 27.5) as contrast to tendonitis and posterior scleritis which typically occur in idiopathic orbital inflammatory disease (IOID) or pseudotumor. In addition certain lesions can be definitely diagnosed on USG like cavernous hemangioma (Fig. 27.6), cysticercosis and hydatid cyst (Figs 27.7 and 27.8). Another important application of USG is for serial measurements of size of lesions and evaluation of response to therapy like in the case of orbital cysticercosis, dysthyroid ophthalmopathy, and optic nerve thickness in optic neuritis. Color Doppler (CD) imaging is one of the most important developments of the last decade (Figs 27.9A and B). It allows evaluation of blood flow along with simultaneous B scan imaging of the lesion and can definitely diagnose lesions such as orbital varices, A-V malformations and carotidcavernous sinus fistulas. The patterns obtained
Fig. 27.6: Ultrasound A- and B-scan of the orbit showing a well demarcated, intraconal lesion with high internal reflectivity and moderate sound attenuation, suggestive of cavernous hemangioma
430
Fig. 27.7: Ultrasound picture showing an orbital cyst with scolex suggestive of cysticercosis
Fig. 27.8: Ultrasound picture showing an orbital cyst with double wall sign typical of hydatid cyst
B Figs 27. 9A and B: Color Doppler examination in a case of orbital varices. A Before and B After Valsalva maneuver showing low blood flow velocity on dynamic evaluation
reveal information on the extent of arterial or venous flow in the substance of the lesion. Apart from these, there are other methods of USG like C-scan which depicts orbital lesions in a coronal plane and D-scan which provides a three dimensional display. Three-dimensional ultrasound (3D USG) imaging is a novel way of imaging ophthalmic pathologies in vivo, revealing valuable topographic information in ways more familiar and recognizable to the untrained eye, where surfaces can be perceived and their approximate relationships in three-dimensions can be presented (e.g. to determine the contour and size
of tumors, to ascertain the shape and relative configurations of tissues and structures in the eye). Three-dimensional USG imaging allows volumetric and topographic reconstruction of the vitreous, retina, choroid, sclera, and orbital structures. Volumetric reconstruction is valuable in tumor growth assessment, while topographic mapping provides a more comprehensive quantitative description of the surface and marginal parameters responsible for volumetric changes.
431
Fig. 27.10: Clinical and CT picture in a case of orbital lymphangioma. CT shows a diffuse, poorly defined, heterogenous lesion with minimal enhancement
Computed Tomography
Computed tomography (CT) is one of the most important investigations in a case of proptosis as it gives anatomic details par excellence. It has revolutionized the management of orbital disorders and is valuable for delineating the shape, locations, extent, and characteristics of lesions of the orbit. Furthermore, current CT- scan administers a dose of radiation which compares favorably with an X-ray of the skull. Its spatial resolution is 0.5 mm. Eight slices are required to perform an orbital scan which extend from the maxillary sinus below to inferior part of the frontal lobe above, and include the optic chiasm and pituitary area. Axial-scan is done in supine position and coronal in prone position. For sagittal views, re-formating of images is required as they cannot be done directly. Bone windows are available to enhance bony changes and three dimensions reconstruction is possible to aid in surgical planning. Suspected orbital disease associated with paranasal sinus disease, thyroid ophthalmopathy, foreign bodies, hemorrhage, or orbital trauma is evaluated using noncontrast CT, while the visualization of tumors that are well supplied with blood vessels (e.g. meningioma) or whose blood vessels leak is improved by the use of IV contrast enhancing
agents. CT-scan has resolution and tissue contrast capabilities allowing for the imaging of soft tissues, intracranial structures, masses or processes suspected of calcification such as lymphangioma (Fig. 27.10), bones (e.g. sinus anatomy) or bony destruction (e.g. leukemia, lymphoma, histiocytosis, and rhabdomyosarcoma), contrast containing blood vessels and foreign bodies. Coronal sections with 2-3 mm slices should be specifically asked for in cases of blow-out fractures and for assessing extraocular muscle size in Graves ophthalmopathy. High resolution CT with 1 mm cuts is useful for studying optic nerve lesions. Axial sections show both globes, the horizontal rectus muscles, optic nerve, other orbital soft tissue and bony structures. Coronal section, anteriorly, shows globe with relation to recti muscles and posteriorly, all four rectus muscles, oblique muscles, optic nerve and soft tissue of the orbit. At the apex it also shows the optic foramen. CT adequately documents findings such as the extent of proptosis, muscle enlargement, location (intraconal or extraconal) and size of a lesion, compression of the globe or optic nerve and presence or absence of bone erosion, as well as the condition of adjacent sinuses and the presence of intracranial involvement. It also shows the internal characteristics of the lesion
432
Fig. 27.11: CT-scan (axial view) showing a well delineated, fusiform, intraconal mass isodense to the optic nerve, suggestive of glioma
whether it is homogeneous or heterogeneous, solid or cystic, presence of calcification and the effect of contrast enhancement. Benign tumors such as cavernous hemangioma, neurilemoma, dermoids and gliomas (Fig. 27.11) usually have rounded well circumscribed borders. Malignant lesions on the other hand have diffuse, irregular boundaries. Important features of thyroid ophthalmopathy include swelling of muscles maximally in the mid-portion (Fig. 27.12) (relative sparing of the tendons), slight uveo-scleral thickening, apical crowding, increase in the diameter of the retrobulbar optic nerve sheath, increased density of orbital fat, and anterior
Fig. 27.13: CT-scan (coronal view) showing an infiltrative lesion in the lacrimal gland fossa with irregular internal structure suggestive of a malignant lacrimal gland tumor
Fig. 27.12: CT-scan (axial view) showing significant enlargement of extraocular muscles with sparing of tendons in a case of thyroid exophthalmos
displacement of the lacrimal gland. CT is a useful modality for the evaluation of lacrimal fossa masses, especially epithelial tumors (Fig. 27.13). CT can adequately depict osseous alterations and calcifications, and can differentiate a group of epithelial tumors from inflammatory and lymphoproliferative conditions. Features specific of orbital pseudotumor include a poorly defined intra- or extraconal mass close to the surface margin of the globe. In the myositic type one may get enlargement of one or more muscles close to their insertion, with ill-defined margins. Other features of orbital pseudotumor are that it typically involves muscles and tendon insertions, there is increased density of retroorbital fat, thickening and enhancement of sclera near Tenons capsule and enlargement of the lacrimal gland. Lymphangioma may be diagnosed if there is a multi-lobulated pattern on CT-scan (Fig. 27.10) and a cystic internal structure in standardized ultrasound evaluation. Cavernous hemangiomas show as well circumscribed, solid, masses involving the intra or extraconal compartment. On CT-scan lymphoproliferative tumors typically show up as a localized or diffuse mass with moulding to the orbital structures.
433
434
Fig. 27.15: MRI-scan of the orbit (axial view, T1 weighted) showing a hyperintense lesion at the posterior pole suggestive of choroidal melanoma
Fig. 27.17: MRI-scan of the orbit (sagittal view, T1 weighted) showing orbital metastasis
On MRI, melanin within melanomas typically gives such tumors a hyperintense signal on T1weighted scans (Fig. 27.15) and hypointense signal on T2-weighted scans (Fig. 27.16) relative to the vitreous. Non-contrast, fat-suppression studies help to determine the extension of ocular melanoma into the orbit and optic nerve. Subretinal hemorrhage may be differentiated from choroidal melanoma by MRI when visualization is poor and ultrasound inconclusive. While MRI is a more useful diagnostic modality in lymphoangiomas (better anatomical illustration
Fig. 27.16: MRI-scan of the orbit (sagittal view, T2 weighted) showing a hypointense lesion at the posterior pole suggestive of choroidal melanoma
of the cystic nature of the lesion and the hemorrhages in lymphangiomas), it is interesting to note that these lesions typically do not enhance with gadolinium. In thyroid ophthalmopathy one notices a high signal intensity in enlarged eye muscles on T2W1. In orbital pseudotumor the lesion is isodense to fat on T2W1. MRI of the orbit is especially useful in optic nerve lesions or trauma, unusual orbital inflammation, orbital metastasis (Fig. 27.17) and tumors extending to the orbital apex or having suspected intracranial extension. Salient contraindications to performing an MRI scan include the presence of ferrous metallic foreign bodies (even mascara which contains ferrous compounds cause artifacts), aneurysm clips, cardiac pacemaker and cochlear implants. In addition, claustrophobic and obese patients may pose problems. Other limitations of MRI are lack of bone visualization, higher cost and longer time of scan. An interesting advancement in MRI is Magnetic Resonance Angiography (MRA) in which special software is used to suppress normal soft tissue to enhance vascular structures (Fig. 27.18). This is analogous to bone window setting on CT-scan. Gadolinium enhancement is needed
435
for visualizing venous structures but is not required for the arterial system. It allows noninvasive visualization of the large- and medium-sized vessels of the arterial system but does not provide as fine a detail as direct arteriography. This modality is still evolving and angiography remains the gold standard in imaging of vascular structures of the orbit.
Orbital Venography
Orbital venography or phlebography is a technique in which contrast is introduced in the frontal or angular veins and sequential X-rays are taken in the AP view. It is useful in cases of orbital varices and changes in superior ophthalmic vein, whose obstruction or distortion by a mass lesion can be made out. Subtraction and magnification techniques have been used to increase the resolution of venography. A
relative disadvantage of orbital venography is that apart from the adverse effects of the contrast agent, it cannot pick up small lesions. Also, larger lesions obstructing dye flow in the superior ophthalmic vein do not allow the rest of the venous system to be visualized. Prior to CT-scan and MRI, orbital venography was used in the diagnosis and management of orbital varices and in the study of the cavernous sinus. With the advent of MRA, orbital venography has fallen from favor and is more or less obsolete in the present era.
Orbital Arteriography
In orbital arteriography a suitable contrast material is injected into the ipsilateral common or internal carotid artery and then appropriate X-rays are taken. It is useful in demonstrating rare cases of A-V malformations, carotid-cavernous fistulas,
436
Blood Tests
The nature of the blood investigations performed will depend to a large degree upon the clinical findings of the patient. Given herein are some of the more commonly utilized blood investigations to assist in the evaluation of a patient with proptosis.
Biopsy Techniques
Although imaging techniques can help us in making a provisional diagnosis and are indicative in nature, a definitive diagnosis can only be made by obtaining a tissue specimen and subjecting it to routine and specialized histopathological techniques. Biopsy techniques which are commonly employed are described below.
437
Fig. 27.19: Instrument used for performing fine needle aspiration (FNAC gun)
finally stained with hematoxylin and eosin. The slide needs to be examined by a trained cytologist for accurate interpretation. The accuracy has been reported to be more than 80%. The principal disadvantage of this technique is that scanty cellular material is obtained from a limited region of the mass which may be difficult to evaluate and interpret. Secondly it uses cytology technique rather than routine histopathology that fails to detect tissue or tumor architecture. The main use of FNAC is in cases of suspected lymphoma metastatic tumors or orbital recurrence of retinoblastoma or melanoma, which may require to be treated by chemotherapy or radiotherapy. It has also been used for diagnosing optic nerve sheath meningioma. Fine needle capillary sampling (FNCS) is another similar technique in which instead of aspiration with a syringe, a 25-gauge needle is introduced in the mass after stabilizing it manually. Gentle to and fro movement is performed and the needle is withdrawn without any aspiration. The material is then processed like FNAC. Reported sensitivity of this technique is said to be in the range of 90-95%. The complications of these procedures include globe perforation, retrobulbar hemorrhage and rarely intracranial penetration. Transient visual loss, diplopia and ptosis have also been reported.
Incisional Biopsy
Incisional biopsy is a surgical technique where partial removal of the tumor is done under local or general anesthesia. The purpose of this biopsy is to obtain adequate tissue for histopathological examination. Imaging studies should be done for accurate localization of the lesion before undertaking the biopsy procedure. These are useful in planning the surgical approach. Care should be taken to obtain tissue from the main mass itself, because biopsy from superficial or adjacent structures will give false results.
Excisional Biopsy
Imaging and supportive investigations certainly help in establishing a good differential diagnosis, but a definitive diagnosis is sometimes established only after complete removal of the mass and subjecting it to histopathology. This is achieved by performing an orbitotomy procedure through one of the surgical approaches to the orbit. The principles of localization and surgical planning are similar to the ones described above. This, along with incisional biopsy, is the gold standard for diagnosis and
438
Pathology Techniques
This area is the most important part of any diagnostic process as it provides actual tissue diagnosis, which may have therapeutic and medico-legal importance. It is imperative to have proper communication with the pathologist preoperatively, to facilitate and plan the appropriate histopathologic technique for a given case.
Cytology
As already stated under the section on FNAC, cytology is a low cost technique for rapid diagnosis. The aspirate is spread over a slide and air dried followed by alcohol fixation and stained by Papanicolaou technique and H&E or May-Grunwald-Giemsa stain; mainly used for suspected malignant lesions. Cytology has its limitations as discussed earlier.
Gross Examination
The gross excised specimen is inspected for shape, size, consistency (firm/hard/cystic/nodular), and whether the capsule is intact or broken. Measurements are made in three dimensions. Then it is cut to see the internal architecture color, areas of necrosis, calcification and inner structure (solid or cystic). For example, on gross examination, pleomorphic adenoma of the lacrimal gland displays an intact capsule, with firm, bosselated appearance, and on cut section it has whitish, firm solid areas with some interspersed friable areas. Cavernous hemangioma on the other hand has a reddish-bluish color
and has a firm to soft spongy consistency (Fig. 27.20). On cut section, it has a typical honeycomb pattern of innumerable cystic spaces (Fig. 27.21), which can be very well appreciated on H&E stain (Fig. 27.22). Parasitic cysts, such as hydatid cyst are seen as a thin walled translucent fluid-filled structure (Fig. 27.23). The gross specimen is sent to the pathologist in a labeled bag filled with 10% formalin solution in adequate quantity.
Routine Histopathology
The biopsy or excised specimen is further processed in the pathological laboratory by
439
Fig. 27.22: Histopathological picture (H & E) of cavernous hemangioma showing large blood-filled spaces
Fig. 27.24: Histpathological picture (H & E) of pleomorphic adenoma of the lacrimal gland
Histochemistry
In situations where the routine histological process is difficult to interpret, various histochemical and immunohistochemical techniques provide assistance. For example, Oil red O or Sudan black are used to stain fat in cases of sebaceous gland carcinoma or xanthomatous tumors. Similarly, Alcian blue is used for mucinous substances and PAS (Periodic acid Schiff) for glycogen and some fungal hyphae. Fontana is used for staining melanin, esterase for cytoplasmic granules in leucocytes and Bodian for nerve fibers.
dehydrating in alcohol. Then it is embedded in paraffin and sectioned with a microtome knife. This is followed by removal of paraffin and staining with hematoxylin and eosin stain (Fig. 27.24). Hematoxylin is a basic dye that binds acidic structures like DNA and nuclei in cells while eosin is an acidic dye that stains basic structures like proteins. This gives clues about the nature of the lesion. For example, cells with prominent nuclei and scanty cytoplasm will stain blue as in lymphoma, retinoblastoma, inflammatory lesions and basal cell carcinoma. On the other hand, cells with abundant cytoplasm like epithelial cells and connective tissue as in squamous cell carcinoma and amyloidosis, will stain pink.
Immunohistochemistry
Immuno-histo-chemistry is a highly sensitive technique, which utilizes the principle of antigenantibody reaction to capture certain specific proteins in specific tissues, which can then point out to the correct diagnosis. This reaction is coupled by an enzyme, which then generates a color reaction when combined with certain chemicals called chromogens. Monoclonal antibodies are directed against an important group of cytoskeletal components called intermediate filaments. These are specific for
440
Conclusion
Diagnosis of a case of proptosis requires a systematic approach through a proper clinical evaluation coupled with appropriate investigative techniques. If used effectively, these techniques can guide the clinician in achieving an accurate diagnosis and optimal management in this rather challenging field.
Electron Microscopy
Scanning Electron Microscopy (SEM) and Transmission Electron Microscopy (TEM) are sometimes used in evaluating unusual lesions. TEM can be vital in the diagnosis of certain tumors such as leiomyoma, neurilemoma, neurofibroma and amelanotic melanoma and also in certain poorly differentiated tumors like alveolar rhabdomyosarcoma and alveolar soft part sarcoma. It is an expensive and time consuming process. With the advent of the above mentioned immunohistochemical stains, it is rarely used. SEM can be used to see the three dimensional ultrastructure of lesions and can provide elemental details of retained foreign bodies.
Bibliography
1. Aburn NS, Sergott RC. Orbital Color Doppler Imaging. Eye 1993;7:639-47. 2. Aviv RI, Miszkiel K. Orbital imaging: Part 2. Intraorbital pathology. Clin Radiol 2005;60:288307. 3. Bartley GB, Gorman CA. Diagnostic criteria for Graves ophthalmopathy. Am J Ophthalmol 1995;119:792-95. 4. Bilaniuik CT. Vascular lesions of the orbit in children. Neuroimaging Clin N Am 2005;15:107-20. 5. Devis PC, Newman NJ. Advances in neuroimaging of visual pathways. Am J Ophthalmol 1996;121:690-705. 6. Dutton JJ, Byrne SF, Proia AD. Diagnostic Atlas of Orbital Diseases. Philadelphia, Saunders, 2000. 7. Newton TH, Bilaniuk LT (Eds). Radiology of Eyes and Orbit. New York, Raven, 1990. 8. Rootman J (Ed). Diseases of Orbit: A Multidisciplinary approach. Philadelphia, Lippincott William & Wilkins, 2003. 9. Shields JA, Shields CL. Atlas of Orbital Tumors. New York, William & Wilkins, 1999. 10. Shields JL, Shields JA, Honavar, SG, et al. Clinical spectrum of primary ophthalmic rhabdomyosarcoma.Ophthalmology 2001;108:2284-92. 11. Wiersinga WM, Prummel MF. Pathogenesis of Graves ophthalmopathycurrent understanding (Editorial). J Clin Endocrinol Metab 2001;86:501-03.
Additional Investigations
Once the initial cause of the proptosis has been determined, it is often necessary to undertake additional investigations to further determine the full extent of the pathology. This is particularly true in the cases where the cause of the proptosis is found to be a tumor. For example patients with hematological and lymphoproliferative tumors require the following additional investigations: X-ray chest, blood
441
AMBAR CHAKRAVARTY
28
Introduction Anatomy and Physiology
Pupillary examination is a powerful tool in the neurological evaluation. The key in understanding the significance of pupillary findings is to know the anatomy of the system and to recognize the various reactions of the pupil. It is further important to correlate historical information with clinical findings in the context of known anatomy to arrive at a cogent diagnosis. Studies on pupil have also figured significantly in advances of autonomic physiology.1-4
The normal pupil is slightly situated inferomedial to the center of cornea. When viewed in the natural state, the iris and pupil appear slightly larger (12.5%) because of the corneal magnification. The sphincter muscle is located at the pupillary border and is more powerful than the dilator muscle. Blood supply of iris is through the radially arranged vessels arising from the major arterial circle at the iris base. Pupillary control is essentially a balance between parasympathetic and sympathetic system. Although pupillary size and reactivity, as well as ciliary muscle tone, are basically controlled
442
Fig. 28.1: Pupillary light reflex pathway from retina through optic pathway to lateral geniculate body and then on to Edinger-Westphal nucleus complex and then along the third nerve trunk to the iris sphincter
visual system pathology does produce difference in pupillary size. Pupillary constriction is also a component of a number of synkinetic reactions involving parasympathetic activitynear reflex (miosis, accommodation, and convergence), Bells phenomenon (levator inhibition, superior rectus muscle stimulation, and miosis) and Westphal-Piltz reaction (orbicularis spasm and miosis). The cortical region responsible for supranuclear generation of the near response remains uncertain. It probably rises from diffuse cortical projections. Ultimately, supranuclear inputs for the near reflex converge upon the rostral superior colliculus. From here connections are made to the mesencephalic reticular formation, pretectum and EWC to generate the near triad pupillary constriction, lens accommodation and convergence. First order neuron of sympathetic pathway (Fig. 28.2) arises in the hypothalamus and descends through the reticular substance to synapse in the intermediolateral gray substance of the lower cervical and upper thoracic spinal cord (ciliospinal center of Budge Waller, C8-T1). Second order neuron arises in the intermediolateral gray column and then ascends without synapse through the sympathetic paraspinal chain to the superior cervical ganglion. From
the superior cervical ganglion the postganglionic or third order neuron travels on the surface of the common carotid artery. At the bifurcation of the internal and external carotid arteries, fibers controlling facial sweating follow the external carotid artery, while those destined for the eye and lid follow the internal carotid artery. In the cavernous sinus these eye and lid fibers join the fifth and sixth cranial nerves and enter the orbit via the superior orbital fissure. Fibers destined for the dilator muscle enter the eye via the long posterior ciliary nerves or short posterior ciliary nerves.
Examination of Pupil
The most important evaluation technique for pupil is the history. A careful history of known pupillary disorders is vital to establish whether a pupillary sign has any meaning in the context of the disorder under consideration. Rarely, a
443
Evaluation of the Afferent Arm of the Light Reflex Arc Swinging-Light Pupil Test
The swinging-light pupil test is a rapid, low cost, accurate and objective method of identifying asymmetric optic nerve disease but it is useless unless proper technique is used. The idea is to look for a Relative Afferent Pupillary Defect (RAPD) in one eye compared to the other by alternate projection of light over each eye (Fig. 28.3). Technique 1. The room illumination should be dim. Unless the test is performed in darkness, the amplitude of pupil constriction will be too low. 2. The patient should fixate on a distant target. This provides maximal relaxation of the iris sphincter muscle. A near target would evoke miosis associated with the synkinetic near reflex. 3. Use a bright light stimulus. Dim lights do not produce enough pupil constriction. If neither pupil constricts very much to
Evaluation of Anisocoria
Pupillary inequality is usually due to an iris innervation problem. The best way to decide whether it is the sphincter muscle or the dilator muscle that is weak is to compare the amount of anisocoria in darkness and in light. No anisocoria in darkness or in light indicates an intact efferent arm of the light reflex arc. Virtually everyone has a measurable pupillary size difference if sensitive enough techniques are used; however, only 20% of normal individuals have enough asymmetry to be recognized clinically (i.e., 0.4 mm or more). Age plays a major role in pupillary size. Newborns have small hyporeactive pupils, young children have larger, briskly reactive pupils and as the age progress the normal pupillary size and reactivity diminishes such that older individuals have miotic, relatively slowly reactive pupils.
444
Interpretation
A relative afferent pupillary defect (RAPD) is a sensitive indicator of unilateral or asymmetric injury to the afferent pupillary pathway. If a RAPD is found, it needs to be investigated. In general, the size of the RAPD correlates with the asymmetry of visual field loss and the resultant asymmetry of pupillomotor input. It also tends to vary with the location of the lesion within the afferent pathway. Retina 1. Large unilateral retinal lesions, i.e. retinal detachment or central retinal artery occlusion produce a clear RAPD. Visual acuity might be good if the macula is spared. A careful dilated funduscopic examination is usually diagnostic, and a consultation with an ophthalmologist/neurologist is important. 2. Cataracts and corneal opacities do not cause afferent pupillary defects. Optic Nerve Damage to the optic nerve almost always produces a RAPD. Visual acuity loss may be
445
Further Observations
The intensity of the RAPD, which is related more closely to differences in visual field loss than visual acuity loss in the two eyes, can be quantitatively measured by placing progressively higher neutral-density filters over the normal eye until the RAPD is eliminated.5,6 The filters are particularly useful when the diagnosis of RAPD is equivocal. The examiner places the 0.3-log unit filter over each eye consecutively and performs the swinging-light test. If no RAPD is present, the pupil of the eye covered by the filter dilates slightly as the light is swung towards it. When a RAPD is minimal, the filter placed over the affected eye makes the pupil dilation in that eye more obvious. The swinging-light pupil test is useful even when only one iris sphincter muscle is operational. Constriction of the pupil in the unaffected eye as the light is swung toward it is equivalent to pupillary dilation in the eye with the suspected RAPD. This phenomenon is called (misleadingly) a reverse RAPD, it is merely a different way to elicit a standard RAPD.
Pupillary Abnormalities
Anisocoria Local Ophthalmologic Conditions
Typically, patients with anisocoria due to local causes have a painful red eye with a small pupil and visual disturbance. a. Any condition resulting in an inflammatory response within the anterior chamber may cause spasm of the sphincter muscle, resulting in anisocoria. b. Acute closed-angle glaucoma results in a red painful eye and visual disturbance. In this condition, the pupil tends to be dilated, with an impaired light reflex that may simulate interruption of the parasympathetic nervous system. c. Prosthetic eyes have yet to show a brisk light reflex. d. Other important causes of irregular pupils with poor light reflex are congenital malformation of the iris, postoperative changes, and posttraumatic mydriasis due to tears in the iris and its sphincter muscle.
Episodic Anisocoria
Either parasympathetic or sympathetic paresis or over activity may produce intermittent anisocoria. The common causes of episodic anisocoria due to parasympathetic paresis include uncal herniation, seizure disorder and migraine. Parasympathetic hyperactivity conditions like cyclic oculomotor paresis and parasympathetic spasm7 are known to add to
446
TABLE 28.1: CHARACTERISTICS OF PUPILS ENCOUNTERED IN NEURO-OPHTHALMOLOGY General characteristics Round, regular Both brisk No change Dilates Constricts Response to light and near stimuli Room condition in which anisocoria is greater Response to mydriatics Response to miotics Response to pharmacologic agents Normal and rarely needed Cocaine 4% poor dilatation Pilocarpine 0.1% constricts
Condition
Essential anisocoria
Horners syndrome Usually larger in bright light, sector pupil palsy, vermiform movement unilateral or less often bilateral Small, irregular, bilateral Poor to light, better to near Poor to light, better to near Fixed Lighted No change Dilates Dilates No change Poor Mid dilated, may be oval, bilateral Mid dilated, unilateral, rarely bilateral Very large round, unilateral Fixed Lighted Constricts Constricts Constricts Absent to light, tonic to near; tonic redilation Lighted Dilates Constricts
Both brisk
Darkened
Dilates
Constricts
Argyll-Robertson pupils
Midbrain pupils
Oculomotor palsy
No
447
the episodic anisocoria. Other conditions producing the episodic anisocoria include sympathetic hyperactivity conditions, sympathetic dysfunction producing alternating anisocoria and pupillary dilatation.
photophobia, episodes of blurred near vision or blurred vision when switching from near to far viewing and may even complain of unequal pupils. Typically, the involved pupil displays a poor response to light, with a relatively preserved response to sustained near fixation but an abnormally slow or tonic contraction. Slitlamp examination often reveals sector palsies of the iris. The parasympathetic defect in Adie pupil8 is believed to occur after the fibers leave the ciliary ganglion. As a result of denervation supersensitivity, the affected eye displays an abnormally brisk response to dilute (1/8%) pilocarpine and this test (Fig. 28.5) has been suggested as a way of differentiating preganglionic and postganglionic parasympahetic lesions. Recent literature reports many patients who have mydriasis due to oculomotor nerve
448
compression and have displayed reactivity to dilute pilocarpine, should show other signs of third nerve dysfunction. The combination of an idiopathic tonic pupil with decreased deep tendon reflexes and/or orthostatic hypotension is termed Holmes-Adie syndrome. The condition is common in young women. Adie pupil is commonly unilateral, but may become bilateral in 10% cases. The symptoms of a tonic pupil tend to be self-limited. Adie pupil is believed to be of uncertain etiology. However, neurosyphilis, diabetes, herpes zoster, giant cell arteritis, and alcoholism have been incriminated. A closely related rare condition is the Ross syndrome characterized by the triad of segmental anhidrosis, hyporeflexia and tonic pupils. Only
a handful of cases have been described in the world literature so far.9 Harlequin syndrome refers to segmental anhidrosis only without any ocular manifestation. In fact, it is reasonable to assume that all these dysautonomic syndromes (Horner, Adie, Ross and Harlequin) represent clinical manifestations of a generalized autonomic injury with or without somatic nervous system involvement (e.g. areflexia).
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
Pharmacologic Mydriasis
The final common entity accounting for an isolated dilated pupil is pharmocologic
456
457
Hydroxyamphetamine Test
Hydroxyamphetamine test is employed to differentiate between a preganglionic and a postganglionic Horner syndrome. The importance of such distinction has already been mentioned. Hydroxyamphetamine enhances the release of norepinephrine from the third order terminal. If the postganglionic neuron is injured, the pupil will not dilate or will dilate poorly. Cremer et al23 found that a 1 mm increase in the amount of anisocoria is associated with 85% probability that the lesion is postganglionic. 2 mm increase is associated with a probability of 99% that postganglionic defect exists. However, the hydoxyamphetamine test is not perfect. Cremet et al23 found that anisocoria increased in 93% of postganglionic cases. The anisocoria did not change in 90% preganglionic cases. Therefore, one has to assume an approximately 10% error rate with this test. In case with non-availability of hydroxyamphetamine, one may substitute with adrenaline. Instillation of adrenaline (1:1000) in a case of postganglionic Horner syndrome will
TABLE 28.2: COMMON CAUSES OF HORNER SYNDROME Central Dorsolateral medullary infarct (Wallenbergs syndrome) Hypothalamic, thalamic, or mesencephalic infarct, hemorrhage, tumor or demyelination Multiple system atrophy Cervicothoracic spinal cord lesions Cervicothoracic paraspinal mass (including neuroblastoma) Cervical disk herniation Apical lung cancer Cervical sympathectomy Neck injury during forceps delivery Internal carotid artery dissection Cervical adenopathy Cervical tumors Neck trauma Neck injury during forceps delivery Internal carotid artery dissection Cervical adenopathy Cervical tumors Neck trauma Otitis media Cavernous sinus lesion Cluster headache
Preganglionic
Postganglionic
458
Simple Anisocoria
Simple anisocoria may be found in approximately 20% of the general population and may vary from day to day in the same individual. In most patients, the degree of anisocoria is less than 1 mm, and not associated with ptosis, dilation lag, or vasomotor dysfunction. In some patients, simple anisocoria may be provoked by oral medications (e.g. pseudoephedrine, selective serotonin reuptake inhibitors). Installation of 4-10% cocaine solution causes dilation of both eyes. Old photographs can provide evidence that the anisocoria had been present for some time. Simple anisocoria may be the result of a variety of cholinergic antiglaucoma medications. A small pupil may be the result of a chance exposure to cholinergic agents. Suspect pharmacologic miosis in an otherwise asymptomatic patient who wears contact lenses and has experienced acute onset of miosis. Implicated agents include anticholinesterases (e.g. flea-collar anisocoria) and inhaled anticholinergics (ipratropium bromide). In such case, withdrawal of exposure to the agent confirms the diagnosis.
Argyll-Robertson Pupils
Argyll-Robertson pupils are classically associated with neurosyphilis. The exact location of the pathologic lesion is hotly debated. Consensus places the lesion in the dorsal midbrain interrupting fibers serving the light reflex with sparing of the ventral accommodative pathways. Clinical features include: (a) small pupils nonreactive to light stimulation with an intact near response (Fig. 28.8), (b) irregular pupils, (c) pupils that dilate poorly in the dark and to mydriatic agents. Similar pupillary findings may be seen in diabetic patients. Other causes of light-near dissociation are: 1. Dorsal midbrain syndrome: Besides light-near dissociation these patients have other clinical features like eyelid retraction, convergence, retraction-nystagmus and decreased up gaze. 2. Severe bilateral visual loss of optic nerve or retinal origin: These patients would have dilated pupils nonreactive to light but nearconvergence reaction with pupillary constriction may be preserved by proprioceptive input to the brain.
459
Dilated pupils are caused by the paralysis of the parasympathetic fibers either at their origin form the pretectal nuclei and the EdingerWestphal nucleus in the midbrain, during their course with the oculomotor nerve or at the ciliary ganglion in the orbit. The common causes of the dilation include vascular accidents in the midbrain, tentorial herniation or aneurysms of the carotid artery.
diagnosis and requires investigations like chest X-ray, CT/MRI-scan of the head and cervical spine. Episodic conditions may be difficult to diagnose at first evaluation and requires repeated evaluations to make a diagnosis. The management of pupillary abnormalities will depend upon the cause of asymmetry, which may include the management of raised intracranial pressure and removal of irritative cause local or distant.
Conclusion
Almost all pupillary conditions would be diagnosed with the above approaches delineated. Further work-up will depend on the specific
References
1. Lowenfeld IE. The pupil: anatomy, physiology and clinical application. Ames: Iowa State University Press, 1993.
460
13. 14.
15. 16.
17.
23.
Index
461
Index
A
A- and B-scan 240 A and V syndromes 369 Aberropia 69 Abnormal fluorescence angiography 190 blocked choroidal fluorescence 191 blocked retinal fluorescence 190 hyperfluorescence 194 hypofluorescence 190 Acanthamoeba 320, 321 Acanthamoeba cysts 322 Acanthamoeba keratitis 318 Accommodation 7, 442 Accommodative convergence 375, 378 Acquired deficiency of color vision 18 Acridine orange 323 Acute dacryocystitis 417 Acute posterior multifocal placoid pigment epitheliopathy 212, 213 Adenoviral keratoconjunctivitis 328 Adie tonic pupil 446, 447 Adverse reactions to intravenous fluorescein angiography 185 anaphylaxis 186 local tissue necrosis 186 nausea 185 pruritus 186 shock and syncope 186 vasovagal attacks 186 vomiting 185 Age-related macular degeneration 205, 254 CNVM 206 hemorrhagic PED 207 hot spot 206, 208 laser photocoagulation 207 photodynamic therapy 207 pigment epithelial detachment 206 polypoidal choroidal vasculopathy 209 retinochoroidal anastomosis 207 transpupillary thermotherapy 207 Alternate cover test 374 Amblyopia 171, 374, 387, 403 classification 387 contrast sensitivity 389 crowding phenomenon 388 diagnosis 388 disparometer 393 distance stereopsis tests 391 fixation disparity 392 fixation disparity curves 392 Frisby stereotest 390, 391 Lang stereotest 390 Lang two pencil test 392 normal stereoacuity 391 preferential looking tests 389 random-dot E stereotest 390 random-dot stereograms 389 special 3-D pictures 390 stereoacuity tests 389 stereopsis 389 Teller acuity 388 Titmus Fly stereotest 389 TNO test 391 Wesson card 393 Wesson fixation disparity card 394 American optical company plates 25 A-mode (Amplitude modulation) 217 A-mode ultrasonography 272 Amplitude modulation scan 240 Andersons criteria 142, 146 Aneurysmal damage to oculomotor nerve 451 Aneurysms 397, 451-453 Angle kappa 372 Angle-closure glaucoma 113, 458 Anisocoria 443, 445, 446 Anomalies of color vision 16 acquired 16 congenital 16 Anomaloscope Nagel 28 Pickford-Nicolson 29 Anterior chamber estimation method 39 Anterior chamber paracentesis 337 Anterior chamber tap 336 Anterior ischemic optic neuropathy 124, 125, 306, 310 Anterior segment evaluation immersion technique 220 Anterior segment photography 179 Anteroior chamber paracentesis 337 Antibiotic susceptibility 325 Antimicrobial susceptibility 321 Antineutrophil cytoplasmic antibody 436 Applications of indocyanine green angiography 205 Aqueous tear deficiency 405 Arden index 282 Argyll-Robertson pupils 446, 458,459 Arrangement tests 25 Edridge-Green Lantern test 30 Farnsworth D-15 test 27 Farnsworth Lantern test (Falant) 29 Farnsworth-Munsell 100-hue test 25 Holmes-Wright Lantern 29 Lantern tests 29 Lanthony desaturated D-15 test 27 A-scan ultrasonography 216, 240, 428 A-scan versus B-scan 237 Asteroid hyalosis 242, 243 Asymmetry of optic disk cupping 118 Atrophic bulbi 256 Atypical retinal pigmentary dystrophies 296 Audiometry 349 Automated perimetry 115 Automated perimetry fixation 136 Autonomic nervous systems 441 A-V patterns 377
B
Bacterial colonies 320 Bacterial keratitis 317 Bagolinis striated glasses Basic perimetry 128 Bebies curve 140, 145 Behets syndrome 350 370
462
C
Calcium alginate swab 317 Calcofluor white 319, 322, 323 Calibration Goldmann applanation tonometer 104 Camera 35 mm 165 35 mm SLR 173 CCD 201 Canaliculi 413, 419 Carrier stage detection 305 Catheter angiography 453, 454 Causes of Horner syndrome 457 Cavernous hemangioma 432, 438 C/D ratio 162 Central areolar atrophy 312 Central scotoma 7 Central serous chorioretinopathy 210, 211 Central serous retinopathy 185, 197 Chloroquine 93, 304 Choroidal and retinochoroidal biopsy 340 Choroidal coloboma 255 Choroidal detachment 250, 365 Choroidal hemangioma 253 Choroidal inflammatory conditions 212 Choroidal melanomas 282
Index
posterior polymorphous dystrophy 89 Corneal grafts 91 Corneal reflection tests 378 double Maddox rod test 380 grading oblique overactions 381 Hess chart 380 Hess screen 379 Hirschbergs test 378 Krimsky test 378 Lees chart 380 Lees screen 379 Maddox tangent scale 379 measurement of cyclodeviations 380 synoptophore 378 Corneal samples 317 Corneal scraping collection 318 Corneal scrapings 317, 322 Corneal topography 46, 52 absolute scale 55 artificial intelligence programs 62 average corneal power 62 axial map 56 color-coded scales 54 corneal eccentricity index 62 corneal indexes 60 corneal maps 56 difference map 56 diffuse reflection techniques 52 elevation map 56 interferometric method-based systems 52 irregularity map 59 Moire deflectometry-based systems 52 normalized scale 55 placido disk system 52 Placidos rings 47 raw photokeratoscope image 53 refractive map 56 relative map 56 simulated keratometry reading 61 specular reflection techniques 52 surface asymmetry index 62 surface regularity index 62 tangential curvature map 56 techniques using scattered lightslit-based systems 52 videokeratoscopy 47 Corneal ulceration 405 Corneal wetting time 406 Corrected comparison 140 Corrected pattern standard deviation 137 Cover test 372 Cover-uncover test 372, 374 Cryotherapy for retinopathy of prematurity 358 Crystalline lens 12 CT-scan 349, 404, 428, 432, 435, 436 Culture media 320 Culture methods 319 Cultures 324 Cup-disk ratio 116, 126 Cyclovertical muscle palsy 397 Cysticercosis 249, 403, 426, 430 Cytology 438 Cytopathic effect 329 Dilated pupil 447, 458 Diplopia 396, 400 Diplopia testing 379 Direct ophthalmoscope 115, 161, 370 Direct ophthalmoscopy 151, 160 Direct smear examination 318, 326 Disciform macular scar 254, 255 Disk-diffusion tests 321 Dislocated lens 251 Dissociated vertical deviations 376 Divergent strabismus 369 Double elevator palsy 403 Double Maddox rod set 370, 396 Double opponent color cells 15 Draeger applanation tonometer 103 Drug or metal toxicity 280 Drugs causing color deficiency 19 Dry eye 405 Dry eyes syndrome 405 Duanes retraction syndrome 395, 400, 401, 403
463
D
Dacryocystography 423 chemiluminescence test 424 CT dacryocystography 423 CT scan 424, 428 dacryoscintigraphy 424 dacryoscopy 424 MRI dacryocystography 423 standardized echography 424 thermography 424 Dark adaptation 281 Dark trough 281 Diabetic III nerve palsy 450 Diabetic maculopathy 189 Diabetic retinopathy 18,212 Diagnosis of uveitis 333 angiotensin converting enzyme 334 antineutrophil cytoplasmic antibody test 334 antinuclear antibody 333 basic investigations 333 fluorescent treponemal antibody absorption test 334 human leucocyte antigens 334 rheumatoid factor 333 serological tests 333 serological tests for syphilis 334 venereal disease research laboratory test 334 Wegeners granulomatosis 334 Diagnostic biopsies 335 Diagnostic vitrectomy 338 Differential blood counts 436 Diffuse lamellar keratitis 91 Digital subtraction ICGA 214 Digital angiography 183 Digital camera 370 Digital imaging 181 Digital stereo imaging 214
E
Ectropion 418 Edinger-Westphal complex 441 Edinger-Westphal nucleus 459 Electrode placement 286 Electrooculogram 279, 280 clinical uses 282 limitations 282 Electrophysiological tests 279 Electroretinogram 279, 283 ELISA test 328, 410, 436 Emmetropic eye 151 Endonasal dye test 423 Endophthalmitis 244, 245, 249 Endothelium corneal 87 Enophthalmos 404 Entropion 418 EOG recording procedure 281 Epicanthus 372 Epiphora 412, 415 Episcleritis 268 Episodic anisocoria 445 Epithelium corneal 86 ERG 305 ERG amplitudes and latency 289 ERG response 287 Esotropia 369 ETDRS chart 3, 11 Evaluation of the retina 244 Evaluation of the vitreous 242 Evaluation of traumatized eye 250 Evaporative DE 405
464
H
Haidinger brushes 13, 378 Haidinger brushes and after images 370 Hand-held Goldmann-type tonometers 100 Draeger tonometer 100 Mackay-Marg tonometer 100 Maklakov applanation tonometer 101 Perkins tonometer 100 tonopen 101 Handling of biopsy material 342 Harlequin syndrome 448 Head posture 370 Head tilt 370 Head tracking 134 Heijl-Krakau method 136 Hemosiderosis 93 Herings opponent color theory 16 Herpes simplex virus 326 Herpetic epithelial keratitis 329 Hertels exophthalmometer 427 Hess chart 370, 404 Histochemistry 439 Histopathology 438 HLA association with uveitis 335 Holmes-Adie syndrome 448 Homonymous hemianopia 370 Horner syndrome 453, 455, 446, 457 HRT print out 118 Hruby lens direct ophthalmoscopy 162 HSV keratitis 328 HSV type 1 and 2 330 Hue saturation 13 Humphrey field analysis 132, 133 Humphrey single field printout 134, 135 Hydatid cyst 426, 430, 438, 439 Hydoxyamphetamine test 457 Hydroxychloroquine 304 Hypercomplex cells 16 Hyperfluorescence 194 autofluorescence 194
F
Fabrys disease 93 Failure of filtering surgery 265 False negatives 136, 138 False positives 136, 138, 143 Fast oscillations of EOG 282 Fine needle aspiration cytology (FNAC) 436 Fine-needle aspiration biopsy 341 corneolimbal-zonular approach 342 limbal approach 341 pars plana approach 341 subretinal approach 342 Fixation target positions 377 Flash stimulus characteristics 286 Flicker cone response 30Hz 289 Fluorescein angiogram phases 187 arteriovenous phase 188 prearterial phase 187 recirculation phase 189 transit phase 189 venous phase 188 Fluorescein angiography 177, 181, 200 arterial and venous phase 178 film type and development 177 late phase 178 mid-phase 178 preinjection or control photograph 178 principle 177 procedure 184 Fluorescein dye test 416, 422 Fluorescein stain 407 FNAC 437 Focal ERG 283 Focal macular ERG 312
G
Ganglion cells 280 Ganzfeld bowl 283, 287 Gaze monitoring 134 Genetics of congenital color deficiencies 18 Giant retinal break 247 Giemsa stain 323, 326 Giemsa-stained smears 324 Glaucoma 263 Glaucoma hemifield test 134, 137, 138, 141, 143 Glioma 432 Global indices 134, 137 Goblet cells 410 Goldenhar syndrome 401 Goldmann contact lens 117 Gonioscopic landmarks 109 Gonioscopic lenses 168
Index
pigment epithelial window defect 195 pre-injection fluorescence 194 pseudofluorescence 194 Hyperlipidemia 93 Hypertelorism 372 Hypotropia 399 choroidal melanoma 226 choroidal thickening 230 congenital glaucoma 222 corneal thickness 222 dislocated lens in vitreous 231 endophthalmitis 224 foreign body localization 230 intraocular tumors 226 measurement of the axial length 222 metastatic carcinoma 226 ocular trauma 230 phthisis bulbi 231 posterior vitreous detachment 224 preretinal foreign bodies 230 retinal detachment 224, 231 retinoblastoma 227 retinoschisis 226 vitreous floaters 223 vitreous hemorrhage 224 Indirect immunofluorescence 328 Indirect immunoperoxidase 328 Indirect ophthalmoscope 153, 154, 370 Indirect ophthalmoscopy 151, 158, 181 head mounted indirect 152 modified monocular indirect 152 monocular indirect 152 penlight ophthalmoscopy 152 slit-lamp indirect 152 Indirect ophthalmoscopy in operating room 157 Indocyanine green 214 Indocyanine green angiography 165, 200, 345 advantages 203 adverse reactions 201 limitations 203 procedure 202 Infectious keratitis 280 Infectious keratitis: diagnostic procedures 316 Infrathreshold 130 Inner retinal dysfunction 300 Instant type film 174 Intermediate uveitis 348 Intermittent exotropia 375 International Society for Clinical Electrophysiology of Vision 280, 314 Interpretation of A-scan 222 Interpupillary distance 371, 377 Intervention for ROP 358 cryotherapy 358 laser ablation 359 parental counseling 360 scleral buckling 359 surgical intervention 359 vitrectomy 359 Intracorneal deposits 93 Intranuclear intracytoplasmic inclusions 326 Intraocular foreign body 243, 251, 362 binocular indirect ophthalmoscopy with scleral indentation 363 corneal wound 363 foreign body in the angle 363 gonioscopy 363 initial fundus examination 363 intralenticular foreign body 363 intraretinal hemorrhage 364 iris hole 363 lens opacity 363 metallic 362 non-metallic 362 siderosis bulbi 363, 364 signs of double perforation 364 slit-lamp examination 362 vitreous hemorrhage 364 vitreous track 364 Intraocular lenses 263 Intraocular tumors 252 Iris and ciliary body biopsy 339 Iris cyst 267 Iris fluorescein angiography 198 Iris melanomas 266 Iris neovascularization 198 Iris nevi 266 Iris thickness 262 Iris-ciliary process distance 262 Iris-lens angle 262 Iris-zonule distance 262 Ischemic III cranial nerve palsy 450 Ischemic vascular retinal disorders 301 Ishihara pseudo-isochromatic plates 22 ISNT rule 118 Isolated rod response 287 Isolated third cranial nerve palsy 449
465
I
Identification of fungal species 321 Idiopathic orbital inflammatory disease 429 III cranial nerve palsy 453 IMAGE-net digital imaging system 183 Imaging system 169 Imaging techniques 427 Immersion B-scan 257 Immunofluorescence assay 327 Immunoglobulins 410 Immunohistochemistry 343, 439 Incisional biopsy 437 Incomitant strabismus 395 Indications of diagnostic paracentesis 336 amyloidosis 336 Behets disease 336, 337 endophthalmitis 336 hemorrhagic glaucoma 336 leukemia 336 malignant melanoma 336 persistent hyperplastic primary vitreous 336 phacolytic glaucoma 336 retinoblastoma 336 sarcoidosis 336 toxocara canis 336 toxoplasma gondii 336 Indications for diagnostic biopsies 335 Indications for electroretinography 296 Indications for vitreous tap 337 amyloidosis 337 asteroid hyalosis 337 Behets disease 337 CMV retinitis 337 endophthalmitis 337 reticulum cell sarcoma 337 retinoblastoma 337 sympathetic ophthalmia 337 Indications of A-scan 222 anterior chamber depth 222 asteroid hyalosis 223 biometry 222, 231 choroidal detachment 230 choroidal hemangioma 226 choroidal hemorrhage 226
J
Jaeger notation 3 Jaegers charts 3 Jones tests 422 Jones tests I 422 Jones tests II 422
K
Keratitis 326 Keratoconjunctivitis sicca 407
466
M
Mackay-Marg tonometer 103 Macula 7 Macular edema 347, 348 Macular photoreceptor function 280 Magnetic resonance angiography (MRA) 434, 435, 453 Magnetic resonance imaging 433 Magnification 34 continuous zoom 34 flip type 34 Malignant lacrimal gland tumor 432 Malingering 308 Mantoux test 349 Marcus Gunn jaw-winking Maximal combined response 288 Maxwell spot 13 Mean defect 140 Mean sensitivity 140 Measurement of ocular deviation 375 Measurement of vergences 381 convergence sustenance 382 horizontal vergences 381 near point of convergence 382 torsional vergences 381 vertical vergences 381 Medial canthal tendon laxity 417 Meibomian gland dysfunction 405 Melanoma 252 Metastatic choroidal carcinoma 253 Methods for localization of IOFB 364 Berman and Roper-Hall localizers 364 Bromleys method 366 combined B- and vector A-scan 364 computerized tomographic scan 367 Dixons method 366 Mac Kenzies method 366 magnetic resonance imaging 367 Mc Rigors method 366 plain X-ray 365, 366 radio opaque markers 366 Sweets method 366 ultrasonography 364 ultrasound biomicroscopy 365 use of contrast material 366 use of limbal ring 366 Microbial keratitis 316 Microbiological cultures 343
L
Lacrimal excretory apparatus 412 Lacrimal gland 412 Lacrimal sac 413 Lacrimal sac swelling 416 Lacrimation 415 Lactoferrin assays 410 Lactophenol cotton blue 323 Laser in situ keratomileusis 90 LASIK surgery 91, 157 Latex agglutination 328 Leak 195 choroidal leak 197 disk edema 196 retinal leak 196 vitreous leak 196 Leakage of fluorescein 189 Lebers congenital amaurosis 305 Lebers hereditary optic neuropathy 307 Lees screen 370 Lens rim artifact 146 Letter E 6 Leukemic infiltration of iris 266 Light adaptation 281 Light and electron microscopy 343 Light peak 281 Light source 153 Light-induced rise of the resting potential 281 Light-near dissociation 445 Limbal dermoid 262 Limitations of ERG 290 Listers perimeter 377 Loss variance 140 Low speed angiography 201, 204 Low-coherence interforometry 269 Lumbar puncture 349, 454 Luminescence 181 Lymph node biopsy 345
N
Nasalization of the vessels 121 Nasolacrimal duct 414 Near blindness 10 Near vision chart 5 Necrotizing scleritis 268 Negative a-wave 288 Negative ERG 300 Nerve fiber layer 179 Nerve supply 412 Neurological disorders of pupil 441 Neuroretinal notch 120 Neuroretinal rim 118, 121, 123 Neuroretinal rim notch 119 Nikor Medikor lens 173 Nodular scleritis 267 Noncom robo 170 Noncontact lenses 115, 116, 152 Noncontact tonometer 96 Non-invasive break-up time 406 Nonisolated third cranial nerve palsy 449
Index
Non-viral keratitis : bacterial, fungal and acanthamoeba 316, 319, 322 Normal cornea 85 Normal cornea, shape 48 Normal fundus fluorescein angiography 187 Normal globe 242 Normal macula 270 Nystagmus 370 Optic coherence tomography 269 Optic disk cupping 142 Optic disk evaluation in glaucoma 115 Optic nerve 7, 444 Optic nerve avulsion 252 Optic nerve demyelination 306 Optic nerve drusen 255 Optic nerve head coloboma 124, 257 Optic nerve head drusen 256 Optic nerve hypoplasia 404 Optic tract 444 Optical coherence tomography 115, 269, 346 Optical principles 106 Optical system of fundus camera 174 Optico kinetic nystagmus drum 370 Optics 84 Optics of slit-lamp 34 clinical procedure 35 Haag-Streit type illumination 34 illumination system 34 observation system 34 Zeiss type illumination system 34 Orbicularis oculi 414 Orbital arteriography 435 Orbital blow-out fractures 395 Orbital venography 435 Oropharynx dye appearance test 423 Oscillatory potentials 288 Overlay technique 214 Peripheral choroidal tumors 267 Peripheral iridoplasty 264 Perkins applanation tonometer 103 Pharmacologic miosis 458 Pharmacologic mydriasis 455 Pharmacologically dilated pupils 446 Phases of ICGA 204 arteriovenous phases 204 between 2 and 5 seconds 204 between 5 seconds and several minutes 204 beyond several minutes 204 early phase 204 first 2 seconds 204 late phase 205 middle phase 205 prearterial and arterial phases 204 Photography in operation theatre 168 Photography of face 172 Photography of pupil 172 Photoreceptor dysfunction 295 Phthisis bulbi 254, 255 Physics of ultrasound 217 Physiological cupping 123 Pigmentary glaucoma 265 Pigmentation 113 Pilocarpine (1%) test 456 Pilocarpine 455 Pinch test 417 Pinhole 7 Pitfalls of A-scan 234 artifacts 235 cataract 236 errors in the axial length measurement by biometry 235 intraocular foreign bodies 235 low reflective spike 235 methylcellulose 236 misalignment 236 multiple reflection artifacts 234 posterior staphyloma 236 refractive errors 236 tumors 235 vitreoretinal diseases 235 Pituitary tumor 125 Plateau iris syndrome 263 Pneumatic tonometer 103 Poland anomaly 400 Polaroid or Fuji film 174 Polymerase chain reaction 322, 325, 339, 343 Poor vision in infants 280 Positive b-wave 288 Posterior globe rupture 252 Posterior staphyloma 255, 272
467
O
Occluder 7, 370 Occult choroidal neovascular membranes 200 OCT in macular diseases 270 central serous chorioretinopathy 275, 276 diabetic macular edema 273 diabetic retinopathy with cystoid macular edema 274 diabetic retinopathy with serous retinal detachment 274 foveal retinal detachment 273 high myopic eyes 272 juvenile retinoschisis 277 macular hole 270 normal macula 271 posterior staphyloma 272 preretinal macular fibrosis 272, 273 retinoschisis 273 rhegmatogenous retinal detachment 276 vitelliform macular dystrophy 277 Octopus 139 Octopus field analyzer 132 Octopus single field printout 138 Ocular albinism 305, 307 Ocular anatomy on ultrasound biomicroscopy 261 Ocular deviation 371 Ocular ischemic syndrome 302 Ocular microbiology 316 Ocular movements 171 Ocular trauma 266 Oculomotor palsy 446 Open-angle glaucoma 123, 133 Ophthalmic imaging systems 170 Ophthalmic photography 165 Ophthalmoplegia 396, 452 Ophthalmoplegic migraine 455 Ophthalmoscopy 151 Opponent color cells 15 Optic chiasm 444
P
Painful ophthalmoplegias 455 Pair of scleral depressors 153 Papanicolaou stain 326, 327, 330, 331 Papilledema 306 Parallelopiped 39, 40, 41, 43, 110 Paralytic strabismus 395 Pattern deviation plot 137 Pattern electroretinogram 280, 283, 290 clinical uses 292 evaluation of macular function 292 ganglion cell dysfunction 292 Pattern standard deviation 137 PCR technique 329 Pediatric ERG recording 290 Pediatric visual assessment 280 Pediatric visual impairment 305 Penlight ophthalmoscopy 160 Perimeter 370 Perimetry 128, 151 Peripapillary atrophy 121, 122 Peripheral anterior synechia 112
468
Q
Quantitative echography Quinine 304 221
S
Sampaolesi line 110 Scanning electron microscopy 440 Scanning laser ophthalmoscope 202 Scattering 239 Schitz tonometer 95, 102 Schirmer I test 406, 419 Schirmer II test 407, 420 Schirmers strip 408 Schirmers test 408, 419 Schirmers test with nasal stimulation 407 Scleral depression 154, 157 Scleral staphyloma 268 Scotoma suppression 385 Sensors 136 Serum angiotensin converting enzyme 436 Serum autoantibodies 410 Seven in one printout 138, 139 Seven in one single field printout 145 Shell vial technique 329 Short term fluctuation 137, 140 Simple anisocoria 458 Single-flash cone response 289 Sixth cranial nerve palsy 398, 399 Sjgrens syndrome 410
R
Radio immunoassay 328 Radiological studies 349 Radionucleotide studies 349 RAPD 443 Reader paratrigeminal syndrome 455 Reading charts 11 Record visual acuity 2 Recording electrode 284 Burian-Allen 284 contact lens 5 gold foil 285 ground 286 LVP-Zari 285 reference 285 Red and green goggles 370 Red-free photography 179 Reference values for corneal aberrations 68
Index
Slit-lamp 33, 259, 317, Slit-lamp attachments 44 digital camera 44 Goldmann tonometer 44 gonioscope 44 Hruby lens 44 pachymeter 44 Slit-lamp biomicroscopy 151, 181, 270 Slit-lamp examination 33, 36, 418 Smears 322 Snap back test 417 Snellen chart 2, 3, 370, 388 Specialized types of ERG 284 Specular microscopy 169 Specular photography 169 Spielmann occluder 370 Spielmann translucent occluder 373 Splinter hemorrhages 121 Split limbal technique 38 Stargardts macular dystrophy 305, 313 Statistical analysis 134 Statpac program 134 Stereophotography 185 Sterilization of different tonometers 102, 104 Steriopsis 33 Stevens-Johnson syndrome 410 Strabismus 365,369, 395 Stroma 87 Subepithelial nerve plexus 86 Superior oblique palsy 397 Suprathreshold 130 Suprathreshold screening 132 Swedish interactive thresholding algorithm (SITA) 132 Swinging-light pupil test 443, 445 Sympathetic pathway 442 Sympathomimetic mydriasis 455 Synoptophore 370, 371, 377, 384, 387 Syringing 416, 420 conical beam 39 diffuse illumination 36 direct 36 direct focal illumination 37 indirect illumination 40 narrow beam 37 oscillatory illumination 43 retroillumination 41 sclerotic scatter 42 specular reflection 42 tangential illumination 43 Telecanthus 372 Teleophthalmology 170 Teller acuity cards 370 Temporal hemianopia 125, 147 Tendency oriented perimetry 133 Test programs 133 Humphrey 10-2, 30-2, 24-2 133 macular grid program 133 macular program M2X 133 octopus G1X, G2 133 Testing strategy 132 Tests for suppression 383 after image test 384, 385 Bagolini glasses test 384 Bjerrum screens 385 binocular perimetry 385 depth of scotoma 385 Hess screen 385 Lees screen 385 suppression scotoma 385 synoptophore 384 Worth four dot test 384 Theories of color vision 14 Granits theory 14 Herings theory 14 Young-Helmholtz theory 14 Thioridazine 304 Third cranial nerve dysfunction 448 Third cranial nerve palsy 396 Three-dimensional ultrasound tomography 240 Three-step test 397 Threshold 130 Threshold determination 132 Thyroid function tests 436 Thyroid ophthalmopathy 426, 432 Time-gain compensation 259 Tissue culture methods 328 Tolosa-Hunt syndrome 449, 454 Tonomerty 95, 151 Goldmann applanation tonometer 95 Schitz tonometry 95 Tonometry on irregular corneas 103 Tonometry over gas filled eyes 103 Tonometry over soft contact lens 103 Topographic echography 220 Total deviation plot 137 Trabecular-iris angle 262 Traction retinal detachment 247, 248 Transillumination 158 Transmission electron microscopy 440 Transport of corneal samples 317 Trichromatic theory of Young 16 Trophozoites 323 Tumors of uvea 266 Types of gonioscopy 106 direct 106 indirect 108 Types of perimetry 129 automated 129 computerized 129 Goldmann perimeter 129, 130 kinetic 129 manual kinetic 129 static 129, 130 tangent screen 129
469
U
Ultrasonography 151, 428, 430 Ultrasound 346, 430 Ultrasound biomicroscopy 259, 262, 346 Ultrasound unit 240 Uses of corneal topography 69 keratoconus 69 keratoglobus70 pellucid marginal degeneration 70 pterygium 74 Terriens marginal degeneration 71 Uveitis diagnostic procedures 333
V
Van Hericks technique 38, 39 Varicella zoster virus 328 Vascular filling defect 192 choroidal vascular filling defect 192 retinal vascular filling defects 192 vascular filling defects of the disk 192 Vector A-scan 240 Vector A-scan display 219 VEP 308 Viral antigens in corneal scrapings 328 Viral corneal ulcers 316 Viral keratitis 326
T
Table-top retinal cameras 174 Taste test 422 Tear deficient DE 405 Tear ferning 410 Tear film break-up time 406 Tear film osmolarity 410 Tear secretion 415 Techniques of slit-lamp examination 36 broad beam 39
470
W
Wegeners granulomatosis 436, 454 Westphal-Piltz reaction 442 Wide-angle angiography 214 Wide-angle viewing system 163 panoret 163 retcam 163 Wilsons disease 93 Worth four dot test 387
X
X-ray 404, 427, 431
Z
Zeiss fundus camera 201 Zernike polynomials 64 Ziehl-Neelsen 323 Ziehl-Neelsen technique 324